manualshive.com logo in svg

Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories SEL-700G Series, Instruction Manual

The Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories SEL-700G Series Instruction Manual is your comprehensive guide to effectively operate and maintain your SEL-700G product. This essential manual is available for free download from manualshive.com, ensuring easy access to valuable information to maximise the performance of your SEL-700G Series.

Share
Download
background image

8.16

SEL-700G Relay

Instruction Manual

Date Code 20170814

Front-Panel Operations

Operation and Target LEDs

Table 8.4

SEL-700GT and SEL-700GW Front-Panel Operator Control Functions 

Continually press the 

LOCK

 operator control pushbutton for three (3) seconds to engage/

disengage the lock function (Latch LT01 functions as Lock with the latch in reset state 
equivalent to the engaged lock). While this pushbutton is pressed, the corresponding LED 
flashes on and off, indicating a pending engagement or disengagement of the lock func-
tion. The LED illuminates constantly to indicate the engaged state. While the lock func-
tion is engaged, the following operator control is “locked in position” (assuming factory-
default settings): 

CLOSE

.

While “locked in position,” this operator control cannot change state if pressed—the 
corresponding LEDs remain in the same state. When the lock function is engaged, the 

CLOSE

 operator control cannot close 

GEN BRKR

 or 

TIE BRKR

, but the 

TRIP

 operator control 

can still trip 

GEN BRKR

 or 

TIE BRKR

.

NOTE: 

LED labels shown are for the 

SEL-700GT. For the SEL-700GW, substitute 

GEN BRKR

 with 

BRKR X

 and 

TIE BRKR

 with 

BRKR X

.

Press the 

SELECT

 pushbutton to select 

GEN BRKR

 or 

TIE BRKR

. If 

GEN BRKR

 is selected, 

GEN 

BRKR

 LED is on and if 

TIE BRKR

 is selected, 

TIE BRKR

 LED is on. The 

SELECT

 pushbutton 

allows a breaker selection before 

CLOSE

 or 

TRIP

 pushbuttons are used.

Press the 

CLOSE

 operator control pushbutton to close the selected breaker. Corresponding 

BRKR CLOSED

 LED illuminates to indicate that the breaker is closed.

Option: Set a delay, so that the operator can press the 

CLOSE

 operator control pushbut-

ton and then move a safe distance away from the breaker before the SEL-700GT or 
SEL-700GW issues a close (the 

CLOSE

 operator control comes with no set delay in the 

factory settings). With a set delay, press the 

CLOSE

 operator control pushbutton 

momentarily, and notice that the 

BRKR CLOSED

 LED flashes on and off during the delay 

time, indicating a pending close. Abort the pending close by pressing the 

CLOSE

 oper-

ator control pushbutton again or by pressing the 

TRIP

 operator control pushbutton. 

This delay setting for the 

CLOSE

 operator control is SV03PU (range: 0 to 3000 sec-

onds; factory set at 0—no delay). The delay is set via the SET L command. See 
Table 4.57 for more information.

Press the 

TRIP

 operator control pushbutton to trip the GEN BRKR (and take the control to 

the lockout state). 

GEN

 

BRKR OPEN

 LED illuminates to indicate that the breaker is open.

Option: Set a delay, so that the operator can press the 

TRIP

 operator control pushbutton 

and then move a safe distance away from the breaker before the SEL-700GT or 
SEL-700GW issues a trip (the 

TRIP

 operator control comes with no set delay in the 

factory settings). With a set delay, press the 

TRIP

 operator control pushbutton momen-

tarily and notice that the corresponding 

GEN

 

BRKR OPEN

 LED flashes on and off during 

the delay time, indicating a pending trip. Abort the pending trip by pressing the 

TRIP

 

operator control pushbutton again or by pressing the 

CLOSE

 operator control pushbut-

ton. This delay setting for the 

TRIP

 operator control is SV04PU (range: 0 to 3000 sec-

onds; factory-set at 0—no delay). The delay is set via the SET L command. See 
Table 4.57 for more information.

ENABLED

LOCK

DISABLED

GEN BRKR 

SELECT

TIE BRKR

GEN BRKR CLOSED

CLOSE

TIE BRKR CLOSED

GEN BRKR OPEN

TRIP

TIE BRKR OPEN

Summary of Contents for SEL-700G Series

Page 1: ...SEL 700G Generator and Intertie Protection Relays Instruction Manual SEL 700G0 SEL 700G1 SEL 700GT SEL 700GW 20170814 PM700G 01 NB ...

Page 2: ...atents Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories Inc reserves all rights and benefits afforded under federal and international copyright and patent laws in its products including without limitation software firmware and documentation The information in this document is provided for informational use only and is subject to change without notice Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories Inc has approved only th...

Page 3: ...tor Relay Application Example 1 2 29 SEL 700G1 Generator Relay Application Example 2 2 31 SEL 700GT Intertie Relay Application 2 33 SEL 700GW Wind Generator Relay Application 2 35 Thermal Protection of Generator and Prime Mover 2 36 Field Ground Protection of Generator 2 36 Field Serviceability 2 37 Section 3 PC Software Overview 3 1 Setup 3 2 Terminal 3 3 Settings Database Management and Drivers ...

Page 4: ...ommunications Interfaces 7 1 Communications Protocols 7 10 SEL ASCII Protocol and Commands 7 14 Section 8 Front Panel Operations Overview 8 1 Front Panel Layout 8 1 Human Machine Interface 8 2 Operation and Target LEDs 8 12 Section 9 Analyzing Events Overview 9 1 Event Reporting 9 2 Section 10 Testing and Troubleshooting Overview 10 1 Testing Tools 10 1 Commissioning Tests 10 5 Periodic Tests Rout...

Page 5: ...eration F 3 IEC 61850 Configuration F 11 Logical Node Extensions F 13 Logical Nodes F 18 Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement F 38 ACSI Conformance Statements F 44 Appendix G DeviceNet Communications Overview G 1 DeviceNet Card G 1 Features G 2 Electronic Data Sheet G 3 Appendix H Synchrophasors Overview H 1 Synchrophasor Measurement H 2 Settings for Synchrophasors H 4 Serial Port Setting...

Page 6: ...iv SEL 700G Relay Instruction Manual Date Code 20170814 Table of Contents Appendix K Analog Quantities Glossary Index SEL 700G Relay Command Summary ...

Page 7: ...nations 2 12 Table 2 17 Four Digital Inputs One Form B Digital Output Two Form C Digital Outputs 4 DI 3 DO Card Terminal Designations 2 13 Table 2 18 Jumper Functions and Default Positions 2 18 Table 2 19 Typical Maximum RTD Lead Length 2 22 Table 3 1 SEL Software Solutions 3 1 Table 3 2 ACSELERATOR QuickSet SEL 5030 Software 3 1 Table 3 3 File Tools Menus 3 7 Table 3 4 QuickSet Help 3 15 Table 4 ...

Page 8: ...4 47 X Side Synchronism Check Settings 4 153 Table 4 48 Synchronism Check Settings 4 167 Table 4 49 Autosynchronism Settings 4 174 Table 4 50 Loss of Potential LOP Settings 4 179 Table 4 51 Demand Meter Settings 4 180 Table 4 52 Pole Open Logic Settings 4 185 Table 4 53 Trip Close Logic Settings 4 186 Table 4 54 Enable Settings 4 193 Table 4 55 Latch Bits Equation Settings 4 195 Table 4 56 SELOGIC...

Page 9: ...Table 5 4 Maximum Minimum Meter Values 5 7 Table 5 5 RMS Meter Values 5 9 Table 5 6 Demand Values 5 11 Table 5 7 Synchrophasor Measured Values 5 12 Table 5 8 Measured Differential Meter 5 13 Table 5 9 Measured Harmonic Meter Values 5 13 Table 5 10 Breaker Maintenance Information for a 25 kV Circuit Breaker 5 15 Table 5 11 Breaker Monitor Settings 5 16 Table 5 12 Breaker Monitor Output 5 24 Table 6...

Page 10: ...42 Table 7 50 STATUS Command Relay Self Test Status 7 44 Table 7 51 STATUS Command Report and Definitions 7 44 Table 7 52 SUMMARY Command 7 46 Table 7 53 SYN Command 7 46 Table 7 54 TARGET Command Display Relay Word Bit Status 7 46 Table 7 55 TARGET Command Format 7 46 Table 7 56 Front Panel LEDs and the TAR 0 Command 7 47 Table 7 57 TIME Command View Change Time 7 47 Table 7 58 TRIGGER Command Tr...

Page 11: ... METER Region Map for GT Model With Single Synchronism C 12 Table C 14 Communications Processor METER Region Map for GT Model With Dual Single Synchronism C 13 Table C 15 Communications Processor TARGET Region C 14 Table C 16 Communications Processor DEMAND Region Map C 15 Table D 1 DNP3 Implementation Levels D 1 Table D 2 Selected DNP3 Function Codes D 3 Table D 3 DNP3 Access Methods D 4 Table D ...

Page 12: ...ition F 14 Table F 10 Circuit Breaker Supervision Per Phase Logical Node Class Definition F 15 Table F 11 Compatible Logical Nodes With Extensions F 15 Table F 12 Measurement Logical Node Class Definition F 15 Table F 13 Measurement Logical Node Class Definition F 16 Table F 14 Metering Statistics Logical Node Class Definition F 17 Table F 15 Circuit Breaker Logical Node Class Definition F 17 Tabl...

Page 13: ...asors in Bytes H 17 Table H 13 Example Synchrophasor Global Settings H 19 Table H 14 Example Synchrophasor Logic Settings H 19 Table H 15 Example Synchrophasor SELOGIC Settings H 20 Table H 16 Example Synchrophasor Port Settings H 20 Table I 1 Number of MIRRORED BITS Messages for Different Data Rates I 2 Table I 2 Positions of the MIRRORED BITS I 3 Table I 3 MIRRORED BITS Values for a RXDFLT Setti...

Page 14: ...This page intentionally left blank ...

Page 15: ...r Without Current Differential Protection 2 26 Figure 2 18 SEL 700G0 Relay AC Connection Example Solidly Grounded Generator With Ground Differential Protection 87N 2 26 Figure 2 19 SEL 700G0 Relay High Impedance Grounded Generator With Synchronism Check and Without Current Differential Protection 2 27 Figure 2 20 SEL 700G1 Relay AC Connection Example High Impedance Grounded Generator With Step Up ...

Page 16: ...3 Figure 4 17 REF Enable Logic 4 35 Figure 4 18 REF Directional Element 4 35 Figure 4 19 REF Protection Output Extremely Inverse Time O C 4 36 Figure 4 20 Effect of X_CUR_IN Setting on Polarizing Current 4 37 Figure 4 21 64G Element Operating Characteristic 4 39 Figure 4 22 64G Logic Diagram 4 45 Figure 4 23 Field Ground Protection 64F Elements Logic 4 46 Figure 4 24 Three Phase Distance Element O...

Page 17: ...se C2 4 100 Figure 4 69 IEC Class C Curve Extremely Inverse C3 4 100 Figure 4 70 IEC Long Time Inverse Curve C4 4 101 Figure 4 71 IEC Short Time Inverse Curve C5 4 101 Figure 4 72 General Logic Flow of Directional Control for Residual Ground Overcurrent Elements 4 102 Figure 4 73 General Logic Flow of Directional Control for Neutral Ground Overcurrent Elements 4 102 Figure 4 74 Internal Enables DI...

Page 18: ...igure 4 110 Breaker Close Failure Logic Diagram 4 158 Figure 4 111 Synchronism Check Function Angle Characteristics 4 159 Figure 4 112 Synchronism Check Voltage Window and Slip Frequency Elements 4 165 Figure 4 113 Synchronism Check Elements 4 166 Figure 4 114 Angle Difference Between VPY and VS Compensated by Breaker Close Time fPY fS and VPY Shown as Reference in This Example 4 170 Figure 4 115 ...

Page 19: ...ex Power Measurement Conventions 5 2 Figure 5 2 METER Command Report for SEL 700G1 With Synchronism Check and Neutral Voltage Inputs 5 4 Figure 5 3 MET T Report for SEL 700G0 Model 5 5 Figure 5 4 Device Response to the METER E Command 5 6 Figure 5 5 Device Response to the METER RE Command 5 6 Figure 5 6 Device Response to the METER WE Command 5 6 Figure 5 7 Device Response to the METER M Command 5...

Page 20: ...d 7 45 Figure 8 1 Front Panel Overview 8 2 Figure 8 2 Access Level Security Padlock Symbol 8 3 Figure 8 3 Password Entry Screen 8 3 Figure 8 4 Front Panel Pushbuttons 8 4 Figure 8 5 Main Menu 8 5 Figure 8 6 MAIN Menu and METER Submenu 8 5 Figure 8 7 METER Menu and ENERGY Submenu 8 6 Figure 8 8 Relay Response When Energy or Max Min Demand Peak Demand Metering Is Reset 8 6 Figure 8 9 Relay Response ...

Page 21: ...ta Voltage Source Connections 10 11 Figure B 1 Firmware File Transfer Process B 7 Figure C 1 SEL Communications Processor Star Integration Network C 3 Figure C 2 Multitiered SEL Communications Processor Architecture C 4 Figure C 3 Enhancing Multidrop Networks With SEL Communications Processors C 6 Figure C 4 Example of SEL Relay and SEL Communications Processor Configuration C 7 Figure D 1 Applica...

Page 22: ...This page intentionally left blank ...

Page 23: ...nction describes the monitoring functions Section 6 Settings Describes how to view enter and record settings for protection control communications logic and monitoring Section 7 Communications Describes how to connect the SEL 700G to a PC for communication shows serial port pinouts lists and defines serial port commands Describes the communications port interfaces and protocols supported by the re...

Page 24: ...sts and describes the Analog Quantities outputs of analog elements SEL 700G Relay Command Summary Briefly describes the serial port commands that are fully described in Section 7 Communications Safety Information Dangers Warnings and Cautions This manual uses three kinds of hazard statements defined as follows CAUTION To ensure proper safety and operation the equipment ratings installation instruc...

Page 25: ...en faites mauvais usage Ne pas recharger démonter chauffer à plus de 100 C ou incinérer Éliminez les vieilles piles suivant les instructions du fabricant Gardez la pile hors de la portée des enfants For use in Pollution Degree 2 environment Pour l utilisation dans un environnement de Degré de Pollution 2 Ambient air temperature shall not exceed 50 C 122 F La température de l air ambiant ne doit pa...

Page 26: ...DANGER Contact with instrument terminals can cause electrical shock that can result in injury or death DANGER Tout contact avec les bornes de l appareil peut causer un choc électrique pouvant entraîner des blessures ou la mort WARNING Use of this equipment in a manner other than specified in this manual can impair operator safety safeguards provided by this equipment AVERTISSEMENT L utilisation de...

Page 27: ...atiques Quand on travaille sur le relais avec les panneaux avant ou du dessus enlevés toutes les surfaces et le personnel doivent être mis à la terre convenablement pour éviter les dommages à l équipement CAUTION Equipment components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge ESD Undetectable permanent damage can result if you do not use proper ESD procedures Ground yourself your work surface and th...

Page 28: ...ples This instruction manual uses several example illustrations and instructions to explain how to effectively operate the SEL 700G These examples are for demonstration purposes only the firmware identification information or settings values included in these examples may not necessarily match those in the present version of your SEL 700G Example Description STATUS Commands typed at a command line...

Page 29: ...roduct Labels You can find the serial number model number and rating of the product on the labels located on the left side panel of the relay The example below shows product labels for high voltage and low voltage power supply options for high voltage supply for low voltage supply ...

Page 30: ...t look into the end of an optical cable connected to an optical output Do not look into the fiber ports connectors Do not perform any procedures or adjustments that are not described in this manual During installation maintenance or testing of the optical ports only use test equipment classified as Class 1 laser products Incorporated components such as transceivers and laser LED emitters are not u...

Page 31: ...3838 Fax 1 509 332 7990 Internet selinc com support Email info selinc com Condition Range Description Indoor outdoor use Indoor Altitudea a Consult the factory for derating specifications for higher altitude applications To 2000 m Temperature IEC Performance Rating per IEC EN 60068 2 1 and IEC EN 60068 2 2 40 to 85 C Relative humidity 5 to 95 Main supply voltage fluctuations To 10 of Nominal volta...

Page 32: ...This page intentionally left blank ...

Page 33: ...rent voltage input cards The current voltage input cards are located in Slot Z and Slot E in the relay Slot Z cards are assigned a two digit code beginning with the number 8 in the SEL 700G Model Options Table MOT see Models on page 1 5 For example 81 in the MOT for Slot Z indicates a SELECT 4 ACI 3 AVI card with 3 phase ac current inputs 1 A nominal neutral ac current input 1 A nominal and 3 phas...

Page 34: ...00G1 Full generator protection 4 ACI 3 AVI 81 82 85 86 IAX IBX ICX IN VAX VBX VCX 3 ACIE 73 77 IAY IBY ICY 700G1 Full generator protection plus see Table 1 2 for additional protection elements 4 ACI 3 AVI 81 82 85 86 IAX IBX ICX IN VAX VBX VCX 3 ACI 2 AVI 72 76 IAY IBY ICY VS VN 700GT Intertie protection 1 ACI 84 88 IN 3 ACI 4 AVI 71 75 IAY IBY ICY VS VAY VBY VCY 700GT Intertie and generator prote...

Page 35: ...x x x x x 27Y Undervoltage x x 27S Synchronism Undervoltage x x x x 59X Overvoltage P Q G x x x x x 59Y Overvoltage P Q G x x 59S Synchronism Overvoltage x x x x 32X Directional Power x x x x x 32Y Directional Power x x 81X Over Underfrequency x x x x x 81Y Over Underfrequency x x 81RX Rate of Change of Frequency x x x x x 81RY Rate of Change of Frequency x x BFX Breaker Failure x x x x x x BFY Br...

Page 36: ...ance Grounded Resistance Grounded Solidly Grounded 21 Backup Element Compensator Distance DC Availablea Availablea Availablea 24 Volts Hertz Element Recommended Recommended Recommended 27 Undervoltage Optional Optional Optional 32 Reverse Low Forward Power Recommended Recommended Recommended 40 Loss of Field Recommended Recommended Recommended 46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Recommended Recommend...

Page 37: ...ble at selinc com products under SEL Literature Ordering Information Model Option Tables Options and accessories are listed below SEL 700G Base Unit Front panel with large LCD display Four programmable pushbuttons with eight LEDs Eight target LEDs six programmable Operator control interface Front EIA 232 port Power supply card with two digital inputs and three digital outputs Slot A Processor and ...

Page 38: ...odule on the EIA 232 port using an SEL 2812M or SEL 2814M for ST connectors and an SEL 2800M Fiber Optic Transceiver for V pin connectors the SEL 2600 requires the PROTO setting to be set to SEL protocol at a data rate of 2400 bps SEL 2600 RTD Module on the EIA 485 port using an SEL 2820 V pin transceiver for V pin connectors and an SEL 2824 Fiber Optic Transceiver for ST connectors the SEL 2600 r...

Page 39: ...s including adapter plates visit http www2 selinc com mounting_selector Applications Section 2 Installation includes ac and dc connection diagrams for various applications The following is a list of possible application scenarios Small to large generator protection Intertie or intertie and generator protection Multiple wind generator feeder protection With or without external RTD Module SEL 2600 W...

Page 40: ...us Setting the date and time Perform these tasks to gain a fundamental understanding of the relay operation Powering the Relay Power the SEL 700G with 125 250 Vac dc or 24 48 Vdc depending on the part number Observe proper polarity as indicated by the H terminal A01 and the N terminal A02 on the power connections Connect the ground lead see Grounding Earthing Connections on page 2 20 Once connecte...

Page 41: ...link You will see the prompt at the left side of the computer screen Column 1 If you do not see the prompt check the cable connections and confirm that the settings in the terminal emulation program are the default values in Table 1 4 Step 6 Type QUIT Enter to view the relay report header You will see a computer screen display similar to Figure 1 2 If you see jumbled characters change the terminal...

Page 42: ...CX IAY IBY ICY IN VAX VBX VCX VAY VBY VCY 12 10 11 3 3 8 28 12 7 12 5 4 7 VS 2 Relay Enabled Figure 1 3 STA Command Response No Communications Card or EIA 232 EIA 485 Communications Card STA Enter SEL 700GT Date 02 23 2010 Time 13 20 24 983 INTERTIE RELAY Time Source Internal Serial Num 000000000000000 FID SEL 700G X133 V0 Z001001 D20100219 CID 7170 PART NUM 0700GT1BA30X7181063X Self Tests W Warn ...

Page 43: ...ill reply 2009 7 29 If the DATE_F setting is DMY the relay will reply 29 7 2009 Changing the Date Type DAT followed by the correct date at the prompt to change the date stored in the relay For example to change the date to May 2 2009 DATE_F MDY enter the following at the action prompt DAT 5 2 09 You can separate the month day and year parameters with spaces commas slashes colons and semicolons TIM...

Page 44: ...YE Rated Continuous Voltage 300 Vac 10 Second Thermal 600 Vac Burden 0 1 VA Input Impedance 4 M differential phase to phase 7 M common mode phase to chassis Power Supply Relay Start Up Time Approximately 5 10 seconds after power is applied until ENABLED LED turns on 125 250 Vdc or 120 240 Vac Rated Supply Voltage 110 240 Vac 50 60 Hz 110 250 Vdc Input Voltage Range 85 264 Vac 85 275 Vdc Power Cons...

Page 45: ...z AC 15 Operational Voltage Ue 120 Vac 240 Vac Operational Current Ie 3 A 1 5 A Make Current 30 A 15 A Break Current 3 A 1 5 A Electromagnetic loads 72 VA PF 0 3 50 60 Hz 110 V ON for 88 137 5 Vdc OFF below 66 Vdc 48 V ON for 38 4 60 Vdc OFF below 28 8 Vdc 24 V ON for 15 30 Vdc OFF for 5 Vdc When Used With AC Control Signals 250 V ON for 170 6 312 5 Vac OFF below 106 Vac 220 V ON for 150 2 275 Vac...

Page 46: ...e Rating 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F per IEC EN 60068 2 1 and 60068 2 2 NOTE Not applicable to UL applications NOTE LCD contrast is impaired for temperatures below 20 C and above 70 C DeviceNet Communications Card Rating 60 C 140 F maximum Operating Environment Pollution Degree 2 Overvoltage Category II Atmospheric Pressure 80 110 kPa Relative Humidity 5 95 noncondensing Maximum Altitude 2000 m Dimensi...

Page 47: ...rotection and Control Processing Processing interval is 4 times per power system cycle except for math variables and analog quantities which are processed every 100 ms The protection elements 40 51 and 78 are processed twice per cycle Analog quantities for rms data are determined through use of data averaged over the previous 8 cycles Oscillography Length 15 64 180 cycles Sampling Rate 32 samples ...

Page 48: ...Hz Max Curve 0 5 1 0 or 2 0 Factor 0 1 10 0 s Timing Accuracy 4 plus 25 ms 60 Hz for V Hz above 1 2 multiple of pickup setting and for operating times 4 s Reset Time Range 0 00 400 00 s Composite Time Element Combination of Definite Time and Inverse Time specifications User Definable Curve Element Pickup Range 100 200 Steady State Pickup Accuracy 1 of setpoint Pickup Time 25 ms 60 Hz Max Reset Tim...

Page 49: ...inite Time Delay 0 00 400 00 s Accuracy 0 1 plus 0 25 cycle Third Harmonic Voltage Differential or Third Harmonic Neutral Undervoltage Pickup 64G2 0 1 20 0 V Steady State Pickup Accuracy 5 plus 0 1 V Third Harmonic Voltage Differential Ratio Setting Range 0 0 to 5 0 Pickup Time 3 cycles Max Definite Time Delay 0 00 400 00 s Accuracy 0 1 plus 0 25 cycle Field Ground Protection 64F Requires SEL 2664...

Page 50: ...Slip Accuracy 0 02 Hz Close Acceptance Angle 1 2 0 80 Target Close Angle 15 to 15 Breaker Close Delay 0 001 1 000 s Close Failure Angle 3 120 Steady State Angle Accuracy 2 Generator Thermal Model 49T Thermal Overload Trip Pickup Level 30 250 of full load current full load current INOM range 0 2 2 0 INOM where INOM 1 A or 5 A TCU Alarm Pickup Level 50 99 Thermal Capacity Used Time Constant Range 2 ...

Page 51: ...second Nominal 50 Hz System 50 messages per second Accuracy for Voltages Level 1 compliant as specified in IEEE C37 118 under the following conditions for the specified range Conditions At maximum message rate When phasor has the same frequency as the positive sequence tracking quantity see Table H 10 Frequency based phasor compensation is enabled PHCOMP Y The narrow bandwidth filter is selected P...

Page 52: ...This page intentionally left blank ...

Page 53: ...e following guidelines for proper physical installation of the SEL 700G Physical Location You can mount the SEL 700G in a sheltered indoor environment a building or an enclosed cabinet that does not exceed the temperature and humidity ratings for the relay The relay is IEC EN61010 1 rated at Installation Overvoltage Category II and Pollution Degree 2 This rating allows mounting of the relay indoor...

Page 54: ...to your specific application In total the SEL 700G has six rear panel slots labeled as Slots A B C D E and Z Slots A B and Z are base unit slots each associated with a specific function Optional digital analog I O communications RTD and current voltage cards are available for the SEL 700G Figure 2 2 shows the slot allocations for the cards Because installations differ substantially the SEL 700G of...

Page 55: ...rd per relay SELECT 4 DI 3 DO 2 Form C 1 Form B SELECT 10 RTD SELECT 3 ACI 1A 4 AVI MOT x71x SELECT 3 ACI 1A 2 AVI MOT x72x SELECT 3 ACIE 1A MOT x73x SELECT 2 AVI MOT x74x SELECT 3 ACI 5 A 4 AVI MOT x75x SELECT 3 ACI 5 A 2 AVI MOT x76x SELECT 3 ACIE 5 A MOT x77x SELECT 4 ACI 1A ph 1A neut 3 AVI MOT x81x SELECT 4 ACI 1A ph 5 A neut 3 AVI MOT x82x SELECT 3 ACIZ 1A ph MOT x83x SELECT 1 ACI 1A neut MO...

Page 56: ... Modbus RTU Slave SEL ASCII and Compressed ASCII SEL Settings File Transfer Table 2 1 Power Supply Inputs PSIO 2 DI 3 DO Card Terminal Designations Side Panel Connections Label Terminal Number Description Ground connection A01 A02 Power supply input terminals A03 A04 OUT101 driven by OUT101 SELOGIC control equation A05 A06 OUT102 driven by OUT102 SELOGIC control equation A07 A08 A09 OUT103 driven ...

Page 57: ...one of the following two serial port interfaces Port 4A an isolated EIA 485 serial port interface Port 4C nonisolated EIA 232 serial port interface supporting the 5 Vdc interface Select either EIA 232 or EIA 485 functionality through the use of the Port 4 Setting COMM Interface Table 2 3 shows the port number interface and type of connector for the two protocols Modbus RTU Slave SEL ASCII and Comp...

Page 58: ...ent Voltage Inputs 3 ACI 4 AVI Card Terminal Designations Side Panel Connections Label Terminal Number Description E01 E02 IAY Y side Phase A current input E03 E04 IBY Y side Phase B current input E05 E06 ICY Y side Phase C current input E07 VS synchronism check voltage input E08 NS common connection for synchronism check voltage input E09 VAY Y side Phase A voltage input E10 VBY Y side Phase B vo...

Page 59: ...ut E07 VS synchronism check voltage input E08 NS common connection for synchronism check voltage input E11 VN neutral voltage input E12 NN common connection for neutral voltage input WARNING Before working on a CT circuit first apply a short to the secondary winding of the CT NOTE When the VS NS or VN NN voltage inputs are unused in the SEL 700G1 model and the setting DELTAY_X DELTA then one of th...

Page 60: ...Terminal Designations Side Panel Connections Label Terminal Number Description E07 VS synchronism check voltage input E08 NS common connection for synchronism check voltage input E11 VN neutral voltage input E12 NN common connection for neutral voltage input AVI E08 E09 E 1 1 VS NS N C N C VN E12 NN E07 E10 Table 2 8 Current Voltage Inputs 4 ACI 3 AVI Card Terminal Designations Side Panel Connecti...

Page 61: ...9 Current Inputs 3 ACIZ Card Terminal Designations Side Panel Connections Label Terminal Number Description Z01 Z02 IAX X side Phase A current input Z03 Z04 IBX X side Phase B current input Z05 Z06 ICX X side Phase C current input WARNING Before working on a CT circuit first apply a short to the secondary winding of the CT Z02 IAX Z03 Z04 IBX Z05 Z06 ICX Z01 ACI Table 2 10 Current Input 1 ACI Card...

Page 62: ... Input number x02 13 14 AIx03 Transducer Input number x03 15 16 AIx04 Transducer Input number x04 NOTE Analog inputs cannot provide loop power Each analog output is self powered and has an isolated power supply AO_02 AO_01 AO_03 AO_04 AI_02 AI_01 AI_03 AI_04 08 05 06 02 04 09 03 10 1 1 12 13 14 15 16 07 01 Table 2 12 I O 3 DI 4 DO 1 AO Card Terminal Designations Side Panel Connections Label Termin...

Page 63: ...5 06 04 09 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 10 1 1 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 07 02 03 01 RTD1 COMP SHLD RTD2 COMP SHLD RTD3 COMP SHLD RTD4 COMP SHLD RTD5 COMP SHLD RTD6 COMP SHLD RTD7 COMP SHLD RTD8 COMP SHLD RTD9 COMP SHLD RTD10 COMP SHLD Table 2 14 Four Digital Inputs Four Digital Outputs 4 DI 4 DO Card Terminal Designations Side Panel Connections Label Terminal Number Software Reference Descripti...

Page 64: ...rives INx03 element 07 08 INx04 drives INx04 element 09 10 INx05 drives INx05 element 11 12 INx06 drives INx06 element 13 14 INx07 drives INx07 element 15 16 INx08 drives INx08 element INPUTS 08 05 06 02 04 09 03 10 1 1 12 13 14 15 16 07 01 IN_01 IN_02 IN_03 IN_04 IN_05 IN_06 IN_07 IN_08 Table 2 16 Eight Digital Outputs 8 DO Card Terminal Designations Side Panel Connections Label Terminal Number D...

Page 65: ...ons for the cards Because installations differ substantially the SEL 700G offers a variety of card configurations that provide options for the many diverse applications Choose the combination of option cards most suited for your application Swapping Optional I O Boards When an I O board is moved from one slot to a different slot the associated settings for the slot the card is moved from will be l...

Page 66: ...ttach the rear cover Step 8 Tighten the eight 8 screws that secure the rear cover to the case Step 9 Apply power supply voltage to terminals A01 and A02 and reconnect the ground wire to the green ground screw Step 10 If the card is in the proper slot the front panel displays the following STATUS FAIL X Card Failure If you do not see this message and the ENABLED light is turned on the card was inse...

Page 67: ...ARTNO command from the 2AC level to enter the exact part number of the relay Step 19 Update the side panel drawing with the drawing sticker provided in the card kit If necessary replace the rear panel with the one applicable for the card and attach the terminal marking label provided with the card to the rear panel cover Step 20 Reconnect all connection plugs and add any additional wiring connecto...

Page 68: ...es then type END and save the settings Step 13 Issue the STA C command to reboot the relay Step 14 Issue the STA command to verify that the serial number and part number of your relay are correct Slot A Power Supply Card If replacing a power supply card change the part number accordingly using the PARTNO command from the 2AC level Install new side stickers on the side of the relay Analog Input Car...

Page 69: ...e analog output selection insert a jumper between pins 3 and 4 and pins 7 and 8 Figure 2 5 shows JMP4 selected as a current analog output The current analog output selection is the default setting for JMP1 through JMP4 Figure 2 6 shows JMP1 selected as a voltage analog output Figure 2 5 Current Output Jumpers Figure 2 6 Voltage Output Jumpers JMP1 JMP2 JMP3 JMP4 9 7 5 3 1 10 8 6 4 2 JMP1 JMP4 Pin ...

Page 70: ...communicate with the relay only through the front panel port To gain access to Level 1 and Level 2 command levels without passwords position the jumper in position A as shown in Figure 2 7 password bypassed Although you gain access to Level 2 without a password the alarm contact still closes momentarily when you access Level 2 Table 2 18 tabulates the functions of the three sets of pins and jumper...

Page 71: ...Figure 2 9 and Figure 2 10 Figure 2 8 SEL 700G1 With Dual Fiber Ethernet Fast Hybrid 4 DI 4 DO 10 RTDs 3 ACI 2 AVI 4 ACI 3 AVI MOT 0700G11ACA9X76850830 Figure 2 9 SEL 700GT With Dual Copper Ethernet 4 DI 4 DO 8 DO 3 ACI 4 AVI 4 ACI 3 AVI MOT 0700GT1A2X75850630 E02 E03 E04 E05 E06 E0 1 E08 E09 E 1 0 E 1 1 E 1 2 E07 D30 D16 D15 D 01 i4491a i4488a a Rear Panel View b Side Panel View a Rear Panel View...

Page 72: ... ground terminal labeled GND on the rear panel to a rack frame or switchgear ground for proper safety and performance Use 14 AWG 2 5 mm2 wire less than 2 m 6 6 feet in length for the ground connection Serial Ports Because all ports F 2 3 and 4 are independent you can communicate to any combination simultaneously Although serial Port 4 on the optional communications card consists of an EIA 485 4A a...

Page 73: ...2032 and bring the IRIG B signal with the EIA 232 input Use a fiber optic cable pair with ST connectors C805 or C807 to connect to Port 2 on the SEL 700G Refer to Section 7 Communications for IRIG B connection examples and for details about using an SEL 2401 2407 2404 as a time source Ethernet Port The SEL 700G can be ordered with an optional single dual 10 100BASE T or 100BASE FX Ethernet port Co...

Page 74: ...ly rating 125 250 Vac dc or 24 48 Vdc depends on the relay part number Optoisolated inputs IN101 and IN102 are standard and are located on the card in Slot A All optoisolated inputs are single rated 24 48 110 125 220 or 250 Vac Vdc Standard inputs IN101 102 can have a different rating than the optional IN401 402 403 404 not shown Output contacts OUT101 OUT102 and OUT103 are standard and are locate...

Page 75: ...ing selectable for all output contacts The following occurs in fail safe mode The relay coil is energized continuously if the SEL 700G is powered and operational When the SEL 700G generates a trip signal the relay coil is de energized The relay coil is also de energized if the SEL 700G power supply voltage is removed or if the SEL 700G fails self test status is FAIL Figure 2 15 shows fail safe and...

Page 76: ... to SEL 700G1 Generator Relay Application Example 2 Illustrating the 67N Element and Section 4 Protection and Logic Functions for more details Nonfail safe OUT103FS N 52A Breaker Trip Coil TC A08 A07 A07 TC 52A Fail Safe Electrically Held Open OUT103FS Y Circuit Breaker Breaker Trip Coil A09 b Wye Wye VT 4 Wire Connection Set DELTAY_X Wye d Open Delta VT 3 Wire Connection Set DELTAY_X Delta A B C ...

Page 77: ...Z11 Z12 F1 F3 Broken Delta VA VB VC E12 E11 Broken Delta VA VB VC E08 E07 SEL 700G SEL 700G e Open Delta VT 3 Wire Connection DELTAY_X DELTA External Zero Sequence Voltage Connected to VS EXT3V0_X VS f Open Delta VT 3 Wire Connection DELTAY_X DELTA External Zero Sequence Voltage Connected to VN EXT3V0_X VN Generator Breaker Generator Breaker System Bus System Bus Generator Bus Generator Bus ...

Page 78: ...enerator With Ground Differential Protection 87N NOTE When the VS NS or VN NN voltage inputs are unused in the SEL 700G1 model and the setting DELTAY_X DELTA then one of these voltage inputs could be used to connect an external zero sequence voltage In such an application the setting EXT3V0_X must also be set accordingly Refer to Section 4 Protection and Logic Functions for more details Generator ...

Page 79: ...al Zone With Synchronism Check and 100 Stator Ground Protection Generator Phase Input CTs A B C C B A 52 E12 E11 Z08 Z07 Z06 Z05 Z04 Z03 Z02 Z01 NN IN ICX IBX IAX E08 E07 NS Z12 Z11 Z10 Z09 VCX VAX VBX N Z Slot 4AC1 3 AVI card E Slot 2AV1 card VN VS SYNCP VAB E01 E04 E03 E06 E05 E02 Generator Phase Input CTs 2000 5 A E12 E11 Z08 Z07 Z06 Z05 Z04 Z03 Z02 Z01 NN IN ICX IBX IAX IAY IBY ICY Z12 Z11 VCX...

Page 80: ...h Impedance Grounded Generator With Split Phase Self Balancing Differential Protection Z12 Z11 Z10 Z09 VCX VAX VBX N Z05 Z04 Z03 Z02 Z01 Z06 Generator ICX IBX IAX E05 E06 ICY E04 E03 IBY E02 E01 IAY A B C E12 E11 Z08 Z07 NN IN VN Slot Z 4AC1 3 AVI card Slot E 3AC1 2AV1 card Z12 Z11 Z10 Z09 VCX VAX VBX N Z05 Z04 Z03 Z02 Z01 Z06 Generator ICX IBX IAX E05 E06 ICY E04 E03 IBY E02 E01 IAY A B C E12 E11...

Page 81: ... Stator Ground Protection 64G elements RTD inputs requires SEL 2600 RTD Module or RTD input card in Slot D Synchronism Check 25X and Autosynchronism functions Figure 2 23 SEL 700G1 Relay Typical AC Current and Four Wire Wye Voltage Connection With MOT SEL 0700G11A2XBA76850231 E01 E04 E03 E06 E05 E02 30 MVA Generator Phase Input CTs 2000 5 A E12 E11 Z08 Z07 Z06 Z05 Z04 Z03 Z02 Z01 NN IN ICX IBX IAX...

Page 82: ...s required are not shown Additional I O and relay logic may be necessary for a specific application DC DC A11 A10 BKR X GEN 52ax Raise Gen Speed Frequency FRAISE C05 C06 OUT303 Abnormal Operations Annunciator Element Alarms D03 D04 OUT402 A11 A12 Field BKR 41 52a TRIP A08 A07 OUT103 52ax BKR X GEN Trip Coil Field Breaker Trip Coil TRIP1 OUT302 52a C03 C04 Generator Lockout Relay TRIP3 C01 C02 OUT3...

Page 83: ...00 RTD Module or RTD input card in Slot D Zero Sequence Voltage Polarized Directional Element for High Impedance Grounded System 67N When the voltage inputs VS NS or VN NN are unused in the corresponding models SEL 700G0 SEL 700G1 or SEL 700GT and the setting DELTAY_X DELTA then you can use one of the available voltage inputs to connect an external zero sequence voltage In such an application the ...

Page 84: ...ious elements should be an equivalent of that calculated by the relay at the generator terminals given wye connected PTs i e when a DELTAY_X WYE relay calculated 3V0 VAX VBX VCX Figure 2 25 SEL 700G1 Relay AC Connection Example Multiple High Impedance Grounded Generators Connected to a Common Bus With 67N and Other Protection Generator 3 Phase Input CTs A B C C B A 52 52 Generator 2 E12 E11 Z08 Z0...

Page 85: ...on SEL 700GT Intertie Relay Application Figure 2 26 SEL 700GT Relay Typical AC Current and Four Wire Wye Voltage Connection Generator Phase Input CTs IN ICX IBX IAX VAX VCX VBX NX C B A Neutral Grounding PT VS NS LOAD 52 X 52 Y A B C ICY IBY IAY VAY VCY VBY NY UTILITY Z Slot 4 ACI 3 AVI E Slot 3 ACI 4 AVI ...

Page 86: ...n the base relay Additional I O and relay logic may be necessary for a specific application Settings changes are not shown RTD Inputs requires SEL 2600 RTD Module or RTD input card in Slot D Y Breaker Close Coil DC DC X Breaker Trip Coil 52by 52ay X Breaker Close Coil Relay Alarm Annunciator TRIP X TRIP Y CLOSE X CLOSE Y ALARM A09 A11 A08 A03 A10 A12 A07 A04 BKR Y 52ay BKR X 52ax Y Breaker Trip Co...

Page 87: ...requires an additional I O card in Slot C or D IN101 102 and OUT 101 103 are in the base relay Additional I O and relay logic may be necessary for a specific application Settings changes are not shown Field ground element 64F requires SEL 2664 Field Ground Module RTD Inputs requires SEL 2600 RTD Module or RTD input card in Slot D Y Breaker Close Coil BKR Y 52ay DC DC X Breaker Trip Coil 52by 52ay ...

Page 88: ...ld Ground Module to provide field ground protection for the generator field winding Two different pickup levels of the insulation resistance are available for configuration The field ground protection elements 64F Relay Word bits can be programmed into an output contact for alarm or into the trip equation for tripping The protection covers a range of high resistance as well as low resistance groun...

Page 89: ...attery cannot be recharged Fuse Replacement To replace the power supply fuse perform the following steps Step 1 De energize the relay Step 2 Remove the four rear panel screws and the relay rear panel Step 3 Remove the Slot A printed circuit board Step 4 Locate the fuse on the board Step 5 Remove the fuse from the fuse holder Step 6 Replace the fuse with a BUSS S505 3 15 A ceramic Schurter T 3 15 A...

Page 90: ... battery Step 6 Install the new battery with the positive side facing up Step 7 Insert the printed circuit board into Slot B Step 8 Replace the relay rear panel and energize the relay Step 9 Set the relay date and time CAUTION There is danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with Ray O Vac no BR2335 or equivalent recommended by manufacturer See Owner s Manual for sa...

Page 91: ...40 ACSELERATOR Report Server SEL 5040 Software Automatically retrieves files and summarizes reports SEL 5601 ACSELERATOR Analytic Assistant SEL 5601 Software Converts SEL Compressed ASCII event report files to oscillography SEL 5801 SEL 5801 Cable Selector Software Selects the proper SEL cables for your application Table 3 2 ACSELERATOR QuickSet SEL 5030 Software Sheet 1 of 2 Application Descripti...

Page 92: ...mmunication Dialog Box Step 2 Select the Parameters submenu to display the screen shown in Figure 3 2 Step 3 Configure the PC port to match the relay communications settings Step 4 Configure QuickSet to match the SEL 700G default settings by entering the Access Level 1 and Access Level 2 passwords in the respective text boxes Step 5 For network communications select Network from the Active Connect...

Page 93: ...w shown in Figure 3 4 Figure 3 4 Communications Menu The terminal window is an ASCII interface with the relay This is a basic terminal emulation Many third party terminal emulation programs are available with file transfer encoding schemes Open the terminal window by either clicking Communications Terminal or by pressing Ctrl T Figure 3 2 Serial Port Communication Parameters Dialog Box Figure 3 3 ...

Page 94: ...s the relay at Access Level 1 Issue the ID command to receive an identification report as shown in Figure 3 5 Locate and record the Z number Z001001 in the FID string The first portion of the Z number Z001 determines the QuickSet relay settings driver version when you are creating or editing relay settings files The use of the Device Editor driver version is discussed in more detail later in this ...

Page 95: ...hat describe the relay settings in the Settings Description dialog box These can include the protection scheme settings and communications settings Step 4 Highlight one of the relays listed in Settings in Database and select the Copy option button to create a new collection of settings QuickSet prompts for a new name Be sure to enter a new description in Settings Description Copy Move Settings Bet...

Page 96: ... relay easy and efficient However you do not have to use QuickSet to configure the SEL 700G you can use an ASCII terminal or a computer running terminal emulation software QuickSet provides the advantages of rules based settings checks SELOGIC control equation Expression Builder operator control and metering HMI event analysis and help Settings Editor Settings Editor shows the relay settings in ea...

Page 97: ... relay model and settings driver selection QuickSet presents the Device Part Number dialog box Use this dialog box to configure the Relay Editor to produce settings for a relay with options determined by the part number as shown in Figure 3 7 Press OK when finished Figure 3 7 Update Part Number Figure 3 8 shows the Settings Editor screen View the bottom of the Settings Editor window to check the S...

Page 98: ... and invalid settings created as a result of the conversion Review this report to determine whether changes are necessary Settings Editor Editor Mode Use the Settings Editor Editor Mode to enter settings These features include the QuickSet settings driver version number the first three digits of the Z number in the lower left corner of the Settings Editor Entering Settings NOTE Setting changes mad...

Page 99: ...xpression Builder dialog box is organized into two main parts representing the left side LVALUE and right side RVALUE of the SELOGIC control equation The LVALUE is fixed for all settings Using the Expression Builder Use the right side of the equation RVALUE to select broad categories of device elements analog quantities counters timers latches and logic variables Select a category in the RVALUE tr...

Page 100: ...er Use this menu item to change the part number if it was entered incorrectly during an earlier step Text Files Select Tools Settings Import or Tools Settings Export on the ACSELERATOR QuickSet menu bar to import or export settings from or to a text file Use this feature to create a small file that can be more easily stored or sent electronically Event Analysis ACSELERATOR QuickSet has integrated ...

Page 101: ...a computer For information on the types of event files and data capture see Section 9 Analyzing Events To download event files from the device click Tools Events Get Event Files The Event History dialog box appears as shown in Figure 3 10 In addition to Event Reports the SEL 700G can also store Generator Synchronism Reports These reports can be triggered to capture data during a generator synchron...

Page 102: ...se View Combined Event Files to simultaneously view as many as three separate events Meter and Control Click on Tools HMI HMI to bring up the screen shown in Figure 3 13 The HMI tree view shows all the functions available from the HMI function Unlike the self configuration of the device the HMI tree remains the same regardless of the type of cards installed For example if no analog input card is i...

Page 103: ... panel LEDs Use the front panel settings to change the front panel LED assignment Figure 3 13 Device Overview Screen The Fundamental Min Max Energy etc screens display the corresponding values Click on the Targets button to view the status of all the Relay Word bits When a Relay Word bit has a value of 1 ENABLED 1 the Relay Word bit is asserted Similarly when a Relay Word bit has a value of 0 RB02...

Page 104: ...lect the operation from the box shown in Figure 3 15 Figure 3 15 Remote Operation Selection Synchroscope When the optional synchronism check function is added to the SEL 700G the synchroscope is available in QuickSet This option displays a graphical phasor representation of the difference between the bus voltage and frequency and the generator voltage and frequency Start the autosynchronizer from ...

Page 105: ...ator s governor and exciter controllers Figure 3 16 Synchroscope ACSELERATOR QuickSet Help Various forms of QuickSet help are available as shown in Table 3 4 Press F1 to open a context sensitive help file with the appropriate topic as the default Table 3 4 QuickSet Help Help Description General QuickSet Select Help from the main menu bar SEL 700G Settings Select Settings Help from the Help menu ba...

Page 106: ...This page intentionally left blank ...

Page 107: ...nd voltage input signals Generator Protection Lists the settings for the following elements available in SEL 700G0 SEL 700G1 and SEL 700GT relays for generator protection and abnormal operating conditions See Intertie and Feeder Protection for additional generator protection elements that are also applicable to intertie protection Phase Differential Element and Ground Differential Element Restrict...

Page 108: ...d logic equations of global nature Synchrophasor Measurement Describes Phasor Measurement Unit PMU settings for C37 118 Protocol Breaker Failure Setting Lists the settings and describes the logic for the flexible breaker failure function Analog Inputs Describes analog input functionality lists the settings and gives an example Analog Outputs Describes analog output functionality lists the settings...

Page 109: ...he DeviceNet card see Figure G 1 You can enter the settings by using the front panel SET RELAY function see Section 8 Front Panel Operations the serial port see Section 7 Communications or the Ethernet port see Section 7 Communications Application Data It is faster and easier for you to calculate the settings for the SEL 700G if you collect the following information before you begin Highest expect...

Page 110: ...ny phase rotation you want in each setting group Table 4 2 Configuration Settings Setting Prompt Setting Range Setting Name Factory Default PHASE ROTATION ABC ACB PHROT ABC X CUR INPUT FROM NEUT TERM X_CUR_IN NEUT X PH CT RATIO 1 10000a a Range settings shown are for relay models with 5 A rated current input Multiply by 5 for the 1 A rated input CTRX 500 NOMINAL CURRENT 1 0 10 0 Ab b Range and def...

Page 111: ...0 5 20 Set the INOM setting to nominal machine current by using the following equation The relay negative sequence overcurrent and differential elements use the INOM setting The X side phase CTs must always be connected in WYE The CTCONY setting Y side phase CT connection is used to appropriately configure differential protection This setting is available only in the SEL 700G1 relays Set the DELTA...

Page 112: ...ferential protection Percentage differential protection provides more sensitive and secure protection than traditional differential protection the dual slope characteristic compensates for steady state proportional and transient differential errors within the zone of protection Steady state errors are those that do not vary with loading through the differential zone These include transformer magne...

Page 113: ...ling converts all secondary currents entering the relay from the two windings to per unit values thus changing the ampere values into dimensionless multiples of TAP Throughout the text the term TAP refers to both windings whereas TAPn refers to the ampere value of a particular winding TAPmin and TAPmax refer to the least and greatest of the two TAPn values This method ensure that for full load thr...

Page 114: ...quantities are calculated for the 87 1 element IOP1 is generated by summing the winding currents in a phasor addition IRT1 is generated by summing the magnitudes of the winding currents in a simple scalar addition The 87 2 and 87 3 quantities are calculated in a similar manner I1XC1 I2XC1 I3XC1 I1XC2 I2XC2 I3XC2 I1XC4 I2XC4 I3XC4 IAX IBX ICX Data Acquisition Fundamental Frequency Filter TAPX Scali...

Page 115: ... restraint elements 87HR1 87HR2 and 87HR3 Set HRSTR Y to activate the harmonic restraint element 87HR In element 87Rn for example the IOPn and IRTn quantities determine whether the relay trips The logic enclosed within the dotted lines sensitive differential and high security differential logic of Figure 4 5 implements the respective sensitive differential and high security differential characteri...

Page 116: ...2 IRTn Output If AO87P2 IRTn IRS1 IRTn SLP12 If IRTn IRS1 IRTn SLP22 IRS1 SLP12 SLP22 _ _ _ _ 2 CYC 10 CYC IOPn U87P setting 87Un 87SNn 87HSNn f1 IRTn Σc 5HB1 87OSNn IRTn O87P setting I1H24 Relay Word Bits INRn 0 05 _ _ _ f2 IRTn Σc 5HBn AO87P2 HSM 0 HSM 0 87SCn 87HSCn HSM 87HRn HSM 1 HSM 1 INRn 87OSCn q 87Rn Sensitive Differential Logic High Security Differential Logic Relay Word Bits 87HB _ _ _ ...

Page 117: ...n the status of the HSM Relay Word bit 87HRn is driven by either 87HSNn HSM 0 or 87HSCn HSM 1 indicating operation of the harmonic restrained differential element n and tripping can take place Harmonic Blocking Set HRBLK Y to enable the harmonic blocking feature While the restrained differential elements are making decisions a parallel blocking decision process occurs regarding the magnitudes of s...

Page 118: ...ult PHASE DIFF EN GEN TRANS NONE E87 GEN MAX XFMR CAP OFF 0 2 5000 0 MVA MVA OFF DEFINE CT COMP Y N ICOM N X SIDE CT COMP 0 12 CTCX 0 Y SIDE CT COMP 0 1 5 6 7 11 12 CTCY 0 WDG X L L VOLTS 0 20 1000 00 kV VWDGX 13 80 kV WDG Y L L VOLTS 0 20 1000 00 kV VWDGY 138 00 kV X SIDE CURR TAP 0 50 31 00 Aa a Range shown is for INOM 5 A range for INOM 1 A is 0 1 6 20 A TAPX 2 09 Y SIDE CURR TAP 0 50 31 00 Aa ...

Page 119: ...ormers and around 1 0 for buses but high enough to avoid operation because of unmonitored loads and transformer excitation current O87P must be greater than or equal to the minimum of 0 1 INOMn TAPn where n X Y The SEL 700G1 includes a differential current alarm feature Set the 87AP level above the highest expected differential current under normal operations typically lower than O87P setting and ...

Page 120: ...der harmonics that can appear as differential current to a transformer differential relay The SEL 700G1 measures the amount of fifth harmonic current flowing in the transformer You can set the relay to block the percentage restrained differential element if the ratio of fifth harmonic current to fundamental current IF5 IF1 is greater than the PCT5 setting Unit generator step up transformers at pow...

Page 121: ...sensitivity set O87P2 AUTO O87P2 can only be set to AUTO when E87 GEN AO87P2 is used as a pickup for the high security differential element shown in Figure 4 5 Figure 4 12 shows how AO87P2 is computed KCLI is the phasor sum of the six normalized compensated currents In the case of tightly matched CTs and with even CT saturation or no CT saturation we can expect the output of KCLI to be zero and AO...

Page 122: ...ector Logic Figure 4 11 High Security Mode RESET Logic 0 2 I1XC2 IA12H IB12H IB22H IC22H 5 cyc 1 s HR HRT Multiply by 0 15 I1XC1 0 2 I1YC2 I1YC1 IA22H Multiply by 0 15 IC12H Relay Word Bits Relay Word Bits SM1 RHSM SM2 SM3 IRT1 2 0 2 IRT2 2 0 2 IRT3 2 0 2 3 cyc 0 3 cyc 0 3 cyc 0 Current supervision 1 4 cycle 0 I1YC1 I1XC1 Phase Comparator MIN 0 2 Relay Word Bits ...

Page 123: ...7 587 Convert the SEL 700G1 Relay Settings to the SEL 300G SEL 387 and SEL 587 Relays O87P300G 387 587 O87P700G1 SLP1300G 387 587 2 SLP1700G1 SLP2300G 387 587 2 SLP2700G1 IRS1300G 387 587 1 2 IRS1700G1 U87P300G 387 587 U87P700G1 Setting Calculation General Discussion of Connection Compensation The general expression for current compensation is as follows where IAn etc are the three phase currents ...

Page 124: ...otherwise The 0 setting value is intended to create no changes at all in the currents and merely multiplies them by an identity matrix Thus for CTCn 0 that is The 1 setting performs a 30 degree compensation in the counterclockwise direction as would a delta CT connection of type DAB 30 degree leading The name for this connection comes from the fact that the polarity end of the A phase CT connects ...

Page 125: ...ing current as do all of the matrices having nonzero values of m that is We could use this type of compensation in applications having wye connected transformer windings no phase shift with wye CT connections for each winding Using CTCn 12 for each winding removes zero sequence components just as connection of the CTs in delta would do but without producing a phase shift One might also use CTCn 1 ...

Page 126: ...ss of choosing the correct CTCn setting value for each winding involves a complete knowledge of the transformer winding connections phase relationships and CT connections The following review discusses the nature of the various connections their phase shifts and the reference motion for CTCn selection based on system phase rotation CTC 1 1 3 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 CTC 2 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 CTC 3 1 3 ...

Page 127: ... we call these delta connections DAB and DAC In the DAB connection the polarity end of the A winding connects to the nonpolarity end of the B winding and so on to produce the delta In the DAC connection the polarity end of the A winding connects to the nonpolarity end of the C winding and so on to produce the delta In Figure 4 13 an arrowhead indicates the polarity end of each winding These arrang...

Page 128: ...r each three phase winding of the transformer This step requires transformer nameplate drawings and or internal connection diagrams Step 2 Adjust the terminal A line voltage direction for each set of input currents by the phase shift if any of the current transformer connection Reference Figure 4 13 for this step Step 3 Select any one of the adjusted terminal A directions from Step 2 to serve as t...

Page 129: ...grees CCW from the vertical line as we would expect for a DAB connection with ABC phase rotation Terminal A of Winding Y is in phase with the vertical line Step 2 Adjust the CT connections In this case the primary winding with wye CTs need no adjustment The 24 9 kV winding with DAB CTs needs a 30 degree correction in the CCW direction Figure 4 14 shows this adjustment under Xfmr CT Phase Relations...

Page 130: ...inal line to line transformer terminal voltages If a load tap changer is included in the transformer differential zone assume that it is in the neutral position The setting units are kilovolts Current TAP The relay uses a standard equation to set TAPn based on settings entered for the particular winding n denotes the winding number where The relay calculates TAPn with the following limitations The...

Page 131: ...1 to 4 CT accuracy typically less than 3 in the nominal range No Load Tap Changer NLTC typically 5 Load Tap Changer LTC typically 10 Relay accuracy 5 or 0 02 INOM whichever is largest We recognize that the excitation current of the transformer is not proportional to load flow However a conservative approach would include it as a proportional error CTs create both steady state and transient errors ...

Page 132: ...t usually provides a margin for security However some types of transformers or the presence within the differential zone of equipment that draws a fundamental current of its own may require setting the threshold as low as 7 percent For example the additional fundamental frequency charging current of a long cable run on the transformer secondary terminals could dilute the level of second harmonic s...

Page 133: ...he later tap calculation MVA 30 Step 4 Decide whether to use internal CT compensation and determine compensation settings Because there are both wye and delta transformer windings but only wye CTs we must adjust for the phase angle shift In the traditional differential relay connection the wye transformer windings would have their CTs connected in delta to produce a shift in the same direction as ...

Page 134: ...m sensitivity at low currents and greater tolerance for CT saturation on external high current faults The high security mode settings are left at default with HSM 0 this mode is disabled The minimum error for selecting SLP1 for this application is determined as follows Excitation current 4 CT accuracy 3 No Load Tap Changer NLTC 5 Load Tap Changer LTC 0 Relay accuracy 5 or 0 02 INOM whichever is la...

Page 135: ... are as follows CTRX and CTRY 2000 5 400 INOM 30 1000 1 732 13 8 400 3 1 CTCONY WYE Step 2 Enable the differential settings E87 GEN Step 3 The relay will automatically calculate and set settings TAPX and TAPY based on the INOM You cannot change the TAP settings TAPX INOM 3 10 TAPY INOM CTRX CTRY 3 10 Step 4 Set the differential element characteristic When E87 GEN the SEL 700G uses the dual slope p...

Page 136: ...EL 700G1 you may apply two restraint inputs to the relay You may connect CT secondary windings in parallel only if both circuits meet the following criteria They are connected at the same voltage level Both have CTs that are matched in ratio and C voltage ratings Both circuits are radial no fault current contributions CT Sizing Sizing a CT to avoid saturation for the maximum asymmetrical fault cur...

Page 137: ...lculates the tap settings it reduces CT mismatch to less than 1 percent Allowable tap settings are in the range 0 1 6 2 INOM If the ratio of maximum TAPn INOMn to minimum TAPn INOMn is greater than 7 5 select a different CT ratio to meet the previous conditions You can often do this by selecting a higher CT ratio for the smallest rated winding but you may need to apply auxiliary CTs to achieve the...

Page 138: ...al current It then calculates the residual current which is the sum of the three phase current inputs from CTs located at generator terminals The relay adjusts the residual current by the ratio of the CTR and CTRN settings to scale the residual current in terms of the secondary neutral current It then calculates the difference Normally under balanced load or external ground fault conditions the di...

Page 139: ...n the generator windings or on the generator bushings When the protected generator is connected to a bus that can source ground fault current set 87N2P 87N1 87N2P 87N1P 87N2T 87N2 87N1T IG I87N IGY IN IGX 87NTC Relay Word Bits SELOGIC Setting 87N1D 0 sec 87N2D 0 sec IN IG 1 2 S1 1 Notes SEL 700G0 GT S1 set to Pos 1 SEL 700G1 S1 set as follows Pos 1 if X_CUR_IN TERM Pos 2 if X_CUR_IN NEUT CTRX CTRN...

Page 140: ...tors are connected directly to a load bus It can also be used to protect wye connected transformer windings This element should not be applied to protect high impedance grounded generators or transformers REF protection employs a neutral CT at one end of the winding and the normal set of three CTs at the terminal end of the winding thus REF protection can detect only ground faults within that part...

Page 141: ...is within the protected winding between the terminal end CTs and the neutral CT The relay converts appropriate terminal current to secondary in per unit of nominal CT rating to form polarizing current IPOL CTRX CTRN INNOM INNOM is the nominal CT rating of the neutral CT REF1POL X when X_CUR_IN TERM REF1POL Y when X_CUR_IN NEUT Relay Word Bits Relay Word Bit SELOGIC Setting Group Setting Group Sett...

Page 142: ...the following text Figure 4 19 shows the output of the REF1 protection function Timing is on an extremely inverse time overcurrent curve Curve U4 at the time dial setting 0 5 and with 50REF1P as the pickup setting Figure 4 19 REF Protection Output Extremely Inverse Time O C Relay Word bit REF1F forward fault torque controls the timing curve and IN operates the timing function The curve resets in o...

Page 143: ... greater of the two criteria values See sample calculations in REF Current Pickup Level Polarizing Quantity Figure 4 20 shows the effect of the X_CUR_IN setting on the polarizing quantity INOM Nominal Current of n CTs n X Y N Figure 4 20 Effect of X_CUR_IN Setting on Polarizing Current Calculation of the residual current for X and Y CTs is as follows IGn IAn IBn ICn n X Y X_CUR_IN NEUT IPOL IGY CT...

Page 144: ... the X_CUR_IN setting use the corresponding phase CT ratio CTRX if X_CUR_IN TERM CTRY if X_CUR_IN NEUT Because X_CUR_IN NEUT in this application use CTRY to determine the pickup value The resulting setting per criterion two is 0 17 pu Because 50REF1P must be set at the greater of the two criteria values you would select a setting of 0 28 pu 100 Stator Ground Protection Elements The SEL 700G provid...

Page 145: ...tage differential element to detect faults in this area The 64G2 third harmonic voltage differential element measures the third harmonic voltage magnitudes at the generator terminals and neutral point then evaluates the equation If the difference between the measured third harmonic voltage magnitudes is greater than the 64G2P setting the relay asserts the 64G2 Relay Word bit Figure 4 21 illustrate...

Page 146: ...ts as a neutral third harmonic undervoltage element 27N3 with voltage pickup defined by 64G2P When open delta generator PTs are applied DELTAY_X DELTA and an external zero sequence voltage 3V0 is connected to the VS input EXT3V0_X VS the relay allows you to program 64G2 as a third harmonic voltage differential element or a neutral third harmonic undervoltage element On the other hand when open del...

Page 147: ...t the following information before setting the 100 Stator Ground Protection Generator nominal voltage VNOM_X Generator grounding transformer ratio to 1 use 1 if machine is resistance grounded Generator neutral voltage transformer ratio to 1 use 1 if relay is connected directly to grounding transformer secondary winding Generator neutral voltage during system ground fault Capacitive coupling in the...

Page 148: ...ndary VN3_FL VN3 PTRN _____Third harmonic neutral voltage full load V secondary NOTE A more elaborate procedure using the third harmonic measurements at several load outputs can be found in the SEL Application Guide AG2005 08 Setting 100 Stator Ground Fault Detection Elements in the SEL 300G Relay This guide is written for the SEL 300G but it can be easily adapted for the SEL 700G The steps in thi...

Page 149: ...transmission system Faults and other disturbances can affect the measured harmonic voltages Third Harmonic Neutral Undervoltage Setting Recommendations Use With Open delta Potentials and EXT3V0_X NONE The vast majority of generator protection applications benefit from the improved ground fault sensitivity that the previously described third harmonic voltage differential protection scheme offers In...

Page 150: ...5 V secondary Zero sequence voltage can appear across the grounding transformer secondary during a system ground fault resulting from capacitive coupling between the windings of the unit transformer If the 64G1P setting is less than the zero sequence voltage then the 64G1D setting must be longer than system ground fault clearing time to provide security 100 Stator Ground Fault Tripping If your com...

Page 151: ...W1 in Position 2 If DELTAY_X DELTA and EXT3V0_X VS SW1 Open i e neither in Position 1 nor Position 2 If DELTAY_X DELTA and EXT3V0_X NONE Position 1 VP3X VAX3 VBX3 VCX3 Where VAX3 VBX3 and VCX3 are third harmonic quantities filtered out on corresponding phases Position 2 VP3X VS3 Where VS3 is the third harmonic component filtered out on VS channel a b Positive Sequence Voltage Calculation VN3 VPX3b...

Page 152: ...ecause of sensitivity limits the SEL 2664 calculates a very large insulation resistance value of 20 megohms As soon as the field winding insulation develops a breakdown to the rotor iron assuming that the generator rotor iron is connected to ground through a grounding brush the SEL 2664 detects a sharp drop in insulation resistance The MET command response includes the value of the insulation resi...

Page 153: ...nce element designed for backup distance protection for system phase to phase and three phase faults Each zone is equipped with independently settable forward reach reverse offset maximum torque angle and definite time delay The relay uses compensator distance elements consisting of phase to phase and three phase elements In a typical application you might set the Zone 1 element to reach into the ...

Page 154: ...s the Zone 1 element definite time delay Set 50PP1 to its minimum value unless a special condition requires a higher value Set Z1ANG equal to the angle of the transformer plus system impedance defined by the Zone 1 reach setting The relay places the distance element maximum reach along a line at the angle defined by the Z1ANG setting Set Z2C to define the forward toward the system phase distance r...

Page 155: ...rator Zone 2 is typically set to reach far out onto the system Usually a fault study is necessary to determine the magnitude and angle of the apparent impedance seen by the generator relay during a system fault Set the reach ZnC equal to the apparent positive sequence impedance calculated by fault study for a three phase fault at the targeted reach limit point on the system All distance element re...

Page 156: ...unctions Group Settings SET Command details You must change the setting if a different action is necessary for your application Figure 4 24 Three Phase Distance Element Operating Characteristics Figure 4 25 Phase to Phase Distance Element Operating Characteristics NLAFX PLAFX ZLFX ...

Page 157: ... a voltage restrained phase time overcurrent element and a voltage controlled phase time overcurrent element One of these elements is typically used for system phase fault backup protection to trip the generator in the event of an uncleared phase fault on the system side of the step up transformer 1 INOM is CT rating 1 A or 5 A X CTs ABC1F and PP1F are values calculated by compensator distance ele...

Page 158: ... a like amount down to 12 5 percent of nominal phase to phase voltage For voltages below 12 5 percent the relay uses a pickup that is 12 5 percent of the 51VP setting The element automatically determines fault type and appropriate phase to phase restrain voltage based on the compensation angle setting 51VCA it will not operate if the relay cannot determine the fault type This element operates for ...

Page 159: ...below the pickup setting similar to analog and many microprocessor based time overcurrent relays Select Y or N to match the operating characteristic of other time overcurrent protection protecting the system near this generator Each of the elements is also equipped with a torque control setting When the equation result is logical 1 the element can operate When the result is logical 0 the element c...

Page 160: ...ltaneous loss of potential condition You can choose to use a different undervoltage element pickup setting Voltage Restrained Time Overcurrent Settings When using the 51V element set the 51VP pickup setting greater than the maximum generator phase current expected under full voltage nonfault conditions Divide this current by the phase current transformer ratio CTRX to find the element pickup curre...

Page 161: ...P Setting 51CTC Torque Control Switch SELOGIC Torque Control 51C Pickup 51CR Reset 51CT Curve Timeout 51CTC Torque Control State Switch Position Logical 1 Closed Logical 0 Open Setting 51CRS Reset Timing Y Electromechanical N 1 Cycle Relay Word Bits SELOGIC Setting max phase 51CT Phase Time Overcurrent Element Curve Timing and Reset Timing Settings 51CP Pickup 51CC Curve Type 51CTD Time Dial 51CRS...

Page 162: ... impedance plane origin by a value equal to half of the machine transient reactance as shown in Figure 4 32 Zone 1 is intended to operate with little time delay in the event of a loss of field under full load conditions Zone 2 reaches farther and operates with a longer time delay Zone 2 is intended to trip for loss of field conditions that occur under light load conditions For compatibility with s...

Page 163: ...efined by the offset and diameter settings The 40Z1T Relay Word bit asserts 40Z1D seconds after 40Z1 asserts The Zone 2 element typically is applied as a time delayed tripping function Zone 2 diameter and offset setting guidelines are described below Impedance Calculation 40Z1D 0 40Z2D 0 Relay Word Bits Zone 1 Calculation Zone 2 Calculation SELOGIC Setting Setting Z1Ω 40Z1T 40DIR 40Z2T 40Z2 40Z1 4...

Page 164: ...e voltage in secondary volts Vnom 1000 VNOM_X PTRX Generator rated phase current in secondary amps INOM setting When a positive Zone 2 offset is necessary you also need Step up transformer reactance XT and system reactance Xsys in secondary ohms Generator rated power factor Recommendations Two methods are available for loss of field protection negative offset Zone 2 and positive offset Zone 2 Reco...

Page 165: ...cheme is 0 25 seconds Use the direct axis reactance and XS the sum of the step up transformer reactance XT and system reactance Xsys to set the Zone 2 diameter Use the total reactance of XS to set the Zone 2 offset Traditionally the Zone 2 delay for this type of scheme is approximately 60 seconds it is advisable to conduct system studies to determine the best time delay when using the positive off...

Page 166: ...ent is generally set to 80 percent of the nominal voltage for single machine buses and 87 percent for multimachine buses Use any SELOGIC control equation variable to define a tripping condition for Zone 2 with undervoltage SV15 27V1X1 AND 40Z2 SV15PU 0 25 seconds SV15DO 0 00 seconds The Relay Word bit SV15T should be added to the SV08 SELOGIC control equation along with the Zone 1 and Zone 2 condi...

Page 167: ...e supervised by the 46QTC torque control setting Set E46 Y to enable negative sequence overcurrent elements If negative sequence overcurrent protection is not necessary set E46 N The Level 1 element is typically applied as an unbalance alarm The pickup is defined in percent of machine nominal phase current INOM Use the 46Q1D setting to add any necessary delay Disable the element by setting 46Q1P O...

Page 168: ...ther the following information to calculate the negative sequence overcurrent setting Generator continuous current unbalance withstand capability percent of rated current Generator negative sequence current short time withstand capability seconds Recommendations Set the 46Q1P equal to or less than the generator continuous unbalance current capability 46Q1P 8 0 12 0 Set the 46Q1D time delay greater...

Page 169: ...e Sequence Overcurrent Element Logic Diagram Relay Word Bits SELOGIC Setting Setting Setting SELOGIC Torque Control Negative Sequence Current Calculation I2 Percent Calculation Torque Control Switch Closed When 46QTC Logical 1 46Q1D 0 46Q2 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent Element I2 Percent Calculation Negative Sequence Current Calculation IAX 46Q1P 46QTC INOM PHROT ICX IBX I2 A 46Q2K 46Q2P 46Q1...

Page 170: ...e and changing generator current Figure 4 36 and Table 4 12 show a simplified model and available settings respectively The relay expresses the present generator thermal estimate as a Thermal Capacity Used TCU The thermal element asserts bit 49A when TCU reaches alarm level setting 49TAP and asserts bit 49T when the TCU reaches 100 percent The relay uses the dropout level for bit 49A as 90 percent...

Page 171: ... time constant a system uses from GTC1 to GTC2 when IN303 asserts indicating a cooling system failure When the relay is monitoring one or more RTDs in the generator windings and an ambient temperature RTD you can bias the thermal model by ambient temperature when ETHMBIAS Y The relay uses the ambient temperature above 40 C and the winding RTD trip temperature setting to calculate the overload RTD ...

Page 172: ...M settings define the nominal machine voltage and frequency Figure 4 38 shows the logic diagram of the volts hertz elements If the torque control 24TC SELOGIC control equation is true and the volts hertz value exceeds the 24D1P setting the relay asserts the 24D1 Relay Word bit and starts the 24D1D timer If the condition remains for 24D1D seconds the relay asserts the 24D1T Relay Word bit Typically...

Page 173: ...e three phase voltages and uses the highest of the values for the volts hertz magnitude calculations The relay asserts the 24C2 Relay Word bit without time delay when the machine volts hertz value exceeds the element pickup setting and asserts the 24C2T Relay Word bit after a delay determined by the characteristic setting The relay tracks the frequency over the range 15 to 70 Hz The Relay Word bit...

Page 174: ...tion Characteristic 24CCS ID 01 0 1 1 0 10 100 1000 100 110 120 130 140 24D2P2 118 24D2D2 6 s 24D2P1 110 24D2D1 60 s Time Minutes Transformer Limit Curve on Gen Voltage Base Mfg Generator Limit Curve Volts Hertz Relay Characteristic Time Minutes Generator Manufacturer s Recommended Protection Curve Transformer Limit Curve on Generator Voltage Base 001 01 0 1 1 0 10 100 100 110 120 130 140 Volts He...

Page 175: ...rior to an alarm The 24CCS setting defines the overexcitation tripping element time delay characteristic as shown in Figure 4 38 Set 24CCS OFF if you do not require Level 2 volts hertz protection When 24CCS OFF the other Level 2 settings are hidden and do not need to be entered When 24CCS DD the element operates with a dual level definite time characteristic with pickup and delay of 24D2Pn and 24D...

Page 176: ...ve The 24CR setting defines the composite element reset time When the element times out to trip it fully resets 24CR seconds after the applied volts hertz drops below the element pickup setting The reset characteristic is linear so if the element times 60 percent toward a trip it fully resets 0 6 24CR seconds after the applied volts hertz drops below the element pickup setting When the element is ...

Page 177: ...700G Relay Protection and Logic Functions Group Settings SET Command Figure 4 41 Volts Hertz Inverse Time Characteristic 24IC 0 5 tp 24ITD VPP PTRX freq FNOM VNOM_X 10 3 24IP 100 1 0 5 seconds if V Hz 1 5 24IP tp 1 414 24ITD seconds if V Hz 1 5 24IP ...

Page 178: ...ode 20170814 Protection and Logic Functions Group Settings SET Command Figure 4 42 Volts Hertz Inverse Time Characteristic 24IC 1 tp 24ITD VPP PTRX freq FNOM VNOM_X 10 3 24IP 100 1 1 0 seconds if V Hz 1 5 24IP tp 2 0 24ITD seconds if V Hz 1 5 24IP ...

Page 179: ...L 700G Relay Protection and Logic Functions Group Settings SET Command Figure 4 43 Volts Hertz Inverse Time Characteristic 24IC 2 tp 24ITD VPP PTRX freq FNOM VNOM_X 10 3 24IP 100 1 2 0 seconds if V Hz 1 5 24IP tp 4 0 24ITD seconds if V Hz 1 5 24IP ...

Page 180: ...ch you can use for alarm and or trip as necessary The accumulator values are nonvolatile and are retained through relay power off cycles You can use the relay serial port GENERATOR command to view or reset the accumulator values Set 62ACC delay long enough for the system frequency to stabilize within a band before time accumulation starts Ten cycles or 0 16 seconds is the recommended setting Use t...

Page 181: ...can provide documentation showing turbine operating time limitations during abnormal frequency This documentation should show continuous operation at nominal frequency an area of restricted time of operation and an area of prohibited time of operation Define accumulator frequency bands and assign times to those bands that prevent the generator from operating in the restricted area Figure 4 44 show...

Page 182: ...ion and Logic Functions Group Settings SET Command Figure 4 45 Abnormal Frequency Protection Logic Diagram _ _ 0 _ 0 _ 0 _ 0 _ 0 _ SELOGIC Setting E81AC Y FREQTRKX 81ACCTC Relay Word Bits 62ACC 62ACC 62ACC 62ACC 62ACC 0 TBND1 TBND2 TBND3 TBND4 TBND5 TBND6 62ACC FREQX ...

Page 183: ... blinder and double blinder Users can select whichever scheme suits their application or they can disable out of step protection Set E78 1B or 2B to enable out of step protection elements If out of step protection is not necessary set E78 N Table 4 15 Out of Step Protection Settings Setting Prompt Setting Range Setting Name Factory Default OUT OF STEP PROT N 1B 2B E78 1B FORWARD REACH 0 1 100 0 oh...

Page 184: ...Relay Word bit OOST remains picked up for 78TDURD seconds after the pickup delay time 78TD expires The previous description is only for trajectories traveling from right to left Out of step trajectories traveling from left to right traverse the protection zone in the reverse sequence that is from Area C to B to A The Relay Word bits assert in the same way whether trajectories travel from right to ...

Page 185: ...of the forward and reverse reaches the diameter of the mho circle has to be 100 ohms or less for a 5 A relay and 500 ohms or less for a 1 A relay The blinder settings must be greater than or equal to five percent of either the forward or the reverse reach whichever is greater Setting Relay Word Bits SEL OGIC Setting 0 0 5 CYC 0 5 CYC 0 0 5 CYC 0 0 5 CYC 0 _ _ _ 1 1 1 Setting Setting The logic is p...

Page 186: ...xpected swing currents Note that the positive sequence current levels below the 50ABC setting block the out of step function Both 78R1 and 78R2 must be within the mho circle Settings Calculation Collect the following information to calculate the out of step protection settings Generator transient reactance X d in secondary ohms Generator step up transformer impedance in secondary ohms Impedance of...

Page 187: ...8R1 and inner resistance blinder 78R2 This scheme uses timer 78D as part of its logic to detect out of step conditions The scheme declares an out of step condition if the positive sequence impedance stays between the two blinders for more than 78D seconds and advances farther inside the inner blinder The logic issues an out of step trip once an out of step condition is established and the positive...

Page 188: ...A relay and 500 ohms or less for a 1 A relay Set the inner blinder 78R2 so that its setting is greater than or equal to five percent of either the forward or the reverse reach whichever is greater The 78 element torque control SELOGIC control equation OOSTC has a default setting of one If this value is left at one the out of step element is not controlled by any other conditions external to the el...

Page 189: ... SET Command Figure 4 50 Double Blinder Scheme Logic Diagram Relay Word Bits SEL OGIC Setting Setting Setting Setting _ _ _ 0 5 CYC 0 0 5 CYC 0 0 5 CYC 0 78D 0 Half Cycle Processing Interval 0 0 5 CYC 78TD 78TDURD The logic is processed when V1X 0 25V all timers and elements are reset when V1X or 0 25 V ...

Page 190: ... do this set the inner blinder so that the equivalent machine angle shown in Figure 4 51 is approximately 120 degrees A separation angle of 120 degrees or greater between two sources generally results in loss of synchronism The outer blinder 78R1 and out of step timer 78D should be set to satisfy the following The outer blinder should not assert on maximum load The outer blinder should lie outside...

Page 191: ...ng the rotor The SEL 700G INADT element is intended to provide an inadvertent energization protection Two accepted approaches are voltage supervised overcurrent relays and auxiliary contact supervised overcurrent relays The INADT element supports both The objective of inadvertent energization protection is to detect that the generator has been reenergized suddenly after being removed from service ...

Page 192: ... You must change the setting if your application requires a different action Figure 4 52 Inadvertent Energization Logic Diagram Following are some setting guidelines for the inadvertent energization logic Set 50LXP see Table 4 52 equal to 0 25 A secondary for most applications to provide maximum current sensitivity A higher pickup setting may be necessary in special cases static start of a gas tur...

Page 193: ...se overcurrent are always non directional Normally the phase instantaneous overcurrent elements 50Pm1 through 50Pm3 use the output of the one cycle cosine filtered phase current to operate see Figure 4 53 During severe CT saturation a distorted secondary waveform can substantially reduce the cosine filtered phase magnitude Relying solely on the output of the cosine filtered secondary current can j...

Page 194: ...ing The individual phase elements facilitate identification of the faulted phase If you want individual pickup setting per phase use SELOGIC timers and analog quantities for example IAY_MAG IBY_MAG and ICY_MAG to create the necessary elements See Logic Settings SET L Command on page 4 193 and Table K 1 The relay offers two types of ground fault detecting overcurrent elements The neutral overcurren...

Page 195: ...83 m X or Y Y side elements apply to SEL 700G1 only n 1 2 or 3 for phase overcurrent elements only 50Pm3P IAm IAm IBm ICm IN PHROT IGm Current Magnitude Calculations IPm IN IGm 50Pm3AP 50Pm3BP ICm 50Pm3CP 50Pm3TC 50PmnP 50PmnT Settings Maximum Phase Current Magnitude Core Balance Current Magnitude Residual Current Magnitude 3I0m 50PmnD 0 Negative Sequence Current Calculation Negative Sequence Curr...

Page 196: ...ent Element Logic Intertie Protection q From Figure 4 90 w From Figure 4 83 e From Figure 4 89 50PY3P IAY IAY IBY ICY IN PHROT IGY Current Magnitude Calculations IPY IN IGY 50PY3AP 50PY3BP ICY 50PY3CP 50PY3TC 50PYnP 67PYnT Settings Maximum Phase Current Magnitude Core Balance Current Magnitude Residual Current Magnitude 3I0Y Negative Sequence Current Calculation Negative Sequence Current Magnitude...

Page 197: ... bits are asserted Figure 4 55 Instantaneous Overcurrent Element Logic Feeder Protection SEL 700GW 50Pm3P IAm IAm IBm ICm PHROT IGm Current Magnitude Calculations IPm IGm 50Pm3AP 50Pm3BP ICm 50Pm3CP 50Pm3TC 50PmnP Settings Maximum Phase Current Magnitude Residual Current Magnitude 3I0m 50PmnD 0 Negative Sequence Current Calculation Negative Sequence Current Magnitude 3I2m 50GmnP 50GmnT 50QmnP 50Qm...

Page 198: ...t to 10 A primary The three feeder leads are passed through the window of a 10 1 core balance CT The CT secondary is connected to the SEL 700G IN current input terminals Z07 Z08 as shown in Figure 4 57 Setting the Neutral OC CT Ratio CTRN equal to 10 and Neutral Trip Lvl 50N1P equal to 0 5 A or lower with 0 10 second time delay ensures that the element quickly detects and trips for feeder ground f...

Page 199: ...an use the 51_MR if you want to ensure that the curve times no faster than a minimum response time You can use appropriate SELOGIC control equations for example when 51NTC IN401 the 51N element operates only if IN401 is asserted to torque control each element You can also control the elements by directional elements depending on the relay model number refer to Table 1 2 Directional elements are de...

Page 200: ...re 4 90 e From Figure 4 55 51PYP Setting 51PYTC Torque Control Switch Torque Control 51PYP Pickup 51PYR Reset 51PYT Curve Timeout Torque Control Torque Control State Switch Position Logical 1 Closed Logical 0 Open Setting 51PYRS Reset Timing Y Electromechanical N 1 Cycle Relay Word Bits SELOGIC Setting 51PYT Phase Time Overcurrent Element Curve Timing and Reset Timing Settings 51PYP Pickup 51PYC C...

Page 201: ...0 00 NSEQ TOC TRQCTRL SELOGIC 51QmTC 1 q From Figure 4 54 w From Figure 4 89 e From Figure 4 55 51QYP Setting 51QYTC Torque Control Switch Torque Control 51QYP Pickup 51QYR Reset 51QYT Curve Timeout Torque Control Torque Control State Switch Position Logical 1 Closed Logical 0 Open Setting 51QYRS Reset Timing Y Electromechanical N 1 Cycle Relay Word Bits SELOGIC Setting 51QYT Phase Time Overcurren...

Page 202: ...Figure 4 53 or Figure 4 54 w From Figure 4 84 Table 4 24 Residual Time Overcurrent Settings Setting Prompt Setting Range Setting Name Factory Defaulta a m X or Y RES TOC LEVEL OFF 0 50 16 00 Ab b Setting range shown is for 5 A nominal CT rating Divide by 5 for 1 A CTs 51GmP OFF RES TOC CURVE U1 U5 C1 C5 51GmC U3 RES TOC TDIAL 0 50 15 00c 0 05 1 00d c Setting range shown is for 51_C U_ d Setting ra...

Page 203: ... 51GXC Curve Type 51GXTD Time Dial 51GXRS Electromechanical Reset Y N 51GXCT Const Time Add 51GXMR Min Response Relay Word Bits a Generator Protection SEL 700G0 SEL 700G1 and SEL 700GT b Intertie Protection SEL 700GT GX1DIR 1 2 51GYP IGY Setting 51GYTC Torque Control Switch Torque Control 51GYP Pickup 51GYR Reset 51GYT Curve Timeout Torque Control Torque Control State Switch Position Logical 1 Clo...

Page 204: ...verse Figure 4 69 C4 Long Time Inverse Figure 4 70 C5 Short Time Inverse Figure 4 71 tp TD 0 0226 0 0104 M 0 02 1 tr TD 1 08 1 M 2 tp TD 0 180 5 95 M 2 1 tr TD 5 95 1 M 2 tp TD 0 0963 3 88 M 2 1 tr TD 3 88 1 M 2 tp TD 0 0352 5 67 M 2 1 tr TD 5 67 1 M 2 tp TD 0 00262 0 00342 M 0 02 1 tr TD 0 323 1 M 2 where tp tr TD M operating time in seconds electromechanical induction disk emulation reset time i...

Page 205: ...2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 40 20 30 70 50 60 80 90 100 80 10 2 3 6 4 5 7 9 8 20 50 30 40 60 70 100 90 Time in Seconds Multiples of Pickup Time in Cycles 60 Hz 50Hz 3 2 5 6 5 15 12 5 30 25 60 50 600 500 150 125 300 250 1500 1250 3000 2500 6000 5000 12 00 1 00 0 50 10 00 8 00 6 00 5 00 4 00 3 00 2 00 15 00 01 5 6 7 8 9 1 02 03 04 05 09 07 06 08 1 2 3 4 5 7 6 9 8 1 4 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 40 20 30 70 50 60 80 90 10...

Page 206: ... 3 4 5 7 6 9 8 1 4 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 40 20 30 70 50 60 80 90 100 80 10 2 3 6 4 5 7 9 8 20 50 30 40 60 70 100 90 Time in Seconds Multiples of Pickup Time in Cycles 60 Hz 50Hz 3 2 5 6 5 15 12 5 30 25 60 50 600 500 150 125 300 250 1500 1250 3000 2500 6000 5000 0 30 0 20 0 10 0 05 1 00 0 90 0 80 0 70 0 60 0 50 0 40 01 5 6 7 8 9 1 02 03 04 05 09 07 06 08 1 2 3 4 5 7 6 9 8 1 4 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 40 20 30 7...

Page 207: ...ement with IG as operate quantity 3 Channel IN current polarized directional element 4 Zero sequence voltage polarized directional element with IN as operate quantity See Figure 4 72 and Figure 4 73 for an overview of how these directional elements are enabled and routed to control the residual ground overcurrent elements and neutral ground overcurrent elements respectively Note in Figure 4 72 and...

Page 208: ...the X side DIRIE I listed in setting ORDER FDIRI RDIRI Channel IN Current Polarized Disable Inputs Best Choice Ground Directional Logic Zero Sequence Voltage Polarized Negative Sequence Voltage Polarized DIRVE V listed in setting ORDER Q listed in setting ORDER DIRQGE 50QF 50QR 50GF 50GR FDIRV RDIRV FDIRQG RDIRQG DIRGF DIRGR Level 1 Level 2 to Residual Ground Inst Def Time Overcurrent Elements to ...

Page 209: ... voltage polarized DIRQGE Figure 4 74 Figure 4 77 All models except SEL 700GW V Zero sequence voltage polarized with IG as operate quantity DIRVE Figure 4 75 Figure 4 78 I Channel IN current polarized DIRIE Figure 2 18 Figure 4 76 Figure 4 79 Models with a 1 A or 5 A nominal neutral channel IN Ua a U cannot be listed together with other choices in the ORDER setting ORDER U can only be set on the X...

Page 210: ...g internal enables run element that corresponds to highest choice internal enable that is asserted system grounding in parentheses ORDER Setting Combination Availability 1st Choice 2nd Choice 3rd Choice OFF No ground directional elements enabled All models except SEL 700GW Q DIRQGE QV DIRQGE DIRVE V DIRVE VQ DIRVE DIRQGE I DIRIE IQ DIRIE DIRQGE IQV DIRIE DIRQGE DIRVE IV DIRIE DIRVE IVQ DIRIE DIRVE...

Page 211: ...as the VAX VBX and VCX at terminals and the resulting signal is applied to the directional element 3V0 inputs When EXT3V0_X VN the measured voltage on terminals VN NN is scaled by the ratio of Group settings PTRN PTR to convert it to the same voltage base as the VAX VBX and VCX at terminals and the resulting signal is applied to the directional element 3V0 inputs When testing the relay it is impor...

Page 212: ...tial Refer to Figure 4 120 and the accompanying text for more information on loss of potential Some or all of the voltage based directional elements are disabled during a loss of potential condition Thus the overcurrent elements controlled by these voltage based directional elements are also disabled However this disable condition is overridden for these overcurrent elements set direction forward ...

Page 213: ...Consider this when determining residual ground overcurrent element pickup settings and time delay settings so that load conditions do not cause a forward set ground directional overcurrent element to pickup and start timing The effect of LOP on the neutral ground directional logic is described below refer to Figure 4 82 If DELTAY_ WYE EFWDLOP Y and an LOP condition occurs then the forward logic po...

Page 214: ...the beginning of Directional Control Settings on page 4 121 for a discussion on the operation of level direction settings DIR1 and DIR2 when the directional control enable setting EDIR is set to EDIR N In some applications level direction settings DIR1 and DIR2 are not flexible enough in assigning the necessary direction for certain overcurrent elements Directional Control Provided by Torque Contr...

Page 215: ...re 4 81 t To Figure 4 74 Table 4 27 and Table 4 28 y To Figure 4 79 and Figure 4 81 q From Figure 4 120 w To Figure 4 80 e To Figure 4 80 Figure 4 82 Table 4 27 and Table 4 28 r EXT3V0_ and the AND gate are applicable to the X side only They are not applicable to the Y side Loss of Potential LOP I listed in setting ORDER Setting Enable Setting Enable V listed in setting ORDER DIRIE Internal Enable...

Page 216: ...2F Setting 0 Forward Threshold 0 75 Z2F 0 25 Forward Threshold I2 V2 If Z2R Setting 0 Reverse Threshold 1 25 Z2R 0 25 I2 V2 If Z2R Setting 0 Reverse Threshold 0 75 Z2R 0 25 Reverse Threshold Direction Element Characteristics R2 X2 Forward Threshold Reverse Threshold Z2 PLANE DIRQGE is highest RDIRQG Reverse FDIRQG Forward Best Choice Ground Directional Logic 50QF Enable Forward Threshold DIRQGE Re...

Page 217: ...g 0 Forward Threshold 0 75 Z0F 0 25 Forward Threshold I0 V0 If Z0R Setting 0 Reverse Threshold 1 25 Z0R 0 25 I0 V0 If Z0R Setting 0 Reverse Threshold 0 75 Z0R 0 25 Reverse Threshold Direction Element Characteristics R0 X0 Forward Threshold Reverse Threshold Z0 PLANE DIRVE is highest RDIRV Reverse FDIRV Forward Best Choice Ground Directional Logic 50GF Enable Forward Threshold DIRVE Reverse Thresho...

Page 218: ...annel IN Nominal Rating Phase Channels Nominal Rating 0 05 2 Forward Threshold Reverse Threshold Channel IN Nominal Rating Phase Channels Nominal Rating 0 05 2 Reverse Threshold DIRIE is highest RDIRI Reverse FDIRI Forward Best Choice Ground Directional Logic 50GF Enable Forward Threshold DIRIE Reverse Threshold 50GR Re IG IN 1 INMTA IG IN Relay Word Bits Relay Word Bit Relay Word Bit Relay Word B...

Page 219: ...re 4 76 IN 3V0 Forward Threshold 0 75 Z0F 0 25 Forward Threshold Z0F 0 10 ohm secondary IN 3V0 Reverse Threshold 0 75 Z0R 0 25 Reverse Threshold Z0R 0 10 ohm secondary Direction Element Characteristics R0 X0 Forward Threshold Reverse Threshold Z0 PLANE RDIRN Reverse FDIRN Forward Settings ORDER U 50NF Enable Forward Threshold DIRNE Reverse Threshold 50NR Re 3V0 IN 1 Z0MTA IN 2 Z0 IN 3V0 Relay Word...

Page 220: ... 4 77 t From Figure 4 78 y To Figure 4 79 q From Figure 4 76 w EXT3V0_ and the AND gate are applicable to X side only It is not applicable to Y side e From Figure 4 120 r From Figure 4 80 t From Figure 4 84 FDIRQG RDIRQG DIRGF Forward DIRGR Reverse Relay Word Bits FDIRV RDIRV FDIRI RDIRI 3 4 5 6 EXT3V0_ VS or VN DIRVE DIRIE LOP EFWDLOP Y Relay Word Bits 2 2 1 Logic enclosed in this box applies onl...

Page 221: ...zed and positive sequence voltage polarized directional elements control the phase overcurrent elements Figure 4 85 gives an overview of how the q From Figure 4 81 w To Figure 4 61 e To Figure 4 54 q From Figure 4 82 w To Figure 4 60 e To Figure 4 56 Level Direction Settings Directional Control DIRGF DIR1 F DIR1 N Relay Word Bits to Residual Ground Time 0vercurrent Elements to Residual Ground Inst...

Page 222: ...igure 4 85 The internal enable DIRQE corresponds to the negative sequence voltage polarized directional element Note that Figure 4 74 has extra internal enable DIRQGE which is used in the directional element logic that controls the neutral ground and residual ground overcurrent elements see Figure 4 72 The settings involved with internal enable DIRQE in Figure 4 74 for example settings a2 k2 are e...

Page 223: ...rcurrent elements effectively become nondirectional and provide overcurrent protection during a loss of potential condition As detailed previously in Figure 4 74 and Figure 4 87 voltage based directional elements are disabled during a loss of potential condition Thus the overcurrent elements controlled by these voltage based directional elements are also disabled But this disable condition is over...

Page 224: ... q To Figure 4 88 w From Figure 4 74 I2 V2 If Z2F Setting 0 Forward Threshold 1 25 Z2F 0 25 I2 V2 If Z2F Setting 0 Forward Threshold 0 75 Z2F 0 25 Forward Threshold I2 V2 If Z2R Setting 0 Reverse Threshold 1 25 Z2R 0 25 I2 V2 If Z2R Setting 0 Reverse Threshold 0 75 Z2R 0 25 Reverse Threshold Direction Element Characteristics R2 X2 Forward Threshold Reverse Threshold Z2 PLANE RDIRQ Reverse FDIRQ Fo...

Page 225: ...re 4 88 50PDIRP 3 50PDIR IA IB IB IC IC IA LOP DIRQE ZLOAD VPOLV Setting fixed at phase channel nominal rating 0 1 when load encroachment is enabled FDIRP Forward RDIRP Reverse 90 Z1ANG Z1 90 Z1ANG Z1ANG X1 90 270 0 180 R1 Forward Reverse Loss of Potential Neg Seq Dir Element Has Priority Load Condition Pos Seq Polarizing Voltage Present Relay Word Bits Relay Word Bits 1 2 3 1 NOTE This element us...

Page 226: ... Figure 4 89 t to Figure 4 90 q From Figure 4 88 w From Figure 4 59 e From Figure 4 54 LOP FDIRQ RDIRQ Relay Word Bits DIRPF Forward DIRQF Forward DIRPR Reverse DIRQR Reverse Setting EFWDLOP Y Loss of Potential FDIRP RDIRP 1 2 3 4 5 Directional Control Level Direction Settings DIRQF DIR1 F DIR1 N Relay Word Bit Relay Word Bit to Negative Sequence Time 0vercurrent Element to Negative Sequence Insta...

Page 227: ...ntrolled by the directional control logic q From Figure 4 88 w Figure 4 58 e Figure 4 54 Directional Control Level Direction Settings DIRPF DIR1 F DIR1 N Relay Word Bit Relay Word Bit to Phase Time 0vercurrent Elements to Phase Instantaneous Definite TIme Overcurrent Elements Forward Forward DIRPR Reverse Level 1 DIR1 R Reverse DIR2 F DIR2 N Forward Level 2 DIR2 R Reverse 1 2 3 1 PY1DIR PY2DIR Y E...

Page 228: ...00 ohmb Z0FX 0 06b e REV DIR Z0 LVL 128 00 to 128 00 ohmb Z0RX 0 06b e ZRO SQ MX TQ ANG 90 00 to 90 00 deg Z0MTAX 72 47 FWD DIR IN LVL 0 25 5 00 A d e 50NFP 0 5 d e REV DIR IN LVL 0 25 5 00 A d e 50NRP 0 25 d e POS SQ RESTR FAC 0 001 0 500e a0N 0 001 e Y Side DIR CONTROL ENBL Y AUTO N EDIRY N FWD DIR ON LOP Y N EFWDLOPY Y POS SQ LN Z MAG 0 10 510 00 ohmb Z1MAGY 2 14b POS SQ LN Z ANG 50 00 90 00 de...

Page 229: ...in every application Following are directional control settings that are hidden not made for particular conditions I1 RST FAC I2 I1 0 02 0 50 a2Y 0 10 I0 RST FAC I2 I0 0 10 1 20 k2Y 0 20 FWD DIR RES LVL 0 05 5 00 Ad 50GFPY 0 50d REV DIR RES LVL 0 05 5 00 Ad 50GRPY 0 25d I1 RST FAC I0 I1 0 02 0 50 a0Y 0 10 FWD DIR Z0 LVL 128 00 to 128 00 ohmb Z0FY 0 06b REV DIR Z0 LVL 128 00 to 128 00 ohmb Z0RY 0 0...

Page 230: ...2X DIR1Y and DIR2Ya b Level Direction Settings Phase Residual Ground Negative Sequence Neutral Ground DIR1m 67PY1P Figure 4 54 67PY1T Figure 4 54 51PYP Figure 4 58 51PYT Figure 4 58 67Gm1P Figure 4 53 and Figure 4 54 67Gm1T Figure 4 53 and Figure 4 54 51GmP Figure 4 61 51GmT Figure 4 61 67QY1 Figure 4 54 67QY1T Figure 4 54 51QYP Figure 4 59 51QYT Figure 4 59 67N1P Figure 4 56 67N1T Figure 4 56 51N...

Page 231: ... Y 67Gm1P X X X X Y X and Y X 67Gm1T X X X X Y X and Y X 67Gm2P X X X X Y X and Y X 67Gm2T X X X X Y X and Y X 50N1P X 50N1T X 50N2P X 50N2T X 67N1P Xa Xa Xa Xa Xa 67N1T Xa Xa Xa Xa Xa 67N2P Xa Xa Xa Xa Xa 67N2T Xa Xa Xa Xa Xa 51PNP Yb Yb X and Y 51PNT Yb Yb X and Y 51QmP Yb Yb X and Y 51QmT Yb Yb X and Y 51GmP Xb Xb Xb Xb Yb Xb and Yb X and Y 51GmT Xb Xb Xb Xb Yb Xb and Yb X and Y 51NP Xa Xa Xa X...

Page 232: ...t operating quantity as indicated by its internal enable DIRVE not being asserted see Figure 4 72 then no directional control is available The residual ground overcurrent elements do not operate even though these elements are designated with the DIRn n 1 2 settings to be directionally controlled see Figure 4 83 Another example if setting ORDERX V then the zero sequence voltage polarized directiona...

Page 233: ...ou calculate and enter the settings Z2F and Z2R negative sequence impedance values but setting Z2R must be greater in value than setting Z2F by 0 1 secondary If enable setting EDIR AUTO the relay uses the positive sequence line impedance magnitude setting Z1MAG as follows to calculate the settings Z2F and Z2R negative sequence impedance values automatically Z2F Z1MAG 2 secondary Z2R Z1MAG 2 z seco...

Page 234: ...etting a2 is set automatically at a2 0 1 For setting a2 0 1 the negative sequence current I2 magnitude has to be greater than 1 10 of the positive sequence current I1 magnitude in order for the negative sequence voltage polarized directional elements to be enabled I2 0 1 I1 k2 Zero Sequence Current Restraint Factor I2 I0 Note the internal enable logic outputs in Figure 4 74 The k2 factor is applie...

Page 235: ...ce current magnitude for unbalanced forward faults The 50GRP setting 3I0 current value is the pickup for the reverse fault detector 50GR of the zero sequence voltage polarized and channel IN current polarized directional elements see Figure 4 75 Ideally this setting is above normal load unbalance and below the lowest expected zero sequence current magnitude for unbalanced reverse faults If enable ...

Page 236: ...re 4 80 for use with the zero sequence voltage polarized directional element with IN as operate quantity When ORDER is set to contain V and if the enable setting EDIR Y you calculate and enter settings Z0F and Z0R zero sequence impedance values but setting Z0R must be greater in value than setting Z0F by 0 1 secondary If enable setting EDIR AUTO the relay calculates the settings Z0F and Z0R zero s...

Page 237: ...quence Impedance Network and Relay Polarity Figure 4 92 Zero Sequence Impedance Plot for Solidly Grounded Mostly Inductive System Z0MTA Zero Sequence Maximum Torque Angle If enable setting EDIR AUTO then Z0MTA is set equal to Z0ANG and Z0MTA is hidden Note that ORDERX U cannot be set when EDIRX AUTO and vice versa If enable setting EDIR Y and ORDER contains a V or U setting Z0MTA should be set If ...

Page 238: ... the zero sequence voltage polarized directional element with IN as operate quantity see Figure 4 76 Ideally this setting is above normal load unbalance and below the lowest expected zero sequence current magnitude for unbalanced reverse faults a0N Positive Sequence Current Restraint Factor IN I1 If setting ORDER does not contain U then setting a0N is not made or displayed refer to Figure 4 76 The...

Page 239: ...0N1TC setting evaluates to logical 0 and the high impedance grounded directional element is blocked Directional Control Provided by Torque Control Settings For most applications the level direction settings DIR1 and DIR2 are used to set overcurrent elements direction forward reverse or nondirectional Table 4 33 shows the overcurrent elements that are controlled by each level direction setting Note...

Page 240: ...parent positive sequence impedance is a good load measure The load encroachment logic operates only if the positive sequence current I1 is greater than the Positive Sequence Threshold defined in Figure 4 94 and Figure 4 95 For a balanced load condition I1 phase current magnitude Forward load load flowing out lies within the hatched region labeled ZLOUT Relay Word bit ZLOUT asserts to logical 1 whe...

Page 241: ...ent Logic for X Side q To Figure 4 87 90 270 90 0 180 Example Settings X1 R1 Positive Sequence Threshold Phase Channels Nominal Rating 0 1 ZLOADX ZLOUTX ZLOADX Load Out PLAFX Z1X NLAFX Pos Seq Threshold Z1X Magnitude Z1X Angle V1X I1X V1X I1X Z1X Relay Word Bits ZLFX Settings ZLOUTX Load Out Region PLAFX 26 NLAFX 18 Z L F X 1 1 9 0 Ω s e c 1 1 ...

Page 242: ...annels Nominal Rating 0 1 Load In ZLOUTY ZLOADY Load Out ZLINY PLAFY Z1Y NLAFY NLARY Z1Y PLARY Pos Seq Threshold Z1Y Magnitude Z1Y Angle V1Y I1Y V1Y I1Y Z1Y Relay Word Bits ZLFY ZLRY Settings ZLINY Load In Region ZLOUTY Load Out Region Z L R Y 1 9 0 0 Ω s e c NLARY 217 PLARY 162 PLAFY 26 NLAFY 18 Z L F Y 1 1 9 0 Ω s e c 1 1 Nominal Line Line Voltage 230 kV Maximum Forward Load 800 MVA Maximum Reve...

Page 243: ... 0 90 lag to 0 95 lead Setting PLAF cos 1 0 90 26 Setting NLAF cos 1 0 95 18 The power factor reverse load can vary from 0 80 lag to 0 95 lead Setting PLAR 180 cos 1 0 95 180 18 162 Setting NLAR 180 cos 1 0 80 180 37 217 800 MVA 1 3 267 MVA per phase 230 kV 1 3 132 8 kV line to neutral 267 MVA 1 132 8 kV 1000kV MV 2010 A primary 2010 A primary 1 CT ratio 2010 A primary 1 A secondary 400 A primary ...

Page 244: ...trol applications Typical applications are Overpower and or underpower protection control Reverse and or low forward power for generator antimotoring protection VAR control for capacitor banks Supervision of the third harmonic neutral undervoltage element Detection of power export in DG applications Generator motoring occurs when prime mover input power to the generator is cut off while the genera...

Page 245: ...0 00 240 00 s PWRm3D 0 00 3PH PWR ELEM PU OFF 1 0 6500 0 VA secondary VA b 3PWRm4P OFF PWR ELEM TYPE WATTS WATTS VARS VARS PWRm4T VARS PWR ELEM DELAY 0 00 240 00 s PWRm4D 0 00 a m X or Y b The ranges and default settings shown are for 5 A input Divide by 5 for 1 A input Table 4 38 Power Element Settings Sheet 2 of 2 Setting Prompt Setting Range Setting Name Factory Defaulta PWRXnD 0 3PWRXnP VABX 2...

Page 246: ...cations The classical power calculation is a product of voltage and current to determine the real and reactive power quantities During a system disturbance because of the high sensitivity of the power elements the changing system phase angles and or frequency shifts may cause transient errors in the power calculation For antimotoring protection of the generator calculate the prime mover rated moto...

Page 247: ...shows the signals that the ROC method uses to measure frequency and priority in determining the appropriate signal for frequency tracking in a specific model of the SEL 700G The ZC method uses VAX VAY and VS signals to measure the frequencies The frequency measured by the ZC method is used when the associated signal shown in Table 4 39 is too low or when the frequency measured by the ZC algorithm ...

Page 248: ...EQm TRIP2 LVL OFF 15 00 70 00 Hz 81m2TP OFF FREQm TRIP2 DLY 0 00 240 00 s 81m2TD 1 00 FREQm TRIP3 LVL OFF 15 00 70 00 Hz 81m3TP OFF FREQm TRIP3 DLY 0 00 240 00 s 81m3TD 1 00 FREQm TRIP4 LVL OFF 15 00 70 00 Hz 81m4TP OFF FREQm TRIP4 DLY 0 00 240 00 s 81m4TD 1 00 FREQm TRIP5 LVL OFF 15 00 70 00 Hz 81m5TP OFF FREQm TRIP5 DLY 0 00 240 00 s 81m5TD 1 00 FREQm TRIP6 LVL OFF 15 00 70 00 Hz 81m6TP OFF FREQ...

Page 249: ...equency Element Pickup Time Delay Definite Time Delayed Over and Underfrequency Element Relay Word Bit Relay Tracking Frequency FREQY Over and Underfrequency Element Torque Control n FREQY 81YnTP FNOM 81YnTD 81YnT FREQTRKY 81YTC FREQY 81YnTP 81YnT 81YnTP FNOM FREQTRKY 81YnTD 0 81YnTP FNOM 81YTC FREQYOK ZCFREQY Table 4 41 Rate of Change of Frequency Settings Sheet 1 of 2 Setting Prompt Setting Rang...

Page 250: ...100 81R Frequency Rate of Change Scheme Logic FREQm ROC PU DLY 0 10 60 00 s 81Rm4TD 1 00 FREQm ROC DO DLY 0 00 60 00 s 81Rm4DO 0 00 FREQm ROC VSUPER OFF 12 5 300 0 V 81RmVSUP OFF FREQm ROC TRQCTRL SELOGIC 81RmTC 1 a m X or Y Table 4 41 Rate of Change of Frequency Settings Sheet 2 of 2 Setting Prompt Setting Range Setting Name Factory Defaulta Setting 81RmnTp where m X Y and n 1 4 FREQm 81RmnTRN IN...

Page 251: ... voltage input is present for example VS input shown in Figure 2 23 the SEL 700G provides two levels of VS under and overvoltage elements When an open delta PT is connected to the SEL 700G voltage inputs the relay allows you to connect external zero sequence voltage to VS NS or VN NN inputs EXT3V0_X VS or VN as in Figure 2 16 e and f respectively In either case when EXT3V0_X VS or VN the relay rou...

Page 252: ... shown is for DELTAY_m DELTA 27PPm1P 93 5 PH PH UV LEVEL OFF 2 0 520 0 Vc c Setting range shown is for DELTAY_m WYE 27PPm1P 93 5 PH PH UV DELAY 00 00 120 00 s 27PPm1D 0 50 PH PH UV LEVEL OFF 2 0 300 0 Vb 27PPm2P OFF PH PH UV LEVEL OFF 2 0 520 0 Vc 27PPm2P OFF PH PH UV DELAY 00 00 120 00 s 27PPm2D 0 50 ENABLE P SEQ UV N 1 6 E27V1X 1 POS SEQ UV LEVEL OFF 2 0 170 0 Vb 27V1XnP 5 0 POS SEQ UV LEVEL OFF...

Page 253: ...m1D 0 50 PH PH OV LEVEL OFF 2 0 300 0 Vb 59PPm2P OFF PH PH OV LEVEL OFF 2 0 520 0 Vc 59PPm2P OFF PH PH OV DELAY 00 00 120 00 s 59PPm2D 0 50 ENABLE P SEQ OV N 1 6 E59V1X N POS SEQ OV LEVEL OFF 2 0 170 0 Vb 59V1XnP OFF POS SEQ OV LEVEL OFF 2 0 300 0 Vc 59V1XnP OFF POS SEQ OV DELAY 00 00 120 00 s 59V1XnD 0 00 NSEQ OV LEVEL OFF 2 0 200 0 V 59Qm1P OFF NSEQ OV DELAY 00 00 120 00 s 59Qm1D 0 50 NSEQ OV LE...

Page 254: ...en DELTAY_m DELTA or WYE 27PPm1P VPPminm 27PPm1D 0 27PPm1T 27PPm2P 27PPm2D 0 27PPm2T 27PPm1 27PPm2 3P27m 27V1XnD 0 27V1XnT 27V1XnP 27V1Xn 27PPm1P VPPmaxm V1X Relay Word Bits Relay Word Bits VABm or VAm VBCm or VBm VCAm or VCm Voltage Magnitude Calculation Minimum Phase Voltage Magnitude in secondary VPminm Maximum Phase Voltage Magnitude in secondary VPmaxm Minimum Phase to Phase Voltage Magnitude...

Page 255: ...PPm1D 0 59PPm1T 59PPm2P 59PPm2D 0 59PPm2T 59PPm1 59PPm2 59Qm1 59Qm2 3P59m 59V1XnD 0 59V1XnT 59V1XnP 59V1Xn 59PPm1P VPPminm V1X VABm or VAm VBCm or VBm VCAm or VCm Voltage Magnitude Calculation Maximum Phase Voltage Magnitude in secondary Maximum Phase to Phase Voltage Magnitude secondary Minimum Phase Voltage Magnitude in secondary Minimum Phase to Phase Voltage Magnitude secondary Negative Sequen...

Page 256: ...Gm2P 59Gm2D 0 59Gm2T 59Gm2 59Gm1 Relay Word Bits 59GX1P 3V0X 59GX1D 0 59GX1T 59GX2P 59GX2D 0 59GX2T 59GX2 59GX1 b Logic Below is Applicable to X Side Only When DELTAY_X DELTA and EXT3V0_X VS or VN Relay Word Bits a Logic Below is Applicable When DELTAY_m WYE 1 1 59S1D 0 59S1T 59S2D 0 59S2T 59S1P VS 59S2P 59S1 59S2 27S1D 0 27S1T 27S2D 0 27S2T 27S1P VS 27S2P 27S1 27S2 Table 4 45 RTD Settings Sheet 1...

Page 257: ...r setting to assign an appropriate name to the RTD For example set RTD1NAM XFRMR1 OIL If an RTD location setting is equal to OFF the relay does not request that an RTD type setting be entered for that input RTD Type The four available RTD types are 100 ohm platinum PT100 100 ohm nickel NI100 120 ohm nickel NI120 10 ohm copper CU10 RTD Trip Warning Levels The SEL 700G provides temperature warnings ...

Page 258: ... for the four supported RTD types Table 4 46 RTD Resistance Versus Temperature Sheet 1 of 2 Temp F Temp C 100 Platinum 120 Nickel 100 Nickel 10 Copper 58 50 00 80 31 86 17 74 30 7 10 40 40 00 84 27 92 76 79 10 7 49 22 30 00 88 22 99 41 84 20 7 88 4 20 00 92 16 106 15 89 30 8 26 14 10 00 96 09 113 00 94 60 8 65 32 0 00 100 00 120 00 100 00 9 04 50 10 00 103 90 127 17 105 60 9 42 68 20 00 107 79 134...

Page 259: ...into account the breaker closing time and the present slip frequency to issue a close signal timed to have the system and generator at a settable angle difference when the breaker closes If a generator step up transformer is connected between the generator terminals and the open generator breaker the SEL 700G can account for the phase shift the transformer connections introduce without using auxil...

Page 260: ... the acceptable system VS voltage magnitude window prior to closing the generator breaker 25VHIX must be a higher voltage value than 25VLOX The system and generator voltages must both be greater than 25VLOX and less than 25VHIX for the synchronism check outputs to operate The 25VDIFX setting defines the maximum acceptable percentage magnitude difference between the system and generator voltages pr...

Page 261: ...er set GENV Y If not set GENV N Use the voltage ratio correction factor setting 25RCFX to compensate nominal magnitude of the phase voltage selected by the SYNCPX setting to match the nominal magnitude of the synchronism check voltage VS Many 59VPX Relay Word Bits 59VSX GENVHI GENVLO VDIFX GENV Y 25VDIFX 25VLOX VS Vpxc 25VHIX E25X Y Settings VS Vpxc VS 100 Setting Setting Setting _ _ _ _ _ _ BSYNC...

Page 262: ...y SEL 700G PTRX 115 PTRS 115 VSNOM 13800 115 VPNOMX 13800 115 RCFX VSNOM VPNOMX 1 000 DELTAY_X DELTA SYNCPX VABX 52X A to B PTRS PTRX Generator 13 8 kV SEL 700G PTRX 115 PTRS 1000 VSNOM 115000 1 732 1000 VPNOMX 13800 1 732 115 RCFX VSNOM VPNOMX 0 958 DELTAY_X WYE SYNCPX 30 DEG 52X A to Gnd PTRS PTRX Generator 115 kV 13 8 kV a b c A B C PTRS 115 PTRY 115 VSNOM 13800 115 VPNOMY 13800 115 RCFY VSNOM ...

Page 263: ...adjust the phase angles where 25AX2 is asserted it is an absolute phase angle comparison The CANGLE setting defines a target closing angle positive angle indicates VS lagging SYNCP voltage When the balance of the supervisory conditions are satisfied slip voltage window voltage difference the synchronism check function accounts for the present slip and the set TCLOSDX time if not equal to zero The ...

Page 264: ...ogic Diagram q Figure 4 108 Compensated Angle Difference Ang VPX Ang VS SLIP TCLOSDX 360 1000 Uncompensated Angle Difference Ang VPX Ang VS CFANGLE 1 25ANG2X Enable Angle Calculation S R Q 99 sec 0 0 BKRCF Relay Word Bits Relay Word Bits 25AX2 25AX1 25C CLOSEX 3POX CFA RESET TCLOSDX Note The edge trigger timer associated with TCLOSDX starts on the rising edge of the input and outputs a pulse after...

Page 265: ...to operate when the BSYNCHX SELOGIC control equation result equals logical 0 Typically the BSYNCHX SELOGIC control equation should be set so that the function is blocked when the generator main circuit breaker is closed NOT 3POX You can add other supervisory conditions if necessary for your application Collect the following information to calculate the synchronism check settings Prime Mover Manufa...

Page 266: ... setting This application guide was written for the SEL 351 but it is generally applicable to the SEL 700G Use the 25VLOX 25VHIX 25VDIFX and GENV settings to define the voltage conditions under which the generator breaker can be closed safely The 25VLOX and 25VHIX settings define an acceptable voltage magnitude window A close is permitted only if the generator and system voltages are within this w...

Page 267: ...three methods to supervise internal and external close signals Relay Word bits 25AX1 25AX2 and 25C assert for different generator and system voltage phase angles but all are supervised by the voltage magnitude and difference and slip frequency limits The relay uses two phase angle calculations to control the 25AX1 25AX2 and 25C Relay Word bits The first phase angle calculation is the absolute phas...

Page 268: ...does close it only energizes a dead bus The SEL 700G synchronism check function includes breaker slow close detection logic If the relay initiates a circuit breaker close the breaker close failure logic is armed If the breaker closes the 3POX Relay Word bit deasserts and the logic is disarmed If the breaker does not close and the generator voltage rotates to greater than the close failure angle CF...

Page 269: ...DELTAY_X _________ Step 2 With the generator running and the generator main circuit breaker closed reduce the generator load current to as low as possible This is particularly important when a step up transformer is connected between the generator VTs and the synchronism check VT as in Figure 4 107 b Step 3 Using the front panel or serial port METER command determine the magnitude of VS VS _______...

Page 270: ...here synchronism check can be applied Synchronism check voltage input VS is connected to one side of the circuit breaker on any necessary phase The other synchronizing phase VA VB or VC voltage inputs on the other side of the circuit breaker is setting selected The two synchronism check elements 25A1Y and 25A2Y use the same voltage window to ensure healthy voltage frequency window FNOM 5 Hz and sl...

Page 271: ...VPY VS Settings Block Synchronism Check VP Within Healthy Voltage Window VS Within Healthy Voltage Window Slip Frequency Calculator Enable 2 CYC to Angle Difference Calculator Slip Frequency Maximum Slip Frequency Absolute Value Slip Frequency Element SFY FNOM 5 Hz FREQY FNOM 5 Hz VPY 25RCFY VPH where VPH VAY VBY VCY VABY VBCY or VCAY depending on the SYNCPY setting High Threshold High Threshold H...

Page 272: ...y Word Bits 25AY1 25AY2 25AY1 25AY2 Relay Word Bits Angle Difference Angle Difference absolute value absolute value compensated by setting TCLOSDY Synchronism Check Element 1 Synchronism Check Element 2 Synchronize at Angle Difference 0 Operation of Synchronism Check Elements if voltages VP and VS are static not slipping slip frequency or equal to 0 005 Hz or Setting TCLOSDY OFF Operation of Synch...

Page 273: ...d has to meet the healthy voltage criteria settings 25VHIY and 25VLOY see Figure 4 112 For situations where VS cannot be in phase with VAY VBY or VCY the angle setting choices 0 30 300 or 330 degrees are referenced to VAY Delta Connected Voltages The angle setting choices 0 30 300 or 330 degrees for setting SYNCPY are referenced to VABY and they indicate Table 4 48 Synchronism Check Settings Setti...

Page 274: ...breaker Voltage VS determines the frequency on one side Voltage V1Y positive sequence utility tie voltage determines the frequency on the other side Synchronism Check Elements Operation Refer to Figure 4 112 and Figure 4 113 Voltage Window Refer to Figure 4 112 Single phase voltage inputs VPY and VS are compared to a voltage window to verify that the voltages are healthy and lie within settable vo...

Page 275: ...volving of VS past VPY For example in Figure 4 112 if voltage VPY has a frequency of 59 95 Hz and voltage VS has a frequency of 60 05 Hz the difference between them is the slip frequency Slip Frequency 59 95 Hz 60 05 Hz 0 10 Hz 0 10 slip cycles second The slip frequency in this example is negative indicating that voltage VS is not slipping behind voltage VPY but in fact slipping ahead of voltage V...

Page 276: ...le Difference Between VPY and VS Compensated by Breaker Close Time fPY fS and VPY Shown as Reference in This Example Voltages VPY and VS Are Slipping Refer to the bottom of Figure 4 113 If the slip frequency is greater than 0 005 Hz and breaker close time setting TCLOSDY OFF the angle difference calculator takes the breaker close time into account with breaker close time setting TCLOSDY set in ms ...

Page 277: ...VPY Ideally circuit breaker closing is initiated when VS is in phase with VPY Angle Difference 0 degrees Then when the circuit breaker main contacts finally close VS is in phase with VPY But in this case VS has already moved past VPY To initiate circuit breaker closing when VS is in phase with VPY Angle Difference 0 degrees VS has to slip around another revolution relative to VPY Synchronism Check...

Page 278: ...nchronism check elements 25AY1 or 25AY2 assert to logical 1 In this scenario of the angle difference increasing but where it is still less than maximum angle settings 25ANG1Y or 25ANG2Y the operation of corresponding synchronism check elements 25AY1 and 25AY2 becomes less restrictive Synchronism check breaker closing does not have to wait for voltage VS to slip around again in phase with VPY Angle...

Page 279: ...tosynchronism feature works in conjunction with the X side synchronism check function You must first enable 25X elements see Table 4 47 for detail and then set EAUTO DIG to enable the autosynchronism elements Figure 4 115 shows the Relay Word bits and other information from synchronism check that are also used by the autosynchronism elements q See Synchronism Elements w See Table 4 47 e See Figure...

Page 280: ...ing function Table 4 49 Autosynchronism Settings Setting Prompt Setting Range Setting Name Factory Default Description AUTO SYNC EN NONE DIG EAUTO NONE Autosynchronism enable FREQ SYNC TIMER 5 3600 sec FSYNCT 100 Frequency matching Timer FREQ ADJ RATE 0 01 10 00 Hz s FADJRATE 0 10 Frequency adjustment rate Governor FREQ PULS INTRVL 1 120 s FPULSEI 5 Frequency pulse interval FREQ PULS MIN 0 02 60 s...

Page 281: ... pulse from overshooting the target slip Refer to the governor data sheet for the information to properly set the FADJRATE FPLSMIND FPLSMAXD and FPULSEI settings As the slip frequency gets closer to the target slip the correction pulses get shorter to prevent hunting and stop when the slip frequency is within an acceptable window 25SLO SLIP 25SHI Typically this creates an acceptable slip condition...

Page 282: ...o the exciter voltage regulator to control the generator voltage The relay computes the width of each correction pulse as shown in Figure 4 117 This width is proportional to how far the magnitude is from the target magnitude Set VADJRATE equal to the exciter voltage regulator s rate of response to the control pulses Also set VPLSMIND and VPLSMAXD to define the minimum and maximum limits of the com...

Page 283: ...4 118 for a sample display Refer to Synchroscope in Section 3 PC Software for more information on this screen Figure 4 118 Synchroscope Autosynchronism and Synchronism Check Reports The SEL 700G Relay triggers and saves the generator autosynchronism report on the rising edge of Relay Word bit GSRTRG Refer to Table 4 96 for the GRSTRG SELOGIC control equation setting and the rest of the settings as...

Page 284: ...le to both X and Y sides The Relay Word bit LOPX is determined using the measurements and settings from the X side and Relay Word bit LOPY is determined using the measurements and settings from the Y side The relay declares an LOP and seals it when there is more than a 25 percent drop in the measured positive sequence voltage V1 and the additional conditions shown in Figure 4 120 are satisfied If ...

Page 285: ...cial when the voltage component is no longer valid EXAMPLE 4 5 Supervising Protection Elements by LOP See Figure 4 75 and Figure 4 77 for examples of Relay Word bit LOPY automatically supervising elements The factory default settings also supervise protection elements as in for example the following torque control settings 51CTC 27PPX1 AND NOT LOPX 51VTC NOT LOPX 40ZTC NOT LOPX LOP Monitoring and ...

Page 286: ...formation for the demand meter 1 s S R Q Q 0 0 1 s 1 cycle 0 LOPX LOPY V1 10 5 V Δ V1 25 Δ I1 0 1 INOM Δ I2 0 1 INOM Δ I0 0 1 INOM V2 5 V V0 5 V V1 0 75 Nominal Voltage RESET has priority Notes INOM is 1 A or 5 A depending on the part number INOM is the phase secondary input rating LOPX is determined using measurements and settings from the X side and LOPY is determined using measurements and sett...

Page 287: ...s asserted logical 1 The differences between thermal and rolling demand metering are explained in the following discussion The example in Figure 4 122 shows the response of thermal and rolling demand meters to a step current input The current input is at a magnitude of zero and then suddenly goes to an instantaneous level of 1 0 per unit a step RES CURR DEM LVL OFF 0 50 16 00 Ab OFF 0 10 3 20 Ac G...

Page 288: ...Meters to a Step Input Setting DMTC 15 minutes Thermal Demand Meter Response EDEM THM Thermal Demand Current per unit 0 0 5 10 15 0 5 0 9 1 0 Time Minutes Rolling Demand Meter Response EDEM ROL Rolling Demand Current per unit DMTC 15 minutes 0 0 5 10 15 33 67 1 0 Time Minutes Step Current Input Instantaneous Current per unit 0 0 5 10 15 0 5 1 0 Time Minutes ...

Page 289: ...ponse time is based on the demand meter time constant setting DMTC see Table 4 51 Note in Figure 4 122 that the thermal demand meter response middle is at 90 percent 0 9 per unit of full applied value 1 0 per unit after a time period equal to setting DMTC 15 minutes referenced to when the step current input is first applied The SEL 700G updates thermal demand values approximately every second Roll...

Page 290: ...inutes The three five minute intervals in the sliding time window at Time 5 minutes each integrate into the following five minute totals Rolling demand meter response at Time 5 minutes 1 0 3 0 33 per unit Time 10 Minutes The three five minute intervals in the sliding time window at Time 10 minutes each integrate into the following five minute totals Rolling demand meter response at Time 10 minutes...

Page 291: ...or breaker 52X and 52Y respectively Figure 4 124 Pole Open Logic Diagram Breaker 52X Five Minute Totals Corresponding Five Minute Interval 1 0 per unit 0 to 5 minutes 1 0 per unit 5 to 10 minutes 1 0 per unit 10 to 15 minutes 3 0 per unit Table 4 52 Pole Open Logic Settings Setting Prompt Setting Range Setting Name Factory Default LOAD DETECTION OFF 0 25 96 00 Aa a Ranges and default settings show...

Page 292: ...of logic are discussed below NOTE The factory default assignment of the Relay Word bit TRIP is the output OUT103 See Table 4 61 for the output contacts settings 3POYD 0 Relay Word Bits Setting 52AY 3POY IAY ICY IBY 50LY 50LYP Relay Word Bits Table 4 53 Trip Close Logic Settingsa Sheet 1 of 2 Setting Prompt Setting Range Setting Name Factory Default MIN TRIP TIME 0 0 400 0 sec TDURD 0 5 CLOSE m FAI...

Page 293: ...ic see Figure 4 126 are intended for applications as listed below TRX TRIPX Trip breaker 52X TR1 TRIP1 Trip field breaker 41 TR2 TRIP2 Trip prime mover TR3 TRIP3 Trip generator lockout TRY TRIPY Trip breaker 52Y UNLATCH TRIP 3 SV ULTR3 NOT TR3b c BREAKER m STATUS SV 52Am 0 CLOSE X EQUATION SV CLX SV03T OR CCX OR SV11T AND 25Cb CLOSE X EQUATION SV CLX SV03T AND NOT LT02 OR CCXd CLOSE X EQUATION SV ...

Page 294: ... TRm equations and edit them to suit your application 0 TDURD 0 TDURD 0 TDURD 0 TDURD 0 TDURD TRIP3 Relay Word Bit TRIP TRIPY Relay Word Bit Relay Word Bit TRIP1 Relay Word Bit TRIP2 Relay Word Bit TRIPX Relay Word Bit Trigger Events Set TRIP LED TRX SELOGIC Setting TARGET RESET Pushbutton Target Reset Communications Command TAR R Serial Port Command RSTTRGT SELOGIC Setting TRGTR Relay Word Bit Re...

Page 295: ...64G2T 64G1T 87N2T 87N1T 87U 21C1T LOPX 3PWRX2T LT06 LB01 49T 50N2T 50N1T 51NT 51GXT 51VT 51CT 21C2T 24C2T 0CX OOST 81RX2T 81RX1T 81X2T 81X1T 46Q2T 40Z2T 40Z1T 3PWRX1T LT02 SV04T SV06 TR2 Prime Mover Trip TR1 Field BKR Trip TR3 General Lockout Trip SV08 SV07 RB01 3POX TRX BKR 52X Trip SV06 OR SV07 TRY BKR 52Y Trip 67QY1T 67GY2T 67GY1T 67PY2T 67PY1T LT02 SV04T 67QY2T OCY SV10 SV09 81RY1T 81Y2T 81Y1T...

Page 296: ...e TRm SELOGIC control equations to include an OR combination of all the Relay Word bits for which you want the associated trip bits to assert The factory default setting already includes all commonly used Relay Word bits REMTRIP SELOGIC Control Equation The REMTRIP SELOGIC control equation is intended to define a remote trip condition For example the following settings will trip the breaker by inp...

Page 297: ...ure the relay for either the 52a or the 52b contact input or other contact that indicates a closed breaker The factory default setting assumes no auxiliary contact connection both 52AX and 52AY 0 If you connect the breaker auxiliary contact to a digital input you must change the factory default logic equation For example set 52AX IN101 if you connect the 52a contact of breaker 52X to input IN101 F...

Page 298: ...Figure 4 132 for a typical feeder close logic for the SEL 700GW Review the default CLm equation and edit it to suit your application Figure 4 131 Typical Generator or Intertie Close CL Logic SEL 700G or GT 0 DO 0 DO 0 DO SV03T LT02 CCX CLX R_TRIG INxxx VSYNCACT FSYNCACT 25C SV11 25AY1 CLY SV12 CCY R_TRIG INyyy SV03T LT02 CCX SV03T LT02 R_TRIG INxxx 25C CLX SV11 a CLX Logic for Autosynchronism Clos...

Page 299: ...X and CFDY Set the close failure delay setting CFD equal to the highest breaker close time plus a safety margin If the breaker fails to close the Relay Word CFX or CFY asserts for 1 4 cycle Use the CF bit as necessary Logic Settings SET L Command The settings associated with latches timers counters math variables and output contacts are listed below SELOGIC Enables Table 4 54 shows the enable sett...

Page 300: ...nputs are often from remote control equipment for example SCADA RTU Figure 4 133 Schematic Diagram of a Traditional Latching Device Thirty two latch control switches in the SEL 700G provide latching device functionality Figure 4 134 shows the logic diagram of a latch switch The output of the latch control switch is the Relay Word bit LTn n 01 32 called a latch bit Figure 4 134 Logic Diagram of a L...

Page 301: ...anel control SEL 700GT and GW RST02 SELOGIC RST02 0 Not used in SEL 700G0 and G1 SET03 SELOGIC SET03 PB03 AND R_TRIG SV02T AND LT01 AND NOT 52AX AND NOT LT02 OR 52AY AND LT02 Latch set by front panel CLOSE control SEL 700GT and GW SET03 SELOGIC SET03 PB03 AND R_TRIG SV02T AND LT01 AND NOT 52AX Latch set by front panel CLOSE control SEL 700G0 and G1 RST03 SELOGIC RST03 R_TRIG SV02T OR SV03T AND LT0...

Page 302: ...our application Only the enabled SELOGIC control equations appear for the settings Each SELOGIC control equation variable timer has a SELOGIC control equation setting input and variable timer outputs as shown in Figure 4 135 Timers SV01T through SV32T in Figure 4 135 have a setting range of 0 00 3000 00 seconds This timer setting range applies to both pickup and dropout times SVnPU and SVnDO n 1 t...

Page 303: ... control equation is stored in a math variable The smallest and largest values a math variable can represent are 16777215 99 and 16777215 99 respectively If the executed result exceeds these limits it is clipped at the limit value For example when the MV01 executed result is 16777219 00 MV01 will be 16777215 99 Similarly when the MV02 executed result is 16777238 00 MV02 will be 16777215 99 Comment...

Page 304: ...of 1 that is MV01 1 Boolean NOT Operator NOT Apply the NOT operator to a single Relay Word bit and to multiple elements within parentheses An example of a single Relay Word bit is as follows SV01 NOT RB01 When Remote bit RB01 asserts from logical 0 to logical 1 the Boolean NOT operator in turn changes the logical 1 to a logical 0 In this example SV01 deasserts when RB01 asserts Following is an exa...

Page 305: ... R_TRIG combination produces a logical 0 for one processing interval when it detects a rising edge on the specified element Boolean Falling Edge Operator F_TRIG Apply the falling edge operator F_TRIG to individual Relay Word bits only you cannot apply F_TRIG to groups of elements within parentheses The falling edge operator F_TRIG operates similarly to the rising edge operator but it operates on R...

Page 306: ...45 If the math variable MV01 is not equal to 45 output contact OUT102 asserts effectively OUT102 logical 1 If the math variable MV01 is equal to 45 output contact OUT102 deasserts effectively OUT102 logical 0 Table 4 57 shows other operators and values that you can use in writing SELOGIC control equations Timers Reset When Power Lost or Settings Changed If the device loses power or the settings ch...

Page 307: ...P 0 00 3000 00 SV04PU 0 00 TRIP button delay SV TIMER DROPOUT 0 00 3000 00 SV04DO 0 00 SV INPUT SELOGIC SV04 LT04 Assigned to trip signal SV TIMER PICKUP 0 00 3000 00 SV05PU 0 25 Flashing LED ON time SV TIMER DROPOUT 0 00 3000 00 SV05DO 0 25 Flashing LED OFF time SV INPUT SELOGIC SV05 PB01 OR PB02 OR LT03 OR LT04 AND NOT SV05T Initiate flashing LED SV TIMER PICKUP 0 00 3000 00 SV06PU 0 00 SV TIMER...

Page 308: ...POUT 0 00 3000 00 SV09DO 0 00 SV INPUT SELOGIC SV09 50PY3AT OR 50PY3BT OR 50PY3CT OR 67PY1T OR 67PY2T OR 67GY1T OR 67GY2T OR 67QY1T OR 67QY2T Assigned to Y side instantaneous overcurrent trips for all SEL 700GT and SEL 700GT models SV09 50PY1T OR 50PY2T OR 50PY3AT OR 50PY3BT OR 50PY3CT OR 50GY1T OR 50GY2T OR 50QY1T OR 50QY2T Assigned to Y side instantaneous overcurrent trips for SEL 700GW SV09 0 N...

Page 309: ...QU follows SELOGIC setting SCnnPV Input Value This Preset Value is loaded when SCnLD pulsed This Preset Value is the number of counts before the output SCnQU asserts follows SELOGIC setting SCnnCU Rising Edge Input Count Up increments the counter follows SELOGIC setting SCnnCD Rising Edge Input Count Down decrements the counter follows SELOGIC setting SCnnR Active High Input Reset counter to zero ...

Page 310: ...ready at the maximum value SC01PV 7 in which case SC01CU is ignored and the SC01CD is processed An example of this exception appears in the previous diagram just before the one processing interval notation A maintained logical 1 state on the SC01CU or SC01CD inputs is ignored after the rising edge is processed A rising edge received on the SC01CU or SC01CD inputs is ignored when the SC01R or SC01L...

Page 311: ...OGIC Control Equations See Appendix I MIRRORED BITS Communications and SEL 700G Settings Sheets for details Table 4 61 Control Output Equations and Contact Behavior Settings Setting Prompt Setting Range Setting Name Factory Default OUT101 FAIL SAFE Y N OUT101FS Y OUT101 SELOGIC OUT101 HALARM OR SALARM OUT102 FAIL SAFE Y N OUT102FS N OUT102 SELOGIC OUT102 0 OUT103 FAIL SAFE Y N OUT103FS N OUT103 SE...

Page 312: ...neral Global Settings Setting Prompt Setting Range Setting Name Factory Default Description RATED FREQ 50 60 Hz FNOM 60 DATE FORMAT MDY DMY DMY DATE_F MDY FAULT CONDITION SELOGIC FAULT 51V OR 51C OR 50PX1P OR 46Q2 OR 67N1P OR TRIP For SEL 700G0 model FAULT 51V OR 51C OR 50PX1P OR 46Q2 OR 21C1P OR 21C2P OR 67N1P OR TRIP For SEL 700G0 model FAULT 51V OR 51C OR 50PX1P OR 46Q2 OR 21C1P OR 21C2P OR 50P...

Page 313: ...antity value within the message can be specified by using pf where defines location of the value p defines number of digits as many as 6 defaults to 6 if omitted f indicates floating point value use d for the nearest whole number EXAMPLE 4 8 Setting MPTXxx With a Specified Location of Analog Quantity MPTX01 THE LOAD CURRENT IS 2f AMPERES MPAQ01 value 157 44 Formatted message out when triggered THE...

Page 314: ... Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP on page 7 12 For time update from a DNP Master see Time Synchronization on page D 9 Table 4 65 shows the time and date management settings that are available in the Global settings Table 4 64 Setting Group Selection Setting Prompt Setting Range Setting Name Factory Default GRP CHG DELAY 0 400 sec TGR 3 SELECT GROUP1 SELOGIC SS1 1 SELECT GROUP2 SELOGIC SS2 0 SELEC...

Page 315: ...s local time Automatic Daylight Saving Time Settings The SEL 700G can automatically switch to and from daylight saving time as specified by the eight Global settings DST_BEGM through DST_ENDH The first four settings control the month week day and time that daylight saving time shall commence while the last four settings control the month week day and time that daylight saving time shall cease Once...

Page 316: ... there is a discrepancy between the daylight saving time settings and the received IRIG B signal the relay follows the IRIG B signal When using IEEE C37 118 compliant IRIG B signals e g Global setting IRIGC C37 118 the relay automatically populates the DST Relay Word bit regardless of the daylight saving time settings When using regular IRIG B signals e g Global setting IRIGC NONE the relay only p...

Page 317: ...pping is caused by this input Set 52ABF Y if you want the breaker failure logic to detect a failure of the breaker contactor auxiliary contact to operate during the trip operation as defined by the BFIm setting Figure 4 140 Breaker Failure Logic Table 4 66 Breaker Failure Setting Setting Prompt Setting Range Setting Name Factory Default 52A INTERLOCK Y N 52ABF N BRKRX FAIL DELAY 0 00 2 00 sec BFDX...

Page 318: ...xTYP AIxxxL AIxxxH AIxxxEL and AIxxxEH settings for example 1 mA 3 Short each analog input in turn at the device terminals using short low resistance leads with solid connections 4 Issue the command MET AI 10 to obtain 10 measurements for each channel 5 Record these 10 measurements then calculate the average of the 10 measurements by adding the 10 values algebraically and dividing the sum by 10 Th...

Page 319: ...ine the lower level AI301L and the upper level AI301H of the transducer In this example the low level is 4 mA and the high level is 20 mA AI301 TYPE I V AI301TYP I NOTE Because the SEL 700G accepts current values ranging from 20 48 to 20 48 mA be sure to enter the correct range values The next three settings define the applicable engineering unit AI301EU the lower level in engineering units AI301E...

Page 320: ...ay Analog DCTransducer Input Board Table 4 68 shows the setting prompt setting range and factory default settings for an analog input card in Slot 3 For the name setting AI301NAM for example enter only alphanumeric and underscore characters Characters are not case sensitive but the device converts all lowercase characters to uppercase Although the device accepts alphanumeric characters the name fo...

Page 321: ...3 Setting Prompt Setting Range Setting Name Factory Default AI301 TAG NAME 8 characters 0 9 A Z _ AI301NAM AI301 AI301 TYPE I V AI301TYP I AI301 LOW IN VAL 20 480 to 20 480 mA AI301L 4 000 AI301 HI IN VAL 20 480 to 20 480 mA AI301H 20 000 AI301 LOW IN VAL 10 240 to 10 240 V AI301L 0 000a a Voltage setting range for a voltage transducer when AI301TYP V AI301 HI IN VAL 10 240 to 10 240 V AI301H 10 0...

Page 322: ...t Setting for a Card in Slot 3 Setting Prompt Setting Range Setting Name Factory Default AO301 ANALOG QTY Off 1 analog quantity AO301AQ OFF AO301 TYPE I V AO301TYP I AO301 AQTY LO 2147483647 000 to 2147483647 000 AO301AQL 4 000 AO301 AQTY HI 2147483647 000 to 2147483647 000 AO301AQH 20 000 AO301 LO OUT VAL 20 480 to 20 480 mA AO301L 4 000 AO301 HI OUT VAL 20 480 to 20 480 mA AO301H 20 000 AO301 LO...

Page 323: ...individually For example a setting of IN101D 20 ms delays processing of the input signal by 20 ms pu and maintains the output of the timer do for 20 ms Relay Word bit IN101 is the output of the debounce timer If you do not want to debounce a particular input you can still use Relay Word bit IN101 in logic programming but you must set the debounce time delay to 0 IN101D 0 Figure 4 145 DC Mode Proce...

Page 324: ...you want remote reset The RSTDEM and RSTPKDEM settings reset demand and peak demand See Figure 4 121 for the demand current logic diagram Table 4 70 Slot C Input Debounce Settings Setting Prompt Setting Range Setting Name Factory Default IN301 Debounce AC 0 65000 ms IN301D 10 IN302 Debounce AC 0 65000 ms IN302D 10 IN303 Debounce AC 0 65000 ms IN303D 10 IN304 Debounce AC 0 65000 ms IN304D 10 IN305 ...

Page 325: ...ings that allow you to configure the parameters for the communications ports See Section 2 Installation for a detailed description of port connections On the base unit Port F front panel is an EIA 232 port Port 1 is an optional Ethernet port s Port 2 is an optional fiber optic serial port and Port 3 rear can be an EIA 232 or an EIA 485 port On the optional communications card you can select Port 4...

Page 326: ...N OPERATING MODE FIXED FAILOVER SWITCHED NETMODE FAILOVER FAILOVER TIMEOUT OFF 0 10 65 00 sec FTIME 1 00 PRIMARY NETPORT A B NETPORT A NETWRK PORTA SPD AUTO 10 100 Mbps NETASPD AUTO NETWRK PORTB SPD AUTO 10 100 Mbps NETBSPD AUTO TELNET PORT 23 1025 65534 TPORT 23 TELNET TIME OUT 1 30 min TIDLE 15 FTP USER NAME 20 characters FTPUSER FTPUSER Enable IEC 61850 Protocol Y N E61850 N Enable IEC 61850 GS...

Page 327: ...erial Port Settings Setting Prompt Setting Range Setting Name Factory Default PROTOCOL SEL DNP MOD EVMSG PMU MBA MBB MB8A MB8B MBTA MBTB PROTO SEL SPEED 300 38400 bps SPEED 9600 DATA BITS 7 8 bits BITS 8 PARITY O E N PARITY N STOP BITS 1 2 bits STOP 1 PORT TIME OUT 0 30 min T_OUT 5 SEND AUTOMESSAGE Y N AUTO N FAST OP MESSAGES Y N FASTOP N MODBUS SLAVE ID 1 247 SLAVEID 1 NOTE For additional setting...

Page 328: ...asserts if the channel has too many errors The modem uses the device RTS signal to determine whether the MB or MB8 MIRRORED BITS protocol is in use Set the AUTO Y to allow automatic messages at a serial port The relay EIA 232 serial ports support software XON XOFF flow control If you want to enable support for hardware RTS CTS flow control set the RTSCTS setting equal to Y Set FASTOP Y to enable b...

Page 329: ...umber of enabled display points and enabled local bits available for use Use the front panel LCD timeout setting FP_TO as a security measure If the display is within an Access Level 2 function such as the device setting entry when a timeout occurs the function is automatically terminated without saving changes after inactivity for this length of time After terminating the function the front panel ...

Page 330: ...tation marks only if the text you enter for Alias Set String or Clear String contains commas or spaces For example DP01 Name Text is valid but Name Alias 3 is not valid contains a space Correct the Alias name by using the quotation marks Name Text 3 You can customize the data display format by entering data in selected strings only Table 4 83 shows the various display appearances resulting from en...

Page 331: ...s or sets Relay Word bit IN101 when the circuit breaker is closed Clear String OPEN the form a normally open contact deasserts or clears Relay Word bit IN101 when the circuit breaker is open Name Alias Set String and Clear String When all four strings have entries the relay reports all states Figure 4 148 shows the settings for the example when you use the SET F command Use the character to move t...

Page 332: ...relay displays the information as shown in Figure 4 151 When the HV breaker opens LV breaker is still closed the relay removes the line containing the HV breaker information because the Clear String information was omitted Because the line containing the HV breaker information is removed the relay now displays the LV breaker information on the top line as shown in Figure 4 152 Figure 4 151 Front P...

Page 333: ...153 Front Panel Display HV Breaker Open LV Breaker Closed Name Only Table 4 85 shows an entry in the Name String only leaving the Alias string Set String and Clear String void when you use the SET F command as follows Figure 4 154 shows the front panel display for the entry in Table 4 85 Input IN101 is deasserted in this display IN101 0 but the display changes to IN101 1 when Input IN101 asserts F...

Page 334: ...ry in the Name and User Text and Formatting Strings DP02 when you use the SET F command as follows where Name Analog quantity name AI301 for example All analog quantities occupy two lines on the front panel display all binary quantities occupy one line on the display User text and numerical formatting Display the user text replacing the numerical formatting width dec scale with the value of Name s...

Page 335: ... enter the fixed text as the alias text For example to display the word DEFAULT and SETTINGS on two different lines use a display point for each word DP01 1 DEFAULT and DP02 1 SETTINGS for example Table 4 88 shows other options and front panel displays for the User Text and Formatting settings Following is an example of an application of the analog settings Assume that we also want to know the hot...

Page 336: ...hes The states of the local bits are stored in nonvolatile memory every second When power to the device is restored the local bits will go back to their states after the device initialization Each local bit requires three of the SET F TERSE Enter Front Panel General Settings DISPLY PTS ENABL N 1 32 EDP 4 5 Enter LOCAL BITS ENABL N 1 32 ELB 1 Enter Target LED Set TRIP LATCH T_LED Y N T01LEDL Y Ente...

Page 337: ... start a fan motor Local bit 1 replaces a supervisory switch SUPERV SW and we use the clear set combination Local bit 2 starts a fan motor START that only needs a short pulse to seal itself in and we use the clear pulse combination Figure 4 160 shows the settings to program the two local bits SET F TERSE Enter Front Panel General Settings DISPLY PTS ENABL N 1 32 EDP 5 Enter LOCAL BITS ENABL N 1 32...

Page 338: ...nditions in the Tn_LED SELOGIC control equation settings When these Relay Word bits assert the corresponding LED also asserts Table 4 89 shows the target LED settings The factory default settings shown match the as shipped front panel overlay see Figure 8 1 You can change the settings to suit your application See Section 8 Front Panel Operations for slide in labels for custom LED designations Tabl...

Page 339: ...R 64F2Ta T06_LED 3PWRX1T OR 3PWRX2T OR 3PWRX3T OR 3PWRX4T OR 3PWRY1T OR 3PWRY2T OR 3PWRY3T OR 3PWRY4Tb T06_LED 50QY1T OR 50QY2T OR 51QYTc a Default settings shown apply to SEL 700G0 and G1 b Default settings shown apply to SEL 700GT c Default settings shown apply to SEL 700GW Table 4 89 Target LED Settings Sheet 2 of 2 Setting Prompt Setting Range Setting Name Table 4 90 Pushbutton LED Settings Sh...

Page 340: ...nd the setting SRDLTIM SER Delete Time that mask the chattering SER element Setting SRDLTIM declares a time interval during which the relay qualifies an input by comparing the changes of state of each input against the SRDLCNT setting When an item changes state more than SRDLCNT times in an SRDLTIM interval the relay automatically removes these Relay Word bits from SER recording Once the relay del...

Page 341: ...ent is asserted and deasserted The relay permits as many as 20 unique aliases as defined by the Enable Alias Settings EALIAS setting Factory default alias settings are shown in Table 4 94 Define the Enabled ALIAS settings by entering the Relay Word bit name a space your alias a space the text to display when the condition asserts a space and the text to display when the condition deasserts See Tab...

Page 342: ...n in Table 4 97 The resolution and number of pre trigger data samples are defined by the settings GSRR and PRESYNC and can be set as necessary The relay stores the four latest reports in nonvolatile relay memory Use the CGSR command to retrieve the report data See Figure 4 118 for a sample graphical display of the report using QuickSet You can also trigger the report with the GST command See Secti...

Page 343: ...uency of synchronism check voltage input and PTRS is the setting Digital Data 59VPX 59VSX GENVHI GENVLO VDIFX GENFHI GENFLO SFX 25AX1 25AX2 25C CFA BKRCF FSYNCST VSYNCST 52AX VSYNCTO FSYNCTO ASP AST VRAISE VLOWER FRAISE FLOWER VSYNCACT FSYNCACT SV27T SV28T SV29T SV30T SV31T SV32T Relay Word bits See Appendix J Relay Word Bits for descriptions Use unassigned variables SV27 SV32 to enhance the repor...

Page 344: ...nalog Output Label Name 6 characters AO_00 NA DNP Analog Output Label Name 6 characters AO_31 NA DNP Counter Label Name 11 characters CO_00 NA DNP Counter Label Name 11 characters CO_31 NA a See Appendix D DNP3 Communications for a complete list of the DNP Map Labels and factory default settings Table 4 99 DNP Map Settingsa Sheet 2 of 2 Setting Prompt Setting Range Setting Name Factory Default Tab...

Page 345: ...ands or ACSELERATOR QuickSet SEL 5030 Software Telnet via Ethernet port Modbus via EIA 485 port or EIA 232 port Modbus TCP via Ethernet port DNP3 Serial via EIA 232 port or EIA 485 port DNP3 LAN WAN via Ethernet port DeviceNet port Analog outputs IEC 61850 via Ethernet port C37 118 Synchrophasor Protocol via serial port Load monitoring and trending are possible through use of the Load Profile func...

Page 346: ...ons and as high as two times under unbalanced conditions As a result the relay cannot derive the primary currents quantities accurately The relay performs the following under all system conditions in the case of delta connected CTs The primary currents displayed are derived from the secondary values through multiplying them by the corresponding CT ratio and dividing them by The phase angles are no...

Page 347: ...sequence current I1X and nega tive sequence current 3I2X magnitudes A primary and phase angles degrees Wye connected input voltages with respect to neutral VAX VBX and VCX magnitudes V primary and phase angles degrees Calculated voltages VGX VGX 3V0 VAX VBX VCX positive sequence voltage V1X and negative sequence voltage 3V2X magnitudes V primary and phase angles degrees Delta connected input volta...

Page 348: ...le degrees Third harmonic voltages for stator ground element 64G Wye connected X side PTS only Third harmonic voltages VPX3 VPX3 VAX3 VBX3 VCX3 and VN3 V primary Field ground insulation resistance Rf in kilohmsa requires SEL 2664 Field Ground Module a Field ground insulation resistance Rf will read FAIL when E64F Y and the data are invalid Table 5 1 Measured Fundamental Meter Values Sheet 2 of 2 R...

Page 349: ...RTD Module or Internal RTD Option All RTD Temperatures Models With Thermal Model Element Enabled Generator Thermal Capacity Used RTD based Thermal Capacity Used Table 5 3 RTD Input Status Messages Message Status Open RTD leads open Short RTD leads shorted Comm Fail Fiber optic communications to SEL 2600 RTD Module have failed Stat Fail SEL 2600 RTD Module self test status failure MET T Enter SEL 7...

Page 350: ...3 037 Positive MVARHX MVArh 123454 765 Negative MVARHX MVArh 4523 386 LAST RESET 03 04 2010 13 07 54 Figure 5 4 Device Response to the METER E Command MET RE Enter Reset Metering Quantities Y N Y Enter Reset Complete Figure 5 5 Device Response to the METER RE Command MET WE Enter X Side 3 Phase Energy Data Preload Positive real energy 0 999999 000 MWHPX 123456 789 123456 789 Negative real energy 0...

Page 351: ...s model dependent Input currents IAX IBX and ICX magnitudes A primary Calculated currents IGX IGX 3I0 IAX IBX ICX A primary Wye connected input voltages with respect to neutral VAX VBX and VCX magnitudes V primary Calculated voltages VGX VGX 3V0 VAX VBX VCX V primary Delta connected input voltages VABX VBCX and VCAX magnitudes V primary Three phase P3X real power kW Three phase Q3X reactive power ...

Page 352: ...58 14 ICY A 500 1 02 24 2010 15 01 15 499 6 02 24 2010 11 28 33 IGY A 10 1 02 24 2010 15 03 14 9 0 02 24 2010 14 59 16 IN A 11 1 02 24 2010 15 05 12 9 6 02 24 2010 14 54 15 VAX V 9980 8 02 24 2010 15 07 16 9974 7 02 24 2010 15 11 21 VBX V 9983 4 02 24 2010 11 29 07 9979 7 02 24 2010 14 51 00 VCX V 9987 4 02 24 2010 11 29 45 9983 5 02 24 2010 15 07 59 VS V 9985 8 02 24 2010 15 05 13 9975 7 02 24 20...

Page 353: ...n the fundamental frequency 60 Hz for a 60 Hz system Figure 5 10 shows the METER RMS command MET MV Enter SEL 700G Date 02 24 2010 Time 15 26 40 866 GENERATOR RELAY Time Source Internal MV01 1 00 MV02 32767 00 MV03 1 00 MV04 0 00 MV05 1000 59 MV06 1000 61 MV07 2411 01 MV08 2410 99 Figure 5 9 Device Response to the METER MV Command Table 5 5 RMS Meter Values Relay Option RMS Meter Values X Side RMS...

Page 354: ...cers Figure 5 11 shows an example of analog input metering Demand Metering The SEL 700G offers the choice between two types of demand metering settable with the enable setting EDEM THM Thermal Demand Metering or EDEM ROL Rolling Demand Metering The relay provides demand METER DE command and peak demand METER PE command metering Table 5 6 shows the values reported Figure 5 12 is an example of the M...

Page 355: ...Side Demand Peak Demand Quantities model dependent Demand peak demand values of input currents IAY IBY and ICY magnitudes A primary Demand peak demand value of calculated current IGY IGY 3I0 IAY IBY ICY magnitude A primary Demand peak demand value of calculated negative sequence current 3I2Y magnitude A primary MET DE Enter SEL 700GT Date 02 24 2010 Time 18 13 20 751 INTERTIE RELAY Time Source Int...

Page 356: ...a response similar to Figure H 7 occurring just after 14 14 12 with the time stamp 14 14 12 000 Refer to Appendix H Synchrophasors for further details on synchrophasor measurements settings C37 118 Protocol etc Table 5 7 Synchrophasor Measured Values Relay Option Fundamental Meter Values X Side Quantities model dependent Fundamental current phasors IAX IBX and ICX and positive sequence current I1X...

Page 357: ...nts IOP1 IOP2 IOP3 in pu of TAP value for elements 87 1 87 2 and 87 3 respectively Restraint currents IRT1 IRT2 IRT3 in pu of TAP value for elements 87 1 87 2 and 87 3 respectively IOP1F2 IOP2F2 and IOP3F2 are 2nd harmonic currents as a percentage of IOP1 IOP2 and IOP3 respectively IOP1F4 IOP2F4 IOP3F4 are 4th harmonic currents as a percentage of IOP1 IOP2 and IOP3 respectively IOP1F5 IOP2F5 and I...

Page 358: ...ile data by using the serial port LDP command described in LDP Command Load Profile Report on page 7 33 Figure 5 16 shows an example LDP serial port command response MET H Enter SEL 700G Date 02 24 2010 Time 15 53 02 780 GENERATOR RELAY Time Source Internal IAX IBX ICX IAY IBY ICY Fund A sec 5 05 5 01 5 00 5 01 5 02 5 00 2nd A sec 0 01 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 3rd A sec 0 00 0 01 0 01 0 00 0 00 0 ...

Page 359: ...aintenance information for a 25 kV circuit breaker The breaker maintenance information in Table 5 10 is plotted in Figure 5 17 Connect the plotted points in Figure 5 17 for a breaker maintenance curve To estimate this breaker maintenance curve in the SEL 700G breaker monitor three set points are entered for breaker n where n X or Y Table 5 10 Breaker Maintenance Information for a 25 kV Circuit Bre...

Page 360: ...greater than COSP2n nCL OPN OPS SETPT 2 0 65000 COSP2n 150c d c COSP2n must be set greater than or equal to COSP3n d If COSP2n is set the same as COSP3n then KASP2 must be set the same as KASP3n nCL OPN OPS SETPT 3 0 65000 COSP2n 12 nkA PRI INTERRPTD 1 0 10 999 00 kA KASP1n 1 20e e KASP1n must be set less than KASP2n nkA PRI INTERRPTD 2 0 10 999 00 kA KASP2n 8 00 nkA PRI INTERRPTD 3 0 10 999 00 kA...

Page 361: ...ing settings are made from the breaker maintenance information in Table 5 10 and Figure 5 17 COSP1n 10000 COSP2n 150 COSP3n 12 KASP1n 1 20 KASP2n 8 00 KASP3n 20 00 Figure 5 18 shows the resultant breaker maintenance curve 10 000 1000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 100 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 50 40 30 20 10 5 Number of Close Open Operations kA Interrupted per Operation ...

Page 362: ...intenance information in Table 5 10 and Figure 5 17 but it does not have to be Set point KASP2n COSP2n should be set to provide the best curve fit with the plotted breaker maintenance points in Figure 5 17 Each phase A B and C has its own breaker maintenance curve like that in Figure 5 19 because the separate circuit breaker interrupting contacts for phases A B and C do not necessarily interrupt t...

Page 363: ...t settings the SELOGIC control equation breaker monitor initiation setting is set BKMONn TRIPn TRIPn is the logic output of Figure 4 36 Refer to Figure 5 19 When BKMONn asserts Relay Word bit TRIPn goes from logical 0 to logical 1 the breaker monitor reads in the current values and applies these values to the breaker monitor maintenance curve and the breaker monitor accumulated currents trips As d...

Page 364: ... levels 0 Percent to 10 Percent Breaker Wear Refer to Figure 5 20 7 0 kA is interrupted 20 times 20 close open operations 20 0 pushing the breaker maintenance curve from the 0 percent wear level to the 10 percent wear level Compare the 100 percent and 10 percent curves Note that for a given current value the 10 percent curve has only 1 10 of the close open operations of the 100 percent curve Figur...

Page 365: ...breaker maintenance curve from the 10 percent wear level to the 25 percent wear level Compare the 100 percent and 25 percent curves Note that for a given current value the 25 percent curve has only 1 4 of the close open operations of the 100 percent curve Figure 5 21 Breaker Monitor Accumulates 25 Percent Wear 10 000 100 10 1000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 100 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ...

Page 366: ...reaker maintenance curve from the 25 percent wear level to the 50 percent wear level Compare the 100 percent and 50 percent curves Note that for a given current value the 50 percent curve has only 1 2 of the close open operations of the 100 percent curve Figure 5 22 Breaker Monitor Accumulates 50 Percent Wear 10 000 100 1000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 100 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ...

Page 367: ...for a particular phase the percentage wear remains at 100 percent even if additional current is interrupted until reset by the BRE n R command see View or Reset Breaker Monitor Information on page 5 24 But the current and trip counts continue to accumulate until the BRE n R command resets these counts Additionally logic outputs assert for alarm or other control applications see the following discu...

Page 368: ...each phase Date when the preceding items were last reset via the BRE n R command See Section 7 Communications The BRE n W command allows the trip counters accumulated values and percent breaker wear to be preloaded for each individual phase The BRE n R command resets the accumulated values and the percent wear for all three phases For example if breaker contact wear has reached the 100 percent wea...

Page 369: ...4 36 on page 4 65 If TRIPn is asserted TRIPn logical 1 the current and trip count information is accumulated under relay initiated trips Rly Trips If TRIPn is deasserted TRIPn logical 0 the current and trip count information is accumulated under externally initiated trips Ext Trips Regardless of whether the current and trip count information is accumulated under relay initiated trips or externally...

Page 370: ...hen BKMONn is newly asserted input INxxx energized the TRIPn Relay Word bit is asserted Thus the current and trip count information is accumulated under relay initiated trips Rly Trips If the control switch trip or some other external trip asserts energizing the trip bus the breaker monitor deems it an externally initiated trip This is because when BKMONn is newly asserted input INxxx energized th...

Page 371: ... settings entry The SEL 700G Settings Sheets at the end of this section list all SEL 700G settings the setting definitions and input ranges Refer to Section 4 Protection and Logic Functions for detailed information on individual elements and settings Table 6 1 Methods of Accessing Settings Serial Port Commandsa a Refer to Section 7 Communications for detailed information on set up and use of the s...

Page 372: ...y settings as listed in the SEL 700G Settings Sheets Use the Up Arrow Down Arrow Left Arrow and Right Arrow pushbuttons to scroll through the relay settings View and change the settings according to your needs by selecting and editing them After viewing or changing the relay settings press the ESC pushbutton until the following message appears Select and enter the appropriate command by pushing th...

Page 373: ...list Press to return to the previous list Press to select an underlined menu item INOM Setting Config Menu GROUP 1 2 3 Set Show Menu Global Group Port Active Group Date Time Password 1 Menu Meter Events Targets Control Set Show Status Breaker Quit ID Settings Config Settings Gnd Differential X Side Pole Open Y Side Pole Open Trip Close Logic PHROT ABC CTRX 500 INOM 5 0 A CTRN 100 NOMINAL CURRENT I...

Page 374: ...xample SET 50PX1P displays the relay settings starting with setting 50PX1P The default is the first setting Table 6 2 SHOW Command Options Command Description SHOW n Show relay group settings n specifies the settings group 1 2 or 3 n defaults to active settings group if not listed SHO L n Show logic settings n specifies the settings group 1 2 or 3 n defaults to active settings group if not listed ...

Page 375: ...fic setting enter the command shown in Table 6 5 Table 6 4 SET Command Editing Keystrokes Press Key s Results Enter Retains the setting and moves to the next setting Enter Returns to the previous setting Enter Returns to the previous setting category Enter Moves to the next setting category END Enter Exits the editing session then prompts you to save the settings Ctrl X Aborts the editing session ...

Page 376: ...the relay issues a self explanatory error message and returns you to the settings list for a correction Table 6 6 shows the settings interdependency error messages that require some additional explanation and guidance Table 6 6 Setting Interdependency Error Messages Error Messages Setting Function Correct the Condition CTRm TAPm setting combination out of range m X or Y Group settings differen tia...

Page 377: ...ve Group Settings SET Command Identifier Configuration UNIT ID LINE 1 16 Characters RID UNIT ID LINE 2 16 Characters TID PHASE ROTATION ABC ACB PHROT X side X CUR INPUT FROM NEUT TERM Shown if Slot E 72 76 or Slot E 73 77 and Slot Z 81 85 82 86 else hidden and auto set to TERM X_CUR_IN X PH CT RATIO 1 10000 5 A IXNOM 1 50000 1 A IXNOM Hidden if Slot Z 84 88 CTRX NOMINAL CURRENT 1 0 10 0 A 5 A IXNO...

Page 378: ... MVA setting is not OFF TAPX Y SIDE CURR TAP 0 5 31 0 A 5 A IYNOM 0 1 6 2 A 1 A IYNOM Auto set if MVA setting is not OFF TAPY OPERATE CURR LVL 0 10 1 00 TAP O87P UNRES CURR LVL 1 0 20 0 TAP U87P DIFF CURR AL LVL OFF 0 05 1 00 TAP 87AP DIFF CURR AL DLY 1 00 120 00 s Hidden if O87P OFF 87AD RESTRAINT SLOPE1 5 70 SLP1 RESTRAINT SLOPE2 5 90 Hidden and auto set to 70 if E87 GEN SLP2 RES SLOPE1 LIMIT 1 ...

Page 379: ... pu Hidden if EREF N 50REF1P REF1 TRQCTRL SELOGIC Hidden if EREF N REF1TC 52AX BYPASS ENABL Y N Hidden if EREF N REF52BYP Stator Ground 64G Shown if Slot E 72 74 76 64G PROT EN Y N E64G All Stator Ground settings are hidden if E64G N If EXT3V0_X VN then E64G is hidden and forced to N NEUTRAL O V LVL OFF 0 1 150 0 V 64G1P ZONE 1 TIMER 0 00 400 00 S Hidden if 64G1P OFF 64G1D 64G1 TRQCTRL SELOGIC 64G...

Page 380: ...if Z2C OFF Z2CO Z2 COMP TIME DLY 0 00 400 00 s Hidden if Z2C OFF Z2CD Z2 CURRENT FD 0 50 170 00 A 5 A IXNOM 0 10 34 00 A 1 A IXNOM Hidden if Z2C OFF 50PP2 Z2 POS SEQ ANGLE 45 90 Hidden if Z2C OFF Z2ANG 21C ELE TRQCTRL SELOGIC 21CTC Volt Control TOC Hidden if EBUP N V DC or DC_V V CTRL TOC LVL OFF 0 50 16 00 A 5 A IXNOM 0 10 3 20 A 1 A IXNOM 51CP V CTRL TOC CURVE U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 Hidde...

Page 381: ...Unbalance Shown if Slot Z 81 82 85 86 NEG SEQ OC ENBL Y N E46 All Current Unbalance settings are hidden if E46 N LVL1 NEQ SEQ O C OFF 2 0 100 0 46Q1P LVL1 TIME DELAY 0 02 999 90 s Hidden if 46Q1P OFF 46Q1D LVL2 NEQ SEQ O C OFF 2 0 100 0 46Q2P LVL2 TIME DIAL 1 100 s Hidden if 46Q2P OFF 46Q2K 46Q TRQCTRL SELOGIC 46QTC Thermal Overload Hidden if Slot Z 83 84 87 88 THERM OVERLD EN Y N E49T All Thermal...

Page 382: ... 5 500 0 ohm 1 A IXNOM 78FWD REVERSE REACH 0 1 100 0 ohm 5 A IXNOM 0 5 500 0 ohm 1 A IXNOM 78REV RIGHT BLINDER 0 1 50 0 ohm 5 A IXNOM 0 5 250 0 ohm 1 A IXNOM Hidden if E78 2B 78R1 LEFT BLINDER 0 1 50 0 ohm 5 A IXNOM 0 5 250 0 ohm 1 A IXNOM Hidden if E78 2B 78R2 OUTER BLINDER 0 2 100 0 ohm 5 A IXNOM 1 0 500 0 ohm 1 A IXNOM Hidden if E78 1B 78R1 INNER BLINDER 0 1 50 0 ohm 5 A IXNOM 0 5 250 0 ohm 1 A...

Page 383: ...0 00 s Hidden if 50GX1P OFF 50GX1D RES IOC TRQCTRL SELOGIC Hidden if 50GX1P OFF 50GX1TC RES IOC LEVEL OFF 0 50 96 00 A 5 A IXNOM 0 10 19 20 A 1 A IXNOM 50GX2P RES IOC DELAY 0 00 400 00 s Hidden if 50GX2P OFF 50GX2D RES IOC TRQCTRL SELOGIC Hidden if 50GX2P OFF 50GX2TC X Side Negative Sequence Overcurrent Hidden if Slot Z 84 88 NSEQ IOC LEVEL OFF 0 50 96 00 A 5 A IXNOM 0 10 19 20 A 1 A IXNOM 50QX1P ...

Page 384: ...IOC LEVEL OFF 0 50 96 00 A 5 A IYNOM 0 10 19 20 A 1 A IYNOM 50QY1P NSEQ IOC DELAY 0 10 400 00 s Hidden if 50QY1P OFF 50QY1D NSEQ IOC TRQCTRL SELOGIC Hidden if 50QY1P OFF 50QY1TC NSEQ IOC LEVEL OFF 0 50 96 00 A 5 A IYNOM 0 10 19 20 A 1 A IYNOM 50QY2P NSEQ IOC DELAY 0 10 400 00 s Hidden if 50QY2P OFF 50QY2D NSEQ IOC TRQCTRL SELOGIC Hidden if 50QY2P OFF 50QY2TC Neutral Overcurrent Hidden if Slot Z 83...

Page 385: ... 51GXTC X Side Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent Shown if Slot Z 83 87 700GW NSEQ TOC LEVEL OFF 0 50 16 00 A 5 A IXNOM 0 10 3 20 A 1 A IXNOM 51QXP NSEQ TOC CURVE U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 Hidden if 51QXP OFF 51QXC NSEQ TOC TDIAL 0 50 15 00 if 51Q_C U_ 0 05 1 00 if 51Q_C C_ Hidden if 51QXP OFF 51QXTD EM RESET DELAY Y N Hidden if 51QXP OFF 51QXRS CONST TIME ADDER 0 00 1 00 s Hidden if 51QXP OFF...

Page 386: ...1QYC NSEQ TOC TDIAL 0 50 to 15 00 if 51Q_C U_ 0 05 to 1 00 if 51Q_C C_ Hidden if 51QYP OFF 51QYTD EM RESET DELAY Y N Hidden if 51QYP OFF 51QYRS CONST TIME ADDER 0 00 to 1 00 s Hidden if 51QYP OFF 51QYCT MIN RESPONSE TIM 0 00 to 1 00 s Hidden if 51QYP OFF 51QYMR NSEQ TOC TRQCTRL SELOGIC Hidden if 51QYP OFF 51QYTC Neutral Time Overcurrent Hidden if Slot Z 83 87 700GW NEUT TOC LEVEL OFF 0 50 16 00 A ...

Page 387: ...DIRX AUTO or ORDERX does not contain V or I when EDIRX Y 50GRPX I1 RST FAC I0 I1 0 02 0 50 Hidden if EDIRX AUTO or ORDERX does not contain V or I when EDIRX Y a0X FWD DIR Z0 LVL 128 00 to 128 00 ohm 5 A IXNOM 640 00 to 640 00 ohm 1 A IXNOM Hidden if EDIRX AUTO or ORDERX does not contain V when EDIRX Y Z0FX REV DIR Z0 LVL 128 00 to 128 00 ohm 5 A IXNOM 640 00 to 640 00 ohm 1 A IXNOM Hidden if EDIRX...

Page 388: ...Y FWD DIR Z0 LVL 128 00 to 128 00 ohm 5 A IYNOM 640 00 to 640 00 ohm 1 A IYNOM Hidden if EDIRY AUTO or ORDERY does not contain V when EDIRY Y Z0FY REV DIR Z0 LVL 128 00 to 128 00 ohm 5 A IYNOM 640 00 to 640 00 ohm 1 A IYNOM Hidden if EDIRY AUTO or ORDERY does not contain V when EDIRY Y Z0RY ZRO SQ MX TQ ANG 90 00 to 5 00 and 5 00 to 90 00 Hidden if EDIRY AUTO or ORDERY does not contain V when EDIR...

Page 389: ...0 s Hidden if 3PWRX4P OFF PWRX4D Y Side Power Elements Hidden if Slot Z 83 87 or Slot E Empty 72 73 74 76 77 ENABLE PWR ELEM N 1 4 EPWRY All Y Side Power Elements settings are hidden if EPWRY N 3PH PWR ELEM PU OFF 0 2 1300 0 VA 5 A IYNOM 1 0 6500 0 VA 5 A IYNOM 3PWRY1P PWR ELEM TYPE WATTS WATTS VARS VARS Hidden if 3PWRY1P OFF PWRY1T PWR ELEM DELAY 0 00 240 00 s Hidden if 3PWRY1P OFF PWRY1D 3PH PWR...

Page 390: ... OFF 15 00 70 00 Hz Hidden if E81Y 2 81Y2TP FREQY TRIP2 DLY 0 00 240 00 s Hidden if 81Y2TP OFF 81Y2TD FREQY TRIP3 LVL OFF 15 00 70 00 Hz Hidden if E81Y 3 81Y3TP FREQY TRIP3 DLY 0 00 240 00 s Hidden if 81Y3TP OFF 81Y3TD FREQY TRIP4 LVL OFF 15 00 70 00 Hz Hidden if E81Y 4 81Y4TP FREQY TRIP4 DLY 0 00 240 00 s Hidden if 81Y4TP OFF 81Y4TD FREQY TRIP5 LVL OFF 15 00 70 00 Hz Hidden if E81Y 5 81Y5TP FREQY...

Page 391: ...Hidden if 81RY1TP OFF 81RY1TRN FREQY ROC PU DLY 0 10 60 00 s Hidden if 81RY1TP OFF 81RY1TD FREQY ROC DO DLY 0 00 60 00 s Hidden if 81RY1TP OFF 81RY1DO FREQY ROC LEVEL OFF 0 10 15 00 Hz s Hidden if E81RY 2 81RY2TP FREQY ROC TREND INC DEC ABS Hidden if 81RY2TP OFF 81RY2TRN FREQY ROC PU DLY 0 10 60 00 s Hidden if 81RY2TP OFF 81RY2TD FREQY ROC DO DLY 0 00 60 00 s Hidden if 81RY2TP OFF 81RY2DO FREQY RO...

Page 392: ... FREQ ACC TRQCTRL SELOGIC 81ACCTC Loss of Potential LOPX BLOCK SELOGIC Hidden if Slot Z 83 84 87 88 LOPBLKX LOPY BLOCK SELOGIC Shown if Slot E 71 75 LOPBLKY X Side Phase Undervoltage Elements Shown only when Slot Z 81 82 85 86 PHASE UV LEVEL OFF 2 0 300 0 V Hidden if DELTAY_X DELTA 27PX1P PHASE UV DELAY 0 00 120 00 s Hidden if 27PX1P OFF Hidden if DELTAY_X DELTA 27PX1D PHASE UV LEVEL OFF 2 0 300 0...

Page 393: ...FF 2 0 300 0 V DELTAY_X WYE 2 0 170 0 V DELTAY_X DELTA Hidden if E27V1X 4 27V1X4P POS SEQ UV DELAY 0 00 120 00 s Hidden if 27V1X4P OFF Hidden if E27V1X 4 27V1X4D POS SEQ UV LEVEL OFF 2 0 300 0 V DELTAY_X WYE 2 0 170 0 V DELTAY_X DELTA Hidden if E27V1X 5 27V1X5P POS SEQ UV DELAY 0 00 120 00 s Hidden if 27V1X5P OFF Hidden if E27V1X 5 27V1X5D POS SEQ UV LEVEL OFF 2 0 300 0 V DELTAY_X WYE 2 0 170 0 V ...

Page 394: ...0 120 00 s Hidden if 59GX2P OFF 59GX2D Y Side Phase Undervoltage Elements Shown only when Slot E 71 75 PHASE UV LEVEL OFF 2 0 300 0 V Hidden if DELTAY_Y DELTA 27PY1P PHASE UV DELAY 0 00 120 00 s Hidden if 27PY1P OFF Hidden if DELTAY_Y DELTA 27PY1D PHASE UV LEVEL OFF 2 0 300 0 V Hidden if DELTAY_Y DELTA 27PY2P PHASE UV DELAY 0 00 120 00 s Hidden if 27PY2P OFF Hidden if DELTAY_Y DELTA 27PY2D PH_PH U...

Page 395: ...AY 0 00 120 00 s Hidden if 27S2P OFF 27S2D SYNC PH OV LEVEL OFF 2 0 300 0 V 59S1P SYNC PH OV DELAY 0 00 120 00 s Hidden if 59S1P OFF 59S1D SYNC PH OV LEVEL OFF 2 0 300 0 V 59S2P SYNC PH OV DELAY 0 00 120 00 s Hidden if 59S2P OFF 59S2D RTD Settings RTD ENABLE INT EXT NONE E49RTD All RTD settings are hidden if E49RTD NONE RTD1 LOCATION OFF WDG BRG AMB OTH RTD1LOC RTD1 IDENTIFIER 10 Characters Hidden...

Page 396: ...acters Hidden unless RTD7LOC OTH RTD7NAM RTD7 TYPE PT100 NI100 NI120 CU10 Hidden if RTD7LOC OFF RTD7TY RTD7 TRIP LEVEL OFF 1 250 C Hidden if RTD7LOC OFF TRTMP7 RTD7 WARN LEVEL OFF 1 250 C Hidden if RTD7LOC OFF ALTMP7 RTD8 LOCATION OFF WDG BRG AMB OTH RTD8LOC RTD8 IDENTIFIER 10 Characters Hidden unless RTD8LOC OTH RTD8NAM RTD8 TYPE PT100 NI100 NI120 CU10 Hidden if RTD8LOC OFF RTD8TY RTD8 TRIP LEVEL...

Page 397: ...lot Z 84 88 SYNC CHECK EN Y N E25X All X Side Synchronism Check Elements settings are hidden if E25X N V WINDOW LOW 0 00 300 00 V 25VHIX must be greater than 25VLOX 25VLOX V WINDOW HIGH 0 00 300 00 V 25VHIX must be greater than 25VLOX 25VHIX MAX VOLTAGE DIFF OFF 1 0 15 0 25VDIFX VOLT RATIO CORR 0 500 2 000 25RCFX GEN VOLTAGE HIGH Y N GENV MIN SLIP FREQ 1 00 to 0 99 Hz 25SLO MAX SLIP FREQ 0 99 to 1...

Page 398: ...R 5 3600 s FSYNCT FREQ ADJ RATE 0 01 10 00 Hz s FADJRATE FREQ PULS INTRVL 1 120 s FPULSEI FREQ PULS MIN 0 02 60 00 s FPLSMIND FREQ PULS MAX 0 10 60 00 s FPLSMAXD KICK PULS INTRVL 1 120 s KPULSEI KICK PULS MIN 0 02 2 00 s KPLSMIND KICK PULS MAX 0 02 2 00 s KPLSMAXD FMATCH START SELOGIC FSYNCST VOLT SYNC TIMER 5 3600 s VSYNCT VOLT ADJ RATE 0 01 30 00 V s VADJRATE VOLT PULS INTRVL 1 120 s VPULSEI VOL...

Page 399: ...DELAY 0 00 1 00 s 3POYD RES CURR DEM LVL OFF 0 50 16 00 A 5 A IXNOM 0 10 3 20 A 1 A IXNOM GNDEMPX Trip Close Logic MIN TRIP TIME 0 00 400 00 s TDURD CLOSE X FAIL DLY 0 00 400 00 s Hidden if Slot Z 84 88 CFDX CLOSE Y FAIL DLY 0 00 400 00 s Shown if Slot Z 83 87 or Slot E 71 75 CFDY X SIDE BRKR TRIP EQN SELOGIC TRX GEN FIELD BRKR TRIP EQN SELOGIC Hidden if Slot Z 83 84 87 88 TR1 PRIME MOVER TRIP EQN...

Page 400: ... Z 84 88 ULCLX BREAKER Y STATUS SELOGIC Shown if Slot Z 83 87 or Slot E 71 75 52AY CLOSE Y EQUATION SELOGIC Shown if Slot Z 83 87 or Slot E 71 75 CLY UNLATCH CLOSE Y SELOGIC Shown if Slot Z 83 87 or Slot E 71 75 ULCLY SELOGIC Enables SELOGIC LATCHES N 1 32 ELAT SV TIMERS N 1 32 ESV SELOGIC COUNTERS N 1 32 ESC MATH VARIABLES N 1 32 EMV Latch Bits Equations SET01 RST01 SET02 RST02 SET03 RST03 SET04 ...

Page 401: ...ings Sheets Logic Settings SET L Command RST10 SET11 RST11 SET12 RST12 SET13 RST13 SET14 RST14 SET15 RST15 SET16 RST16 SET17 RST17 SET18 RST18 SET19 RST19 SET20 RST20 SET21 RST21 SET22 RST22 SET23 RST23 SET24 RST24 SET25 RST25 SET26 RST26 SET27 RST27 SET28 RST28 SET29 RST29 SET30 ...

Page 402: ... 00 3000 00 s SV03PU SV TIMER DROPOUT 0 00 3000 00 s SV03DO SV INPUT SELOGIC SV03 SV TIMER PICKUP 0 00 3000 00 s SV04PU SV TIMER DROPOUT 0 00 3000 00 s SV04DO SV INPUT SELOGIC SV04 SV TIMER PICKUP 0 00 3000 00 s SV05PU SV TIMER DROPOUT 0 00 3000 00 s SV05DO SV INPUT SELOGIC SV05 SV TIMER PICKUP 0 00 3000 00 s SV06PU SV TIMER DROPOUT 0 00 3000 00 s SV06DO SV INPUT SELOGIC SV06 SV TIMER PICKUP 0 00 ...

Page 403: ... SV TIMER DROPOUT 0 00 3000 00 s SV12DO SV INPUT SELOGIC SV12 SV TIMER PICKUP 0 00 3000 00 s SV13PU SV TIMER DROPOUT 0 00 3000 00 s SV13DO SV INPUT SELOGIC SV13 SV TIMER PICKUP 0 00 3000 00 s SV14PU SV TIMER DROPOUT 0 00 3000 00 s SV14DO SV INPUT SELOGIC SV14 SV TIMER PICKUP 0 00 3000 00 s SV15PU SV TIMER DROPOUT 0 00 3000 00 s SV15DO SV INPUT SELOGIC SV15 SV TIMER PICKUP 0 00 3000 00 s SV16PU SV ...

Page 404: ... SV TIMER DROPOUT 0 00 3000 00 s SV22DO SV INPUT SELOGIC SV22 SV TIMER PICKUP 0 00 3000 00 s SV23PU SV TIMER DROPOUT 0 00 3000 00 s SV23DO SV INPUT SELOGIC SV23 SV TIMER PICKUP 0 00 3000 00 s SV24PU SV TIMER DROPOUT 0 00 3000 00 s SV24DO SV INPUT SELOGIC SV24 SV TIMER PICKUP 0 00 3000 00 s SV25PU SV TIMER DROPOUT 0 00 3000 00 s SV25DO SV INPUT SELOGIC SV25 SV TIMER PICKUP 0 00 3000 00 s SV26PU SV ...

Page 405: ...LOGIC SV32 Counters Equations SC PRESET VALUE 1 65000 SC01PV SC RESET INPUT SELOGIC SC01R SC LOAD PV INPUT SELOGIC SC01LD SC CNT UP INPUT SELOGIC SC01CU SC CNT DN INPUT SELOGIC SC01CD SC PRESET VALUE 1 65000 SC02PV SC RESET INPUT SELOGIC SC02R SC LOAD PV INPUT SELOGIC SC02LD SC CNT UP INPUT SELOGIC SC02CU SC CNT DN INPUT SELOGIC SC02CD SC PRESET VALUE 1 65000 SC03PV SC RESET INPUT SELOGIC SC03R SC...

Page 406: ... SC08R SC LOAD PV INPUT SELOGIC SC08LD SC CNT UP INPUT SELOGIC SC08CU SC CNT DN INPUT SELOGIC SC08CD SC PRESET VALUE 1 65000 SC09PV SC RESET INPUT SELOGIC SC09R SC LOAD PV INPUT SELOGIC SC09LD SC CNT UP INPUT SELOGIC SC09CU SC CNT DN INPUT SELOGIC SC09CD SC PRESET VALUE 1 65000 SC10PV SC RESET INPUT SELOGIC SC10R SC LOAD PV INPUT SELOGIC SC10LD SC CNT UP INPUT SELOGIC SC10CU SC CNT DN INPUT SELOGI...

Page 407: ... SC16R SC LOAD PV INPUT SELOGIC SC16LD SC CNT UP INPUT SELOGIC SC16CU SC CNT DN INPUT SELOGIC SC16CD SC PRESET VALUE 1 65000 SC17PV SC RESET INPUT SELOGIC SC17R SC LOAD PV INPUT SELOGIC SC17LD SC CNT UP INPUT SELOGIC SC17CU SC CNT DN INPUT SELOGIC SC17CD SC PRESET VALUE 1 65000 SC18PV SC RESET INPUT SELOGIC SC18R SC LOAD PV INPUT SELOGIC SC18LD SC CNT UP INPUT SELOGIC SC18CU SC CNT DN INPUT SELOGI...

Page 408: ... SC24R SC LOAD PV INPUT SELOGIC SC24LD SC CNT UP INPUT SELOGIC SC24CU SC CNT DN INPUT SELOGIC SC24CD SC PRESET VALUE 1 65000 SC25PV SC RESET INPUT SELOGIC SC25R SC LOAD PV INPUT SELOGIC SC25LD SC CNT UP INPUT SELOGIC SC25CU SC CNT DN INPUT SELOGIC SC25CD SC PRESET VALUE 1 65000 SC26PV SC RESET INPUT SELOGIC SC26R SC LOAD PV INPUT SELOGIC SC26LD SC CNT UP INPUT SELOGIC SC26CU SC CNT DN INPUT SELOGI...

Page 409: ...OGIC SC30LD SC CNT UP INPUT SELOGIC SC30CU SC CNT DN INPUT SELOGIC SC30CD SC PRESET VALUE 1 65000 SC31PV SC RESET INPUT SELOGIC SC31R SC LOAD PV INPUT SELOGIC SC31LD SC CNT UP INPUT SELOGIC SC31CU SC CNT DN INPUT SELOGIC SC31CD SC PRESET VALUE 1 65000 SC32PV SC RESET INPUT SELOGIC SC32R SC LOAD PV INPUT SELOGIC SC32LD SC CNT UP INPUT SELOGIC SC32CU SC CNT DN INPUT SELOGIC SC32CD Math Variables MV0...

Page 410: ...Y N OUT102FS OUT102 OUT103 FAIL SAFE Y N OUT103FS OUT103 Slot C Output Hidden if output option not included OUT305 OUT308 only available with 8 DO card OUT301 FAIL SAFE Y N OUT301FS OUT301 OUT302 FAIL SAFE Y N OUT302FS OUT302 OUT303 FAIL SAFE Y N OUT303FS OUT303 OUT304 FAIL SAFE Y N OUT304FS OUT304 OUT305 FAIL SAFE Y N OUT305FS OUT305 OUT306 FAIL SAFE Y N OUT306FS OUT306 OUT307 FAIL SAFE Y N OUT30...

Page 411: ...404FS OUT404 OUT405 FAIL SAFE Y N OUT405FS OUT405 OUT406 FAIL SAFE Y N OUT406FS OUT406 OUT407 FAIL SAFE Y N OUT407FS OUT407 OUT408 FAIL SAFE Y N OUT408FS OUT408 Slot E Output Hidden if output option not included OUT505 OUT508 only available with 8 DO card OUT501 FAIL SAFE Y N OUT501FS OUT501 OUT502 FAIL SAFE Y N OUT502FS OUT502 OUT503 FAIL SAFE Y N OUT503FS OUT503 OUT504 FAIL SAFE Y N OUT504FS OUT...

Page 412: ...14 SEL 700G Settings Sheets Logic Settings SET L Command MIRRORED BITS Transmit SELOGIC Control Equations Hidden if PROTO is not MBxx on any of the communications ports TMB1A TMB2A TMB3A TMB4A TMB5A TMB6A TMB7A TMB8A TMB1B TMB2B TMB3B TMB4B TMB5B TMB6B TMB7B TMB8B ...

Page 413: ...IGGER Off 1 Relay Word bit MPTR03 MESSENGER POINT MP03 AQ None 1 analog quantity MPAQ03 MESSENGER POINT MP03 TEXT 148 characters MPTX03 MESSENGER POINT MP04 TRIGGER Off 1 Relay Word bit MPTR04 MESSENGER POINT MP04 AQ None 1 analog quantity MPAQ04 MESSENGER POINT MP04 TEXT 148 characters MPTX04 MESSENGER POINT MP05 TRIGGER Off 1 Relay Word bit MPTR05 MESSENGER POINT MP05 AQ None 1 analog quantity M...

Page 414: ...R12 MESSENGER POINT MP12 AQ None 1 analog quantity MPAQ12 MESSENGER POINT MP12 TEXT 148 characters MPTX12 MESSENGER POINT MP13 TRIGGER Off 1 Relay Word bit MPTR13 MESSENGER POINT MP13 AQ None 1 analog quantity MPAQ13 MESSENGER POINT MP13 TEXT 148 characters MPTX13 MESSENGER POINT MP14 TRIGGER Off 1 Relay Word bit MPTR14 MESSENGER POINT MP14 AQ None 1 analog quantity MPAQ14 MESSENGER POINT MP14 TEX...

Page 415: ...21 MESSENGER POINT MP22 TRIGGER Off 1 Relay Word bit MPTR22 MESSENGER POINT MP22 AQ None 1 analog quantity MPAQ22 MESSENGER POINT MP22 TEXT 148 characters MPTX22 MESSENGER POINT MP23 TRIGGER Off 1 Relay Word bit MPTR23 MESSENGER POINT MP23 AQ None 1 analog quantity MPAQ23 MESSENGER POINT MP23 TEXT 148 characters MPTX23 MESSENGER POINT MP24 TRIGGER Off 1 Relay Word bit MPTR24 MESSENGER POINT MP24 A...

Page 416: ...MESSENGER POINT MP31 AQ None 1 analog quantity MPAQ31 MESSENGER POINT MP31 TEXT 148 characters MPTX31 MESSENGER POINT MP32 TRIGGER Off 1 Relay Word bit MPTR32 MESSENGER POINT MP32 AQ None 1 analog quantity MPAQ32 MESSENGER POINT MP32 TEXT 148 characters MPTX32 Group Selection GRP CHG DELAY 0 400 s TGR SELECT GROUP1 SELOGIC SS1 SELECT GROUP2 SELOGIC SS2 SELECT GROUP3 SELOGIC SS3 Phasor Measurement ...

Page 417: ...NE C37 118 IRIGC OFFSET FROM UTC 24 00 to 24 00 rounded up to quarter UTC_OFF MONTH TO BEGIN DST OFF 1 12 DST_BEGM WEEK OF THE MONTH TO BEGIN DST 1 3 L L Last week of the month Hidden if DST_BEGM OFF DST_BEGW DAY OF THE WEEK TO BEGIN DST SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT Hidden if DST_BEGM OFF DST_BEGD LOCAL HOUR TO BEGIN DST 0 23 Hidden if DST_BEGM OFF DST_BEGH MONTH TO END DST 1 12 Hidden if DST_BEGM ...

Page 418: ...000 to 99999 000 AIx01EH AIx01 LO WARN L1 OFF 99999 000 to 99999 000 AIx01LW1 AIx01 LO WARN L2 OFF 99999 000 to 99999 000 AIx01LW2 AIx01 LO ALARM OFF 99999 000 to 99999 000 AIx01LAL AIx01 HI WARN L1 OFF 99999 000 to 99999 000 AIx01HW1 AIx01 HI WARN L2 OFF 99999 000 to 99999 000 AIx01HW2 AIx01 HI ALARM OFF 99999 000 to 99999 000 AIx01HAL AIx02 AIx02 TAG NAME 8 characters 0 9 A Z _ AIx02NAM AIx02 TY...

Page 419: ...03LW2 AIx03 LO ALARM OFF 99999 000 to 99999 000 AIx03LAL AIx03 HI WARN L1 OFF 99999 000 to 99999 000 AIx03HW1 AIx03 HI WARN L2 OFF 99999 000 to 99999 000 AIx03HW2 AIx03 HI ALARM OFF 99999 000 to 99999 000 AIx03HAL AIx04 AIx04 TAG NAME 8 characters 0 9 A Z _ AIx04NAM AIx04 TYPE I V AIx04TYP If AIx04TYP I AIx04 LOW IN VAL 20 480 to 20 480 mA AIx04L AIx04 HI IN VAL 20 480 to 20 480 mA AIx04H If AIx04...

Page 420: ...647 AOx02AQL AOx02 AQTY HI 2147483647 to 2147483647 AOx02AQH If AOx02TYP I AOx02 LO OUT VAL 20 480 to 20 480 mA AOx02L AOx02 HI OUT VAL 20 480 to 20 480 mA AOx02H If AOx02TYP V AOx02 LO OUT VAL 10 240 to 10 240 V AOx02L AOx02 HI OUT VAL 10 240 to 10 240 V AOx02H AOx03 AOx03 ANALOG QTY Off 1 analog quantity AOx03AQ AOx03 TYPE I V AOx03TYP AOx03 AQTY LOW 2147483647 to 2147483647 AOx03AQL AOx03 AQTY ...

Page 421: ...Debounce AC 0 65000 ms IN305D IN306 Debounce AC 0 65000 ms IN306D IN307 Debounce AC 0 65000 ms IN307D IN308 Debounce AC 0 65000 ms IN308D Input Debounce Settings Slot D Hidden if input option not included IN401 Debounce AC 0 65000 ms IN401D IN402 Debounce AC 0 65000 ms IN402D IN403 Debounce AC 0 65000 ms IN403D IN404 Debounce AC 0 65000 ms IN404D IN405 Debounce AC 0 65000 ms IN405D IN406 Debounce ...

Page 422: ... 00 999 00 KASP3X BRK X MON CTRL SELOGIC BKMONX BRK Y MONITOR Y N EBMONY All Y Breaker Monitor settings are hidden if EBMONY N Y CL OPN OP SET1 0 65000 COSP1Y Y CL OPN OP SET2 0 65000 COSP2Y Y CL OPN OP SET3 0 65000 COSP3Y Y kA PRI INTRPT1 0 00 999 00 KASP1Y Y kA PRI INTRPT2 0 00 999 00 KASP2Y Y kA PRI INTRPT3 0 00 999 00 KASP3Y BRK Y MON CTRL SELOGIC BKMONY Data Reset RESET TARGETS SELOGIC RSTTRG...

Page 423: ...EFRTR 0 0 0 0 disables the default router Enable TCP Keep Alive Y N ETCPKA Note TCP Keep Alive is enabled with default range settings for PMU TCP sessions even when ETCPKA N TCP Keep Alive Idle Range 1 20 s Hidden if ETCPKA N KAIDLE TCP Keep Alive Interval Range 1 20 s Hidden if ETCPKA N KAINTV TCP Keep Alive Count Range 1 20 Hidden if ETCPKA N KACNT FAST OP MESSAGES Y N FASTOP OPERATING MODE FIXE...

Page 424: ...PMU Output 1 UDP IP Data Port Number 1 65534 Shown only when EPMIP 0 and PMOTS1 TCP PMOUDP1 PMU Output 2 Transport Scheme OFF TCP UDP_S UDP_T UDP_U Hidden if EPMIP 0 or 1 PMOTS2 PMU Output 2 Client IP Address zzz yyy xxx www 15 characters Hidden if PMOTS2 OFF PMOIPA2 Note PMOIPA2 cannot be set to the same address as IPADDR IP addresses from 224 0 0 1 through 239 255 255 255 are also valid when PMO...

Page 425: ...vents to Transmit On 1 200 Hidden if UNSOL1 N NUMEVE1 Oldest Event to Tx On 0 0 99999 0 s Hidden if UNSOL1 N AGEEVE1 Unsolicited Message Max Retry Attempts 2 10 Hidden if UNSOL1 N URETRY1 Unsolicited Message Offline Time Out 1 5000 s Hidden if UNSOL1 N UTIMEO1 Session 2 All DNP Session 2 settings are hidden if EDNP 2 DNP Master IP Address zzz yyy xxx www 15 characters DNPIP2 Transport Protocol UDP...

Page 426: ...s 0 3 DECPLV3 Misc Data Scaling Decimal Places 0 3 DECPLM3 Amps Reporting Dead Band Counts 0 32767 Hidden if ECLASSA3 0 ANADBA3 Volts Reporting Dead Band Counts 0 32767 Hidden if ECLASSA3 0 ANADBV3 Misc Data Reporting Dead Band Counts 0 32767 Hidden if ECLASSA3 0 and ECLASSC3 0 ANADBM3 Minutes for Request Interval I M 1 32767 TIMERQ3 Seconds to Select Operate Time Out 0 0 30 0 STIMEO3 Seconds to s...

Page 427: ...Must be Unique Setting Name Setting Required When TPORT Telnet Port Always MODNUM1a Modbus TCP Port 1 EMOD 0 MODNUM2a Modbus TCP Port 2 EMOD 1 PMOTCP1 PMU Output 1 TCP IP Local Port Number PMOTS1 TCP UDP_T or UDP_U PMOTCP2 PMU Output 2 TCP IP Local Port Number PMOTS2 TCP UDP_T or UDP_U DNPNUM DNPTCP and UDP Port EDNP 0 SNTPPORT SNTPIP Local Port Number ESNTP OFF a MODNUM1 and MODNUM2 can have the ...

Page 428: ...ime Out 0 0 30 0 STIMEO1 Data Link Retries 0 15 DRETRY1 Seconds to Data Link Time Out 0 5 Hidden if DRETRY1 0 DTIMEO1 Event Message Confirm Time Out 1 50 s ETIMEO1 Enable Unsolicited Reporting Y N Hidden if ECLASSA1 0 ECLASSB1 0 and ECLASSC1 0 UNSOL1 Enable Unsolicited Reporting at Power Up Y N Hidden if UNSOL1 N PUNSOL1 Number of Events to Transmit On 1 200 Hidden if UNSOL1 N NUMEVE1 Oldest Event...

Page 429: ...ROTO DNP MOD PMU EVMSG MB_ or DNET BITS PARITY O E N Hidden if PROTO DNET EVMSG PMU or MB_ PARITY STOP BITS 1 2 bits Hidden if PROTO MOD EVMSG MB_ or DNET STOP PORT TIME OUT 0 30 min Hidden if PROTO MOD EVMSG MB_ PMU or DNET T_OUT HDWR HANDSHAKING Y N Hidden if COMMINF 485 or PROTO MOD DNP EVMSG MB_ or DNET RTSCTS SEND AUTOMESSAGE Y N Hidden if PROTO DNP MOD EVMSG MB_ PMU or DNET AUTO FAST OP MESS...

Page 430: ...olicited Message Offline Time Out 1 5000 s Hidden if UNSOL1 N UTIMEO1 Minimum Seconds from DCD to TX 0 00 1 00 MINDLY Maximum Seconds from DCD to TX 0 00 1 00 MAXDLY Settle Time from RTS On to TX OFF 0 00 30 00 s PREDLY Settle Time from TX to RTS OFF 0 00 30 00 s PSTDLY Modem Protocol for DNP3 Session and EIA232 Port only Modem Connected to Port Y N MODEM Modem Startup String 30 characters MSTR Ph...

Page 431: ...1 8 RMB7DO RMB8 Pickup Debounce Messages 1 8 RMB8PU RMB8 Dropout Debounce Messages 1 8 RMB8DO General DISPLY PTS ENABL N 1 32 EDP LOCAL BITS ENABL N 1 32 ELB LCD TIMEOUT OFF 1 30 min FP_TO LCD CONTRAST 1 8 FP_CONT FP AUTOMESSAGES OVERRIDE ROTATING FP_AUTO CLOSE RESET LEDS Y N RSTLED Target LED TRIP LATCH T_LED Y N T01LEDL LED1 EQUATION SELOGIC T01_LED TRIP LATCH T_LED Y N T02LEDL LED2 EQUATION SEL...

Page 432: ...Points Display Point Settings maximum 60 characters Boolean Relay Word bit Name Alias Set String Clear String Analog Analog Quantity Name User Text and Formatting DISPLAY POINT DP01 60 characters DP01 DISPLAY POINT DP02 60 characters DP02 DISPLAY POINT DP03 60 characters DP03 DISPLAY POINT DP04 60 characters DP04 DISPLAY POINT DP05 60 characters DP05 DISPLAY POINT DP06 60 characters DP06 DISPLAY P...

Page 433: ... POINT DP17 60 characters DP17 DISPLAY POINT DP18 60 characters DP18 DISPLAY POINT DP19 60 characters DP19 DISPLAY POINT DP20 60 characters DP20 DISPLAY POINT DP21 60 characters DP21 DISPLAY POINT DP22 60 characters DP22 DISPLAY POINT DP23 60 characters DP23 DISPLAY POINT DP24 60 characters DP24 DISPLAY POINT DP25 60 characters DP25 DISPLAY POINT DP26 60 characters DP26 DISPLAY POINT DP27 60 chara...

Page 434: ...racters SLB03 PULSE LB_ LABEL 7 characters PLB03 LB_NAME 14 characters NLB04 CLEAR LB_ LABEL 7 characters CLB04 SET LB_ LABEL 7 characters SLB04 PULSE LB_ LABEL 7 characters PLB04 LB_NAME 14 characters NLB05 CLEAR LB_ LABEL 7 characters CLB05 SET LB_ LABEL 7 characters SLB05 PULSE LB_ LABEL 7 characters PLB05 LB_NAME 14 characters NLB06 CLEAR LB_ LABEL 7 characters CLB06 SET LB_ LABEL 7 characters...

Page 435: ...EAR LB_ LABEL 7 characters CLB13 SET LB_ LABEL 7 characters SLB13 PULSE LB_ LABEL 7 characters PLB13 LB_NAME 14 characters NLB14 CLEAR LB_ LABEL 7 characters CLB14 SET LB_ LABEL 7 characters SLB14 PULSE LB_ LABEL 7 characters PLB14 LB_NAME 14 characters NLB15 CLEAR LB_ LABEL 7 characters CLB15 SET LB_ LABEL 7 characters SLB15 PULSE LB_ LABEL 7 characters PLB15 LB_NAME 14 characters NLB16 CLEAR LB_...

Page 436: ...characters CLB23 SET LB_ LABEL 7 characters SLB23 PULSE LB_ LABEL 7 characters PLB23 LB_NAME 14 characters NLB24 CLEAR LB_ LABEL 7 characters CLB24 SET LB_ LABEL 7 characters SLB24 PULSE LB_ LABEL 7 characters PLB24 LB_NAME 14 characters NLB25 CLEAR LB_ LABEL 7 characters CLB25 SET LB_ LABEL 7 characters SLB25 PULSE LB_ LABEL 7 characters PLB25 LB_NAME 14 characters NLB26 CLEAR LB_ LABEL 7 charact...

Page 437: ...ers CLB32 SET LB_ LABEL 7 characters SLB32 PULSE LB_ LABEL 7 characters PLB32 SER Chatter Criteria Auto Removal Enable Y N ESERDEL Number of Counts 2 20 counts SRDLCNT Removal Time 0 1 90 0 s SRDLTIM SER Trigger Lists SERn As many as 24 Relay Word elements separated by spaces or commas Use NA to disable setting SER1 SER2 SER3 SER4 Relay Word Bit Aliases ALIASn RW Bit space Alias space Asserted Tex...

Page 438: ...if LER 180 PRE Generator Autosynchronism Report Settings shown if Slot E 71 72 74 75 76 and if Slot Z 81 82 85 86 GEN SYNC TRG SELOGIC GSRTRG GEN SYNC RPT RES 0 25 1 5 cyc GSRR PRE SYNC LEN 1 4799 samples PRESYNC Load Profile LDP LIST NA As many as 17 Analog Quantities LDLIST LDP ACQ RATE 5 10 15 30 60 min LDAR MOD_001 MOD_002 MOD_003 MOD_004 MOD_005 MOD_006 MOD_007 MOD_008 MOD_009 MOD_010 MOD_011...

Page 439: ...058 MOD_059 MOD_060 MOD_061 MOD_062 MOD_063 MOD_064 MOD_065 MOD_066 MOD_067 MOD_068 MOD_069 MOD_070 MOD_071 MOD_072 MOD_073 MOD_074 MOD_075 MOD_076 MOD_077 MOD_078 MOD_079 MOD_080 MOD_081 MOD_082 MOD_083 MOD_084 MOD_085 MOD_086 MOD_087 MOD_088 MOD_089 MOD_090 MOD_091 MOD_092 MOD_093 MOD_094 MOD_095 MOD_096 MOD_097 MOD_098 MOD_099 MOD_100 MOD_101 MOD_102 MOD_103 MOD_104 MOD_105 MOD_106 MOD_107 MOD_...

Page 440: ...his is DNP Map 1 DNP Map 2 and DNP Map 3 tables are identical to DNP Map 1 table Binary Input Map DNP Binary Input Label Name 10 characters MOD_119 MOD_120 MOD_121 MOD_122 MOD_123 MOD_124 MOD_125 BI_00 BI_01 BI_02 BI_03 BI_04 BI_05 BI_06 BI_07 BI_08 BI_09 BI_10 BI_11 BI_12 BI_13 BI_14 BI_15 BI_16 BI_17 BI_18 BI_19 BI_20 BI_21 BI_22 BI_23 BI_24 BI_25 BI_26 BI_27 BI_28 BI_29 BI_30 BI_31 BI_32 BI_33 ...

Page 441: ...8 BI_59 BI_60 BI_61 BI_62 BI_63 BI_64 BI_65 BI_66 BI_67 BI_68 BI_69 BI_70 BI_71 BI_72 BI_73 BI_74 BI_75 BI_76 BI_77 BI_78 BI_79 BI_80 BI_81 BI_82 BI_83 BI_84 BI_85 BI_86 BI_87 BI_88 BI_89 BI_90 BI_91 BI_92 BI_93 BI_94 BI_95 BI_96 BI_97 BI_98 BI_99 BO_00 BO_01 BO_02 BO_03 BO_04 BO_05 BO_06 BO_07 BO_08 BO_09 BO_ 10 BO_ 11 BO_ 12 BO_ 13 BO_ 14 BO_ 15 BO_ 16 BO_ 17 BO_ 18 BO_ 19 BO_ 20 BO_ 21 BO_ 22 B...

Page 442: ...7 BO_ 28 BO_ 29 BO_ 30 BO_ 31 AI_00 AI_01 AI_02 AI_03 AI_04 AI_05 AI_06 AI_07 AI_08 AI_09 AI_10 AI_11 AI_12 AI_13 AI_14 AI_15 AI_16 AI_17 AI_18 AI_19 AI_20 AI_21 AI_22 AI_23 AI_24 AI_25 AI_26 AI_27 AI_28 AI_29 AI_30 AI_31 AI_32 AI_33 AI_34 AI_35 AI_36 AI_37 AI_38 AI_39 AI_40 AI_41 AI_42 AI_43 AI_44 AI_45 AI_46 AI_47 AI_48 AI_49 AI_50 AI_51 AI_52 AI_53 AI_54 AI_55 AI_56 AI_57 AI_58 AI_59 AI_60 AI_6...

Page 443: ...75 AI_76 AI_77 AI_78 AI_79 AI_80 AI_81 AI_82 AI_83 AI_84 AI_85 AI_86 AI_87 AI_88 AI_89 AI_90 AI_91 AI_92 AI_93 AI_94 AI_95 AI_96 AI_97 AI_98 AI_99 Analog Output Map DNP Analog Output Label Name 6 characters AO_00 AO_16 AO_01 AO_17 AO_02 AO_18 AO_03 AO_19 AO_04 AO_20 AO_05 AO_21 AO_06 AO_22 AO_07 AO_23 AO_08 AO_24 AO_09 AO_25 AO_10 AO_26 AO_11 AO_27 AO_12 AO_28 AO_13 AO_29 AO_14 AO_30 AO_15 AO_31 ...

Page 444: ... Sheets DNP3 Map Settings SET DNP n Command Counter Map DNP Counter Label Name 11 characters CO_00 CO_16 CO_01 CO_17 CO_02 CO_18 CO_03 CO_19 CO_04 CO_20 CO_05 CO_21 CO_06 CO_22 CO_07 CO_23 CO_08 CO_24 CO_09 CO_25 CO_10 CO_26 CO_11 CO_27 CO_12 CO_28 CO_13 CO_29 CO_14 CO_30 CO_15 CO_31 ...

Page 445: ...ons Port Interfaces Communications Port Interfaces Location Feature PORT F EIA 232 Front Standard PORT 1 Option 1 10 100BASE T Ethernet RJ45 connector Option 2 Dual redundant 10 100 BASE T Ethernet Port 1A Port 1B Option 3 100BASE FX Ethernet LC connector Option 4 Dual redundant 100BASE FX Ethernet Port 1A Port 1B Rear Ordering Option PORT 2a Multimode Fiber Optic Serial ST connector Rear Standard...

Page 446: ...computer equipped with one available EIA 232 serial port A communications cable to connect the computer serial port to the relay serial ports Terminal emulation software to control the computer serial port An SEL 700G Relay Some of the SEL devices available for integration or communication system robustness are included in the following list SEL Communications Processors SEL 2032 SEL 2030 SEL 2020...

Page 447: ...stance to 1 km Ethernet Port Use the Ethernet port for interfacing with an Ethernet network environment SEL 700G Ethernet port choices include single or dual copper or fiber optic configurations With dual Ethernet ports the unit has an unmanaged Ethernet switch Redundant configurations support automatic failover switching from primary to backup network if the relay detects a failure in the primary...

Page 448: ...VER Step 2 Set FTIME to the desired network port failover time 0 10 65 00 s or OFF Step 3 Set NETPORT to the network interface you want On startup the relay communicates via NETPORT primary port selected If the SEL 700G detects a link failure on the primary port it activates the standby port after the failover time FTIME elapses If the link status on the NETWORK Set Port 1 Ethernet settings in eac...

Page 449: ...ort receives that are not addressed to the relay In this mode the relay ignores the NETPORT setting Fixed Connection Mode If you have a single network and want to use only one network port or if you have both ports connected but want to force usage of only one port for various reasons set NETMODE to FIXED and set NETPORT to the port you want to use Only the selected network port operates and the o...

Page 450: ...EL Time Source SEL 2401 SEL 2404 SEL 2407 for IRIG B Input to Port 3 If you use Port 3 you cannot use B01 B02 input or Port 2 Set Global setting IRIG TIME SOURCE to TIME_SRC IRIG1 Figure 7 5 IRIG B Input Via EIA 232 Port 3 SEL Communications Processor as Source If you use Port 3 you cannot use a B01 B02 input or Port 2 Set Global setting IRIG TIME SOURCE to TIME_SRC IRIG1 Figure 7 6 IRIG B Input V...

Page 451: ...e SEL 700G is a standard female 9 pin connector with pin numbering shown in Figure 7 9 The pinout assignments for this port are shown in Table 7 2 You can connect to a standard 9 pin computer port with SEL Cable C234A wiring for this cable is shown in Figure 7 10 SEL Cable C234A and other cables are available from SEL Use the SEL 5801 Cable Selector Software to select an appropriate cable for anot...

Page 452: ... EIA 485 Serial Port Pin Functions Pina a For EIA 485 the pin numbers represent relay terminals _O1 through _05 PORT 3 EIA 232 PORT 3 EIA 485a PORT 4C EIA 232 PORT 4A EIA 485a PORT F EIA 232 1 5 Vdc TX 5 Vdc TX N C 2 RXD TX RXD TX RXD 3 TXD RX TXD RX TXD 4 IRIG RX N C RX N C 5 GND Shield GND Shield GND 6 IRIG N C N C 7 RTS RTS RTS 8 CTS CTS CTS 9 GND GND GND 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 NOTE Serial communica...

Page 453: ...CD DTR Pin Func Pin Func Pin Pin DTE Device DTE Data Terminal Equipment Computer Terminal etc SEL 700G Relay 9 Pin Male D Subconnector 25 Pin Female D Subconnector 5 3 7 2 8 9 7 2 20 3 8 1 GND TXD RTS RXD CTS GND GND TXD IN DTR IN RXD OUT CD OUT GND Pin Func Pin Func Pin Pin DCE Device DCE Data Communications Equipment Modem etc SEL Communications Processor 9 Pin Male D Subconnector 9 Pin Male D S...

Page 454: ...1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 DCD RXD TXD GND RTS CTS GND 5 Vdc IN RXD OUT TXD IN Not Used GND Not Used RTS IN CTS OUT GND Pin Func Pin Func Pin Pin SEL 3010 Event Messenger DTE Data Terminal Equipment DCE Data Communications Equipment Modem etc DC Voltage 5 V not available on front panel EIA 232 port Table 7 3 Protocols Supported on the Various Ports PORT Supported Protocol PORT F SEL ASCII and Compressed AS...

Page 455: ...ROTO setting to MBA MB8A or MBTA when channel A is already assigned to another port or MBB MB8B or MBTB when channel B is already assigned on another port results in the following error message This Mirrored Bits channel is assigned to another port After displaying the error message the device returns to the PROTO setting for reentry C37 118 Protocol The SEL 700G provides C37 118 protocol synchrop...

Page 456: ...ial port connection to one of the relay ports As with FTP Telnet is a part of TCP IP A free Telnet application is included with most computer operating systems or you can obtain low cost or free Telnet applications on the Internet Ping Server Use a Ping client with the relay Ping server to verify that your network configuration is correct Ping is an application based on ICMP over an IP network A f...

Page 457: ...he Relay To enable SNTP in the relay make Port 1 setting ESNTP UNICAST MANYCAST or BROADCAST Table 7 4 shows each setting associated with SNTP SNTP Operation Modes The following sections explain the setting associated with each SNTP operation mode UNICAST MANYCAST and BROADCAST ESNTP UNICAST In unicast mode of operation the SNTP client in the relay requests time updates from the primary IP address...

Page 458: ... to only NTP server broadcasts from that address When synchronized the relay asserts Relay Word bit TSNTPP Relay Word bit TNSTPP deasserts if the relay does not receive a valid broadcast within five seconds after the period defined by setting SNTPRATE SNTP Accuracy Considerations SNTP time synchronization accuracy is limited by the accuracy of the SNTP Server and by the networking environment The ...

Page 459: ...II hex 13 when the buffer is more than 75 percent full If hardware handshaking is enabled the relay deasserts the RTS output when the buffer is approximately 95 percent full Automatic transmission sources should monitor for the XOFF character to avoid overwriting the buffer Transmission terminates at the end of the message in progress when XOFF is received and it resumes when the relay sends XON T...

Page 460: ...Once serial port communication is established with the SEL 700G the relay sends the following prompt This is referred to as Access Level 0 Only a few commands are available at Access Level 0 One is the ACC command See the SEL 700G Relay Command Summary at the end of this manual Enter the ACC command at the Access Level 0 prompt The ACC command takes the SEL 700G to Access Level 1 See Access Comman...

Page 461: ...rmation available from the serial port commands is also available via the front panel pushbuttons Access Level Functions The serial port commands at the different access levels offer varying levels of control The Access Level 0 commands provide the first layer of security In addition Access Level 0 supports several commands necessary for SEL communications processors The Access Level 1 commands ar...

Page 462: ...vel 2 Access Commands ACCESS 2ACCESS and CAL The ACC 2AC and CAL commands see Table 7 7 provide entry to the multiple access levels Different commands are available at the different access levels as shown in the SEL 700G Relay Command Summary at the end of this manual Commands ACC and 2AC are explained together because they operate similarly See Access Levels on page 7 16 for a discussion of placi...

Page 463: ...37 At the prompt enter the default password and press the Enter key The relay responds with the following The prompt indicates the relay is now in Access Level 1 If the entered password is incorrect the relay prompts you for the password again Password The relay prompts for the password as many as three times If the requested password is incorrectly entered three times the relay pulses the SALARM ...

Page 464: ...es the specified interval completion You can test the analog output in one of the following two modes Fixed percentage Outputs a fixed percentage of the signal for a specified duration Ramp Ramps the output from minimum to maximum of full scale over the time specified NOTE 0 low span 100 high span For a scaled output from 4 20 mA 0 percent is 4 mA and 100 percent is 20 mA When parameter p is a per...

Page 465: ... of the ramp mode when the analog output signal type is 4 20 mA for a 9 0 minute test To check the device output calculate the current time mA min output as follows To start the test enter ANA AO301 R 9 0 at the Access Level 2 prompt AST Command Start Autosynchronizer The AST command Access Level 2 is available in SEL 700G models with autosynchronizer function It allows the ASCII serial port to co...

Page 466: ...d Reset Breaker Wear Use the BRE n W command to preload breaker wear data The BRE n W command saves only new data after the Save Changes Y N message If you make a data entry error using the BRE n W command the values echoed after the Invalid format changes not saved message are the previous breaker wear values unchanged by the aborted BRE n W attempt Select n X or n Y for Breaker X or Breaker Y da...

Page 467: ...w Compressed ASCII event report CGSR Command Generator Autosynchronism Report The CGSR command is available in SEL 700G models with the generator autosynchronizer function It generates the requested generator autosynchronism report in Compressed ASCII format to facilitate report storage and display SEL communications processors and the ACSELERATOR Analytic Assistant take advantage of the Compresse...

Page 468: ...mpt aborts the command The CLO n command is supervised by the main board Breaker jumper see Table 2 15 If the Breaker jumper is not in place Breaker jumper OFF the relay does not execute the CLO n command and responds with the following COMMUNICATIONS Command The COM x command see Table 7 10 displays communications statistics for the MIRRORED BITS communications channels For more information on MI...

Page 469: ... MIRRORED BITS communications Channel A 1 COM B Return a summary report of the last 255 records in the communications buffer for MIRRORED BITS communications Channel B 1 COM L A Appends a long report to the summary report of the last 255 records in the communications buffer for MIRRORED BITS communications Channel A 1 COM L B Appends a long report to the summary report of the last 255 records in t...

Page 470: ... date you enter by using other time sources such as IRIG Enter the DATE command with a date to set the internal clock date Separate the month day and year parameters with spaces commas slashes colons and semicolons Set the year in 4 digit form for dates 2000 2099 Global setting DATE_F sets the date format ETH Command The ETH command Access Level 1 displays the Ethernet port Port 1 status as shown ...

Page 471: ...re 7 19 Ethernet Port PORT 1 Status Report ETH Enter SEL 700G Date 02 28 2010 Time 10 41 44 GENERATOR RELAY Time Source Internal MAC 00 30 A7 00 75 6A IP ADDRESS 192 168 1 2 SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 0 DEFAULT GATEWAY 192 168 1 1 LINK SPEED DUPLEX MEDIA PORT 1A Up 100M Full TX Figure 7 20 Non Redundant Port Response Table 7 16 EVENT Command Event Reports Sheet 1 of 2 Command Description Access Level...

Page 472: ...cle data 1 EVE GND n Return the n ground event report 64G element with 4 samples cycle data 1 Table 7 17 EVENT Command Format Parameter Description n Parameter n specifies the event report number to be returned Use the HIS command to determine the event report number of the event you want to display If n is not specified the relay displays event report 1 by default m Parameter m is X for X side vo...

Page 473: ... or 0 8 of 3000 00 Frequency Band 2 58 8 to 58 0 422 5s or 78 2 of 540 00 Operating History elapsed time in ddd hh mm ss Since 02 24 2010 17 02 36 Running hours 0 01 31 03 Stopped hours 1 19 55 43 Full load hours 0 01 48 57 Time running 3 Accumulated I2 I2 t A A s 20 9 Average power Since 02 24 2010 17 02 36 MW out 63 94 MVAR out 36 83 MVAR in 0 00 power factor 0 87 LAG Figure 7 21 GEN Command Res...

Page 474: ...nClass Logical Node Class and GSEControl name GSE Control Block Name for example SEL_700G_1CFG LLN0 GO GooseDSet13 Receive GOOSE Control Reference This field represents the goCbRef GOOSE Control Block Reference information that includes the iedName IED name ldInst Logical Device Instance LN0 lnClass Logical Node Class and cbName GSE Control Block Name for example SEL_700G_1CFG LLN0 GO GooseDSet13 ...

Page 475: ... 50 Data Set SEL_700G_2CFG LLN0 DSet13 GOOSE Receive Status MultiCastAddr Ptag Vlan StNum SqNum TTL Code SEL_700G_1CFG LLN0 GO NewGOOSEMessage5 01 0C CD 01 00 05 4 0 1 100425 160 Data Set SEL_700G_1CFG LLN0 DSet10 SEL_700G_1CFG LLN0 GO NewGOOSEMessage3 01 0C CD 01 00 03 4 0 1 98531 120 Data Set SEL_700G_1CFG LLN0 DSet05 SEL_700G_1CFG LLN0 GO NewGOOSEMessage2 01 0C CD 01 00 02 4 0 1 97486 200 Data ...

Page 476: ...a description of any particular command type HELP followed by the name of the command for help on each command HISTORY Command Use the HIS command see Table 7 25 to view a list of one line descriptions of relay events or clear the list and corresponding event reports from nonvolatile memory For more information on event reports see Section 9 Analyzing Events SEL_387E_1CFG LLN0 GO NewGOOSEMessage2 ...

Page 477: ...etermine if the relay is properly reading the IRIG B signal LDP Command Load Profile Report Use the LDP commands see Table 7 28 and Table 7 29 to view and manage the Load Profile report see Figure 5 15 If there are no stored data and an LDP command is issued the relay responds with No data available Table 7 25 HISTORY Command Command Description Access Level HIS Return event histories with the old...

Page 478: ...forced to the default values Table 7 28 LDP Commands Command Description Access Level LDP row1 row2 LDP date1 date2 Use the LDP command to display a numeric progression of all load profile report rows Use the LDP command with parameters to display a numeric or reverse numeric subset of the load profile rows 1 LDP C Use this command to clear the load profile report from nonvolatile memory 1 Table 7...

Page 479: ...llowing MET Command Metering Data The MET command see Table 7 32 Table 7 33 and Table 7 34 provides access to the relay metering data Table 7 31 LOO Command Command Description Access Level LOO Enable loopback testing of MIRRORED BITS channels 2 LOO A Enable loopback on MIRRORED BITS Channel A for the next 5 minutes 2 LOO B Enable loopback on MIRRORED BITS Channel B for the next 5 minutes 2 LOO A ...

Page 480: ...129 for factory default settings and trip logic Select n X or n Y for Breaker X or Breaker Y respectively To issue the OPE X command enter the following Typing N Enter after the previous prompt aborts the command The OPE command is supervised by the main board Breaker jumper see Table 2 15 If the Breaker jumper is not in place Breaker jumper OFF the relay does not execute the OPE command and respo...

Page 481: ...ated attacks OPE X Enter Command Aborted No BRKR Jumper Table 7 35 PASSWORD Command Command Description Access Level PAS level Change password for Access Level level 2 Table 7 36 PAS Command Format Parameter Description level Parameter level represents the relay Access Levels 1 2 or C Table 7 37 Factory Default Passwords for Access Levels 1 2 and C Access Level Factory Default Password 1 OTTER 2 T...

Page 482: ...til you stop the PING test by pressing the Q key PULSE Command Use the PULSE command see Table 7 39 to pulse any of the relay control outputs for a specified time This function aids you in relay testing and commissioning When a PUL command is issued the selected contact will close or open depending on the output contact type a or b The PUL command energizes the coil and does not have any effect if...

Page 483: ...ss Level 0 0 Table 7 41 R_S Command Restore s Command Description Access Level R_S Restore the factory default settings and passwords and reboot the system a a Only available after a settings or critical RAM failure 2 Table 7 42 SER Command Sequential Events Recorder Report Command Description Access Level SER Use the SER command to display a chronological progression of all available SER rows as ...

Page 484: ...d date1 and date2 to return all rows between date1 and date beginning with date1 and ending with date2 Enter the oldest date first to display a chronological progression through the report Enter the newest date first to display a reverse chronological progression Date entries are dependent on the date format setting DATE_F For example use SER 1 5 2003 1 7 2003 to return all records for January 5 6...

Page 485: ...at Parameter Description s Append s the name of the specific setting you want to view and jumps to this setting If s is not entered the relay starts at the first setting TERSE Append TERSE to skip the settings display after the last setting Use this parameter to speed up the SET command If you want to review the settings before saving do not use the TERSE option Table 7 47 SET Command Editing Keys...

Page 486: ... EREF N Rotor Ground E64F N System Backup EBUP V Volt Restr TOC 51VP 8 00 51VCA 0 51VC U2 51VTD 3 00 51VRS Y 51VTC NOT LOPX Loss of Field E40 Y 40Z1P 13 4 40XD1 2 5 40Z1D 0 00 40Z2P 13 4 40XD2 2 5 40Z2D 0 50 40ZTC NOT LOPX Curr Unbalance E46 Y 46Q1P 8 0 46Q1D 30 00 46Q2P 8 0 46Q2K 10 46QTC 1 4 Thermal Overload E49T N Volts per Hertz E24 Y 24D1P 105 24D1D 1 00 24CCS ID 24IP 105 24IC 2 24ITD 0 1 24D...

Page 487: ... X Side ROC Freq E81RX N Y Side ROC Freq E81RY N Freq Accumulator E81ACC N X Ph Undervolt 27PX1P OFF 27PX2P OFF 27PPX1P 93 5 27PPX1D 0 50 27PPX2P OFF Y Ph Undervolt 27PY1P OFF 27PY2P OFF 27PPY1P 93 5 27PPY1D 0 50 27PPY2P OFF X Ph Overvolt 59PX1P OFF 59PX2P OFF 59PPX1P OFF 59PPX2P OFF Y Ph Overvolt 59PY1P OFF 59PY2P OFF 59PPY1P OFF 59PPY2P OFF X P Seq U O Volt E27V1X 1 27V1X1P 5 0 27V1X1D 0 50 E59V...

Page 488: ...OR 81X2T OR 81RX1T OR 81RX2T OR NOT LT02 AND SV04T OR OCX TR1 SV06 OR SV07 OR SV08 TR2 SV06 OR SV07 OR LT06 TR3 SV06 OR SV07 TRY SV09 OR SV10 OR LT02 AND SV04T OR OCY REMTRIP 0 ULTRX 3POX ULTR1 NOT TR1 ULTR2 NOT TR2 ULTR3 NOT TR3 ULTRY 3POY 52AX 0 CLX SV03T AND NOT LT02 OR CCX ULCLX TRIPX 52AY 0 CLY SV03T AND LT02 OR CCY ULCLY TRIPY Figure 7 26 SHOW Command Example Continued Table 7 50 STATUS Comm...

Page 489: ...Integrity of Card Z OK FAIL DN_MAC_ID Specific DeviceNet card identification Text Data ASA Manufacturers identifier for DeviceNet Text Data DN_Rate DeviceNet card network communications data rate ___kbps Text Data DN_Status DeviceNet connection and fault status 000b bbbb Text Data Current Offset IAn IBn ICn IN DC offset in hardware circuits of current channels n X or Y Voltage WARN Voltage Offset ...

Page 490: ...ront panel target LEDs or Relay Word bit whether these LEDs or Relay Word bits are asserted or deasserted Table 7 52 SUMMARY Command Command Description Access Level SUM n The command without arguments displays the latest event summary Use n to display particular event summary 1 SUM R or C Use this command to clear the archive 1 Table 7 53 SYN Command Command Description Access Level SYN n Display...

Page 491: ...m 0 23 the value mm is for minutes from 0 59 the value ss is for seconds from 0 59 If you enter a valid time the relay updates and saves the time in the nonvolatile clock and displays the time you just entered If you enter an invalid time the SEL 700G responds with Invalid Time TRIGGER Command Trigger Event Report Use the TRI command see Table 7 58 to trigger the SEL 700G to record data for the hi...

Page 492: ...r the direction of SEL The information contained in a vector report is formatted for SEL in house use only Your SEL application engineer or the factory may request a VEC command capture to help diagnose a relay or system problem Table 7 59 VEC Command Command Description Access Level VEC D Displays the standard vector report 2 VEC E Displays the extended vector report 2 ...

Page 493: ...front panel liquid crystal display LCD Front panel targets and other LEDs give a clear indication of the SEL 700G operation status The features that help you operate the relay from the front panel include the following Reading metering Inspecting targets Accessing settings Controlling relay operations Viewing diagnostics Front Panel Layout Figure 8 1 shows and identifies the following regions Huma...

Page 494: ...tating display under the conditions described in Table 8 1 Relay failure has the highest priority followed by trip and alarm when the front panel setting FP_AUTO OVERRIDE If the front panel setting FP_AUTO ROTATING then the rotating display messages continue and any TRIP or ALARM message is added to the rotation Relay failure still overrides the rotating display i4485a LOSS OF FIELD VOLTS HERTZ OV...

Page 495: ... to perform an Access Level 2 activity the relay determines whether you have entered the correct Access Level 2 password since the front panel inactivity timer expired If you have not the relay displays the screen shown in Figure 8 3 for you to enter the password See PASSWORD Command Change Passwords on page 7 37 for the list of default passwords and for more information on changing passwords Figu...

Page 496: ...ithin the front panel menu structure described in detail throughout the remainder of this section Table 8 2 describes the function of each front panel pushbutton Figure 8 4 Front Panel Pushbuttons Table 8 2 Front Panel Pushbutton Functions Pushbutton Function Up Arrow Move up within a menu or data list While editing a setting value increase the value of the underlined digit Down Arrow Move down wi...

Page 497: ...in detail in the following paragraphs Figure 8 5 Main Menu Meter Menu Select the Meter menu item from the MAIN menu as shown in Figure 8 6 to view metering data The METER menu has menu items for viewing different types of metering data like Fundamental rms Thermal etc Select the type of metering and view the data by using the Up Arrow or Down Arrow pushbuttons See Metering on page 5 2 for a descri...

Page 498: ...onse When Energy or Max Min Demand Peak Demand Metering Is Reset Assume that the relay configuration contains no analog input cards In response to a request for analog data selecting Analog Inputs the device displays the message as shown in Figure 8 9 Figure 8 9 Relay Response When No Analog Cards Are Installed Assume that the math variables are not enabled In response to a request for math variab...

Page 499: ...Menu and DISPLAY Submenu When you select Display and no event data are available the relay displays as shown in Figure 8 13 Figure 8 13 Relay Response When No Event Data Available When you select Clear from the EVENTS menu and confirm the selection the relay displays as shown in Figure 8 14 after it clears the events data Figure 8 14 Relay Response When Events Are Cleared Targets Menu Select the T...

Page 500: ...Reset TCU as menu items Select the Open Breaker menu item and then select breaker X or Y to assert Relay Word bit OCX or OCY which opens breaker X or Y via the TRX or TRY SELOGIC control equations see Table 4 52 for the TRX or TRY equations and Table J 3 for the definition of the OCX or OCY bits Note that this requires Level 2 access TARGETS Row 0 10000000 Row 1 00000000 Row 2 00000000 Targets Sel...

Page 501: ...menu Select the Local Bits menu item from the CONTROL menu for local control action Local bits take the place of traditional panel switches and perform isolation open close or pulse operations With the settings as per the example in Section 4 see Local Bits on page 4 230 for more information Local Bit 1 replaces a supervisory switch Figure 8 19 shows the screens in closing the supervisory switch I...

Page 502: ...ains the setting of interest and then navigate to the particular setting View or edit the setting by pressing the ENT pushbutton For text settings use the four navigation pushbuttons to scroll through the available alphanumeric and special character settings matrix For numeric settings use the Left Arrow and Right Arrow pushbuttons to select the digit to change and the Up Arrow and Down Arrow push...

Page 503: ...nu and Status Submenu PORT F 2 3 4 SET SHOW Global Group Port Active Group Date Time Password GLOBAL General Settings Event Messenger Time Synchronization Source GROUP 1 2 3 1 ID Settings Config Settings Trip Close Logic F Protocol Select Comm Settings SEL Protocol Settings Active Group 1 Date 03 29 2010 Time 14 04 36 F Selected 1 Selected Time Selected Password 1 Password Selected Date Selected A...

Page 504: ... Settings T0n_LED are SELOGIC control equations that work with the corresponding T0nLEDL latch settings to illuminate the LEDs shown in Figure 8 24 Parameter n is a number from 1 through 6 that indicates each LED If the latch setting T0nLEDL for a certain LED is set to N then the LED will follow the status of the corresponding control equation T0n_LED When the equation asserts the LED will illumin...

Page 505: ...rd Bits TARGET RESET Pushbutton Target Reset For a trip event the SEL 700G latches the trip involved target LEDs except for the ENABLED LED Press the TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset the latched target LEDs When a new trip event occurs and the previously latched trip targets have not been reset the relay clears the latched targets and displays the new trip targets Pressing and holding the TARGET R...

Page 506: ...n Programming specific conditions in the SELOGIC control equation RSTTRGT is another method for resetting target LEDs Access RSTTRGT in Global Settings SET G Command Data Reset on page 4 218 for further information Front Panel Operator Control Pushbuttons The SEL 700G features four operator controlled pushbuttons each with two programmable pushbutton LEDs for local control as shown in Figure 8 26 ...

Page 507: ... PBnm _LED settings are SELOGIC control equations that when asserted illuminate the corresponding LED for as long as the input is asserted When the input deasserts the LED also deasserts without latching Using SELOGIC control equations you can readily change the default LED and pushbutton functions Use the optional slide in label to mark the pushbuttons and pushbutton LEDs with custom names to ref...

Page 508: ...the CLOSE operator control pushbut ton and then move a safe distance away from the breaker before the SEL 700GT or SEL 700GW issues a close the CLOSE operator control comes with no set delay in the factory settings With a set delay press the CLOSE operator control pushbutton momentarily and notice that the BRKR CLOSED LED flashes on and off during the delay time indicating a pending close Abort th...

Page 509: ... the operator can press the CLOSE operator control pushbut ton and then move a safe distance away from the breaker before the SEL 700G0 1 issues a close the CLOSE operator control comes with no set delay in the factory set tings With a set delay press the CLOSE operator control pushbutton momentarily and notice that the BRKR CLOSED LED flashes on and off during the delay time indicating a pending ...

Page 510: ...This page intentionally left blank ...

Page 511: ...out from a serial port when port setting AUTO Y A summary provides a quick overview of an event You can also retrieve the summaries by using the SUMMARY command Event History The relay keeps an index of stored nonvolatile event reports Use the HISTORY command to obtain this index The index includes some of the event summary information so that the appropriate event report can be identified and ret...

Page 512: ...180 Prefault length is the first part of the total event report length and precedes the event report triggering point Changing the PRE setting has no effect on the stored reports The relay stores as many as 4 of the most recent 180 cycle or 17 of the most recent 64 cycle or 72 of the most recent 15 cycle event reports in nonvolatile memory Refer to the SET R command in SET Command Change Settings ...

Page 513: ...The primary magnitudes of the line to neutral voltage WYE setting or phase to phase voltages DELTA setting neutral voltage and synchronism check voltage if available Hottest RTD temperatures SEL 2600 RTD Module or internal RTD card option necessary The relay includes the event summary in the event report The identifiers date and time information are at the top of the event report and the remaining...

Page 514: ...T OR 67QY2T AND TRIP Neutral 50 Trip 50N1T OR 50N2T OR 67N1T OR 67N2T AND TRIP Neg Seq 46 Trip 46Q2T AND TRIP Ph 51 Trip 51PXT OR 51PYT AND TRIP Gnd 51 Trip 51GXT OR 51GYT AND TRIP 51Q Trip 51QXT OR 51QYT AND TRIP Neutral 51 Trip 51N1T AND TRIP PowerElemnt Trip 3PWRX1T OR 3PWRX2T OR 3PWRX3T OR 3PWRX4T OR 3PWRY1T OR 3PWRY2T OR 3PWRY3T OR 3PWRY4T AND TRIP Backup Trip 21C1T OR 21C2T OR 51VT OR 51CT A...

Page 515: ...are listed below model dependent DELTAY_X or Y WYE Phase to Neutral Voltages VAX VBX VCX VAY VBY VCY Residual Voltage VGX calculated from VAX VBX VCX VGY calculated from VAY VBY VCY DELTAY_X or Y DELTA Phase to Phase Voltages VABX VBCX VCAX VABY VBCY VCAY Sync Voltage VS Neutral Voltage VN If the RTDs are connected the hottest RTD C fields display the hottest RTD reading in each RTD group The hott...

Page 516: ...he relay event history View the Relay Event History dialog box via the Analysis Get Event Files menu Clearing Use the HIS C command to clear or reset history data from Access Levels 1 and higher Clear reset history data at any communications port This clears all event summaries history records and reports Event Reports The latest event reports are stored in nonvolatile memory The SEL 700G Relay ca...

Page 517: ...ve zero sequence current and introduce a phase shift They also increase magnitude by under balanced system conditions and as high as two times under unbalanced condition As a result the relay cannot derive the primary currents quantities accurately The relay performs the following under all system conditions in the case of delta connected CTs The primary currents displayed are derived from the sec...

Page 518: ...tput information Table 9 2 summarizes the analog event report columns Table 9 2 Analog Event Report Columns Definitions Sheet 1 of 2 Column Heading Column Symbols Description IAX Current measured by channel IAX primary A IBX Current measured by channel IBX primary A ICX Current measured by channel ICX primary A IAY Current measured by channel IAY primary A IBY Current measured by channel IBY prima...

Page 519: ...fies the row with the maximum phase current The maximum phase current is calculated from the row identified with the asterisk and the row one quarter cycle previous see Figure 9 4 and Figure 9 5 These currents are listed at the end of the event report in the event summary If the trigger row and the maximum phase current row are the same row the symbol takes precedence Out 12 1 2 b OUT101 AND NOT O...

Page 520: ... 53 5 48 0 104 0 3706 3012 6660 598 59 99 85 0 466 0 7 5 85 0 89 0 2 5 5571 5972 570 850 59 99 9 60 0 222 5 102 5 53 0 47 5 105 0 3705 3017 6659 596 59 99 85 0 466 5 7 5 85 5 88 5 2 5 5572 5972 565 852 59 99 59 5 222 5 103 5 53 5 48 0 104 5 3701 3020 6661 596 59 99 85 5 466 0 8 0 85 5 89 5 2 0 5574 5969 563 850 59 99 10 60 0 223 0 103 5 52 5 47 5 105 0 3699 3024 6660 595 59 99 85 0 466 5 7 0 86 0 ...

Page 521: ... V 6690 6691 6683 178 Sync Voltage Mag VS V 1039 Neutral Voltage Mag VN V 7583 Global Settings FNOM 60 DATE_F MDY FAULT 51V OR 51C OR 50PX1P OR 46Q2 OR 21C1P OR 21C2P OR 50PY1P OR 50QY1P OR 50GY1P OR 50N1P OR 51PYP OR 51QYP OR 51GYP OR TRIP EMP N TGR 3 SS1 1 SS2 0 SS3 0 EPMU N 52ABF N BFDX 0 50 BFIX R_TRIG TRIPX IN101D 10 IN102D 10 IN301D 10 IN302D 10 IN303D 10 IN304D 10 EBMONX Y COSP1X 10000 COSP...

Page 522: ...0PY2D 0 00 50PY2TC 1 50PY3P OFF 50PY3D 0 00 50PY3TC 1 50GY1P OFF 50GY2P OFF 50QY1P OFF 50QY2P OFF 50N1P OFF 50N2P OFF 51NP OFF 51NC U3 51NTD 1 50 51NRS N 51NCT 0 00 51NMR 0 00 51NTC 1 EDIRX N ZLFX 32 50 PLAFX 30 00 NLAFX 30 00 EPWRX N E81X N E81RX N E81ACC N 27PX1P OFF 27PX2P OFF 27PPX1P 93 5 27PPX1D 0 50 27PPX2P OFF 59PX1P OFF 59PX2P OFF 59PPX1P OFF 59PPX2P OFF E27V1X 1 27V1X1P 5 0 27V1X1D 0 50 E...

Page 523: ...RIG SV01T AND NOT LT01 RST01 R_TRIG SV01T AND LT01 SET02 NA RST02 NA SET03 PB03 AND R_TRIG SV02T AND LT01 AND NOT 52AX RST03 R_TRIG SV02T OR SV03T AND LT03 SET04 PB04 AND R_TRIG SV02T AND 52AX RST04 R_TRIG SV02T OR SV04T AND LT04 SET05 NA RST05 NA SET06 LB01 OR RB01 RST06 3POX SV01PU 3 00 SV01DO 0 00 SV01 PB01 SV02PU 0 25 SV02DO 0 00 SV02 PB01 OR PB02 OR PB03 OR PB04 SV03PU 0 00 SV03DO 0 00 SV03 L...

Page 524: ...pled Current Waveform In Figure 9 5 note that you can use two rows of current data from the analog event report 1 4 cycle apart to calculate phasor rms current values In Figure 9 5 at the present sample the phasor rms current value is Equation 9 1 The present sample IA 940 7 A is a real rms current value that relates to the phasor rms current value Equation 9 2 752 0 2 941 0 2 1204 750 3 2 940 7 2...

Page 525: ...the Options menu under Tools and select either SEL 5601 or SYNCHROWAVE Event 2015 SEL 5601 2015 as the event viewer To view the saved events using the SEL 5601 or SEL 5030 Software click on the View Event Files function from the Tools Events menu to select the event you want to view QuickSet remembers the location where you stored IA RMS t IA Event Report Column Magnitude X 940 7 Y 750 3 Angle Arc...

Page 526: ...EL 5601 2015 Software for displaying and analyzing relay event reports The ac analog signals in a CEV report when viewed using SYNCHROWAVE Event 2015 Software are scaled up by a factor of to display the instantaneous magnitudes Figure 9 6 Sample CEV Report Viewed With Analytic Assistant or QuickSet Via SEL 5601 With Analytic Assistant you have two options for converting CEV reports to COMTRADE as ...

Page 527: ...ation each 1 4 cycle Retrieve this report with the EVE D X command Table 9 3 gives the digital event report column definitions for the protection and control elements and the inputs and outputs Table 9 3 Digital Event Report Column Definitions Sheet 1 of 6 Column Designation Column Symbols Column Symbol RWBs X Side 50PX1 t 50PX1P picked up 50PX1T picked up 50PX2 t 50PX2P picked up 50PX2T picked up...

Page 528: ...7S1 picked up 27S1T picked up 27S2 t 27S2 picked up 27S2T picked up 59PPX1 t 59PPX1 picked up 59PPX1T picked up 59PPX2 t 59PPX2 picked up 59PPX2T picked up 59GX1 t 59GX1 picked up 59GX1T picked up 59GX2 t 59GX2 picked up 59GX2T picked up 59QX1 t 59QX1 picked up 59QX1T picked up 59QX2 t 59QX2 picked up 59QX2T picked up 59S1 t 59S1 picked up 59S1T picked up 59S2 t 59S2 picked up 59S2T picked up 24D1...

Page 529: ...ed up 81X2T picked up Both 81X1T and 81X2T picked up 81X34 3 4 b 81X3T picked up 81X4T picked up Both 81X3T and 81X4T picked up 81X56 5 6 b 81X5T picked up 81X6T picked up Both 81X5T and 81X6T picked up REF t REF1F picked up REF1P picked up BFIX t BFIX picked up BFTX picked up TRIP12 1 2 B TRIP1 picked up TRIP2 picked up Both TRIP1 and TRIP2 picked up TRIP3X 3 X B TRIP3 picked up TRIPX picked up B...

Page 530: ...icked up 50QY2T or 67QY2T picked up 51PY1 t r 51PY1P picked up 51PY1T picked up 51PY1R picked up 51GY1 t r 51GY1P picked up 51GY1T picked up 51GY1R picked up 51QY1 t r 51QY1P picked up 51QY1T picked up 51QY1R picked up 27PPY1 t 27PPY1 picked up 27PPY1T picked up 27PPY2 t 27PPY2 picked up 27PPY2T picked up 59PPY1 t 59PPY1 picked up 59PPY1T picked up 59PPY2 t 59PPY2 picked up 59PPY2T picked up 59GY1...

Page 531: ...puts 3034 3 4 b IN303 picked up IN304 picked up Both IN303 and IN304 picked up Inputs 3056 5 6 b IN305 picked up IN306 picked up Both IN305 and IN306 picked up Inputs 3078 7 8 b IN307 picked up IN308 picked up Both IN307 and IN308 picked up Inputs 4012 1 2 b IN401 picked up IN402 picked up Both IN401 and IN402 picked up Inputs 4034 3 4 b IN403 picked up IN404 picked up Both IN403 and IN404 picked ...

Page 532: ...tputs 4012 1 2 b OUT401 picked up OUT402 picked up Both OUT401 and OUT402 picked up Outputs 4034 3 4 b OUT403 picked up OUT404 picked up Both OUT403 and OUT404 picked up Outputs 4056 5 6 b OUT405 picked up OUT406 picked up Both OUT405 and OUT406 picked up Outputs 4078 7 8 b OUT407 picked up OUT408 picked up Both OUT407 and OUT408 picked up Outputs 5012 1 2 b OUT501 picked up OUT502 picked up Both ...

Page 533: ...gghbN 1 rrr b r r rrr b r r rrr b r r rrr b r r 2 rrr b r r rrr b r r rrr b r r rrr b r r 3 rrr b r r rrr b r r rrr b r r rrr b r r 4 rrr b r r rrr b r r rrr b r r rrr b r r 5 rrr b r r rrr b r r rrr b r r rrr b r r 6 rrr b r r bb rrr b r r bb rrr b r r bb rrr b r r bb 7 rrr b r r bb rrr b r r bb rrr b r r bb rrr b r r bb 8 rrr b r r bb rrr b r r bb rrr b r r bb rrr b r r bb 9 rrr b r r bb rrr b r...

Page 534: ...mmand n is the event number to retrieve the reports The relay defaults to n 1 if the event number is not specified The event report rows show data every cycle Refer to the example EVE GND event report in Figure 9 9 to view the data 13 rrr b r r bb rrr b r r bb rrr b r r bb rrr b r r bb 14 rrr b r r bb rrr b r r bb rrr b r r bb rrr b r r bb 15 rrr b r r bb rrr b r r bb rrr b r r bb rrr b r r bb Fig...

Page 535: ...975 0 1004 5 6668 3 t N 2975 0 1003 6 6666 3 t N 2979 5 1005 7 6666 3 t N 10 2973 0 1003 1 6664 0 t N 2974 7 1003 6 6667 7 t N 2974 7 1003 6 6666 1 t N 2979 0 1005 7 6667 0 t N 11 2972 4 1003 2 6664 4 t N 2974 2 1004 2 6668 2 t N 2974 2 1003 4 6666 2 t N 2978 5 1005 0 6667 2 t N 12 2972 9 1002 4 6664 9 t N 2974 8 1003 5 6668 7 t N 2975 7 1003 5 6667 0 t N 2980 4 1005 6 6668 0 t N 13 2973 0 1004 0 ...

Page 536: ...vent report column definitions for the analog quantities IOPz IRTz IzF2 and IzF5 for z 1 2 and 3 Table 9 6 gives the differential event report digital column definitions for the protection and control elements and the base model inputs and outputs Table 9 4 Stator Ground Event report EVE GND Digital Column Definitions for Protection Control and I O Elements Column Designation Column Symbols Column...

Page 537: ...ontrol and I O Elements Column Designation Column Symbols Column Symbol Relay Word Bits RWB 87R 87R picked up 87R12 1 2 b 87R1 picked up 87R2 picked up Both 87R1 and 87R2 picked up 87R3 87R3 picked up 87U12 1 2 b 87U1 picked up 87U2 picked up Both 87U1 and 87U2 picked up 87U3 87U3 picked up 87B12 1 2 b 87BL1 picked up 87BL2 picked up Both 87BL1 and 87BL2 picked up 87B3 87BL3 picked up 87HR12 1 2 b...

Page 538: ...5 0 001 0 047 0 004 2 2 0 831 1 236 0 002 0 057 0 002 2 2 0 831 1 236 0 001 0 047 0 001 2 2 7 0 833 1 235 0 002 0 057 0 003 2 2 0 833 1 235 0 001 0 047 0 004 2 2 0 831 1 235 0 003 0 048 0 002 2 2 0 832 1 235 0 001 0 048 0 001 2 2 8 0 834 1 235 0 002 0 048 0 001 2 2 0 833 1 236 0 001 0 048 0 001 2 2 0 830 1 235 0 001 0 048 0 000 2 2 0 831 1 235 0 001 0 047 0 000 2 2 9 0 833 1 235 0 001 0 046 0 003 ...

Page 539: ...me element name and element state SER Aliases You can rename as many as 20 of the SER trigger conditions by using the ALIAS settings For instance the factory default alias setting 2 renames Relay Word bit PB02 for reporting in the SER ALIAS2 PB02 FP_LOCK PICKUP DROPOUT When Relay Word bit PB02 is asserted the SER report shows the date and time of FP_LOCK PICKUP When Relay Word bit PB02 is deassert...

Page 540: ...C 25AX1 25AX2 The relay triggers a SYN report for every synchronism check supervised close regardless of which synchronism check outputs 25C 25AX1 or 25AX2 you used to supervise CLOSEX assertion The relay starts the report by recording the time of initiation SER Enter SEL 700G Date 02 24 2010 Time 19 15 40 570 GENERATOR RELAY Time Source External Serial No 000000000000000 FID SEL 700G X134 V0 Z001...

Page 541: ...e when the breaker actually closes TCLOSDX seconds after CLOSEX initiation SYN Report Closure For the vast majority of breaker close operations the breaker will close and the three pole open condition 3POX will deassert If this occurs within about 99 seconds of CLOSEX initiation the relay records the time 3POX deasserted calculates and displays the breaker close time advances the close operation c...

Page 542: ... samples of data each containing the analog and digital information shown in Table 4 97 The resolution and number of pre trigger data samples are defined by settings GSRR and PRESYNC and can be set as necessary Refer to Table 4 96 for details on the settings The report captures frequency speed matching and voltage matching during autosynchronism Refer to Autosynchronism on page 4 173 for a detaile...

Page 543: ... of known accuracy The METER command is available at the serial ports and front panel display See Section 7 Communications and Section 8 Front Panel Operations The relay generates a 15 64 or 180 cycle event report in response to faults or disturbances Each report contains current and voltage information relay element states and input output contact information If you question the relay response or...

Page 544: ... System Software GND GND GND GND GND GND GND o o o o o o o o o o o o o o IAX IBX ICX VAX VBX VCX IN 4 ACI 3 AVI Card GND GND GND GND GND GND GND o o o o o o o o o o o o o o IN 1 ACI Card GND GND GND GND GND GND GND o o o o o o o o o o o o o o IAY IBY ICY VAY VBY VCY VS 3 ACI 4 AVI Card GND GND GND GND GND GND GND o o o o o o o o o o o o o o IAY IBY ICY VN VS 3 ACI 2 AVI Card GND GND GND GND GND GN...

Page 545: ...00G Connector AMS CH Z IAX A 1 C 1 C 1 C IBX 2 2 2 1 ICX 3 3 3 2 VAX 4 4 4 3 VBX 5 5 5 4 VCX 6 6 6 5 IN 7 6 E IAY B 8 D D 7 D 7 IBY 9 7 8 8 ICY 10 8 9 9 VAY 11 9 10 10 VBY 12 10 11 11 VCY or VN 11 12 12 VS 12 a Only the commonly used connection options are shown additional connections are possible b All possible signals are shown available signals depend on the card type plugged into the slot see ...

Page 546: ...shown in Figure 10 1 and Figure 10 2 for example ribbon cable C700G connector of SEL RTS Test System Step 5 Insert the 4 ACI 3 AVI 1 ACI or 3 ACI board back into its Slot Z Step 6 Remove the 3 ACI 4 AVI 2 AVI 3 ACI or 3 ACI 2 AVI board board from Slot E Step 7 Locate jumper assembly J3 and change it from CT normal position to AMS low level test position as described in Step 3 VAY J2 on Slot E card...

Page 547: ...re that you receive a relay that operates correctly and accurately Commissioning tests confirm that the relay control signal inputs and control outputs are properly connected The following connection tests help you enter settings into the SEL 700G and verify that the relay is properly connected Brief functional tests ensure that the relay settings are correct It is unnecessary to test every elemen...

Page 548: ...T P SET G SET L and SET R serial port commands enter the relay settings from the settings sheets for your application If you are connecting an external SEL 2600 RTD Module or SEL 2664 Field Ground Module follow the substeps below otherwise continue with Step 9 a Connect the fiber optic cable to the RTD module or field ground module fiber optic output b Plug the relay end of the fiber optic cable i...

Page 549: ...y is measuring the magnitude and phase angle of both voltage and current correctly taking into account the relay PTRX PTRY PTRS 120 120 VC VB VC VA PHROT ABC 120 120 PHROT ACB VB VA When setting PHROT ABC set angle VA angle IA 0 set angle VB angle IB 120 set angle VC angle IC 120 When setting PHROT ACB set angle VA angle IA 0 set angle VB angle IB 120 set angle VC angle IC 120 60 VAB VCB PHROT ABC...

Page 550: ...OUT101 1 causes the output OUT101 contact to close b Repeat the process for all contact outputs Make sure that each contact closure does what you want it to do in the annunciation control or trip circuit associated with that contact closure Step 16 Perform the protection element tests you want Perform only enough tests to prove that the relay operates as intended exhaustive element performance tes...

Page 551: ...nt source to the relay as shown in Figure 10 5 Figure 10 5 CTRX Current Source Connections Step 2 Using the front panel SET SHOW or the serial port SHO command record the CTRX and PHROT setting values Step 3 Set the phase current angles to apply balanced three phase currents in accordance with the PHROT setting Refer to Figure 10 3 Step 4 Set each phase current magnitude equal to the values listed...

Page 552: ... to the relay as shown in Figure 10 7 Make sure that DELTAY_m WYE m X or Y Figure 10 7 Wye Voltage Source Connections Step 3 Using the front panel SET SHOW or the serial port SHOW command record the CTRm PTRm and PHROT setting values Table 10 5 CTRY Phase Current Measuring Accuracya a The displayed quantities are model dependent I Applied A secondary b b IYNOM rated secondary amps 1 or 5 Expected ...

Page 553: ... 8 Delta Voltage Source Connections Step 3 Using the front panel SET SHOW or the serial port SHOW command record the CTRm PTRm and PHROT setting values Table 10 6 Power Quantity Accuracy Wye Voltagesa Applied Currents and Voltagesb Real Power kW Reactive Power kVAR Power Factor pf PHROT ABC IAm 2 5 IBm 2 5 146 ICm 2 5 94 Expected 3Pm 3 2 5 67 0 899 CTRm PTRm 1000 Expected 3Qm 3 2 5 67 0 438 CTRm P...

Page 554: ... 120 0 899 CTRm PTRm 1000 Expected 3Qm 1 732 2 5 120 0 438 CTRm PTRm 1000 Expected pf 0 90 lag VABm 120 30 VBCm 120 90 Measured Measured Measured PHROT ACB IAm 2 5 26 IBm 2 5 94 ICm 2 5 146 Expected 3Pm 1 732 2 5 120 0 899 CTRm PTRm 1000 Expected 3Qm 1 732 2 5 120 0 438 CTRm PTRm 1000 Expected pf 0 90 lag VABm 120 30 VBCm 120 90 Measured Measured Measured a The displayed quantities are model depen...

Page 555: ...UTO Y The relay displays failure messages on the relay LCD display for failures For certain failures the relay will automatically restart as many as three times In many instances this will correct the failure The failure message might not be fully displayed before automatic restart occurs Indication that the relay restarted will be recorded in the Sequential Events Recorder SER Use the serial port...

Page 556: ...us Fail CR_RAM Failure Automatic restarta Critical RAM run time Verify instruction matches FLASH image Yes Latched Yes Status Fail CR_RAM Failure Automatic restarta I O Board Failure Check if ID register matches part number Yes Latched Yes Status Fail Card C D E Failure DeviceNet Board Failure DeviceNet card does not respond in three consecutive 300 ms time out periods NA NA NA COMMFLT Warning Slo...

Page 557: ...power supply 1 16 to 1 34 V Yes Latched Yes Status Fail 1 25 V Failure 5 V Fail Monitor 5 V power supply 4 65 to 5 35 V Yes Latched Yes Status Fail 5 V Failure Clock Battery Monitor Clock Battery 2 3 to 3 5 V No Not Latched Yes NA STA C to clear the warning in the status report Contact SEL if failure returns Clock Chip Unable to communicate with clock or fails time keeping test No Not Latched Yes ...

Page 558: ...he ESC pushbutton to activate the display The relay is de energized Verify input power and fuse continuity The relay does not accurately measure voltages or currents Wiring error Verify input wiring Incorrect PTRX PTRY PTRS PTRN CTRX CTRY or CTRN setting Verify instrument transformer ratios connections and associated settings Voltage neutral terminal N is not properly grounded Verify wiring and co...

Page 559: ...nce Technical Assistance We appreciate your interest in SEL products and services If you have questions or comments please contact us at Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories Inc 2350 NE Hopkins Court Pullman WA 99163 5603 U S A Tel 1 509 338 3838 Fax 1 509 332 7990 Internet selinc com Email info selinc com ...

Page 560: ...This page intentionally left blank ...

Page 561: ...lues for the voltages Resolved a relay disabling issue when the setting EPMU was set to Y and there was a corrupt IRIG signal Increased the upper limit for the auto derived value AO87P2 from 2 TAP to 3 TAP when O87P2 is set to AUTO Resolved an issue with the operation of the load encroach ment function on the Y side in the SEL 700GT model in the presence of both X side and Y side signals 20160831 ...

Page 562: ...tings from 0 1 to 0 02 to allow finer fre quency and voltage control pulses in the autosynchronizer function Revised the firmware to allow the user to set up to two backup elements The revised EBUP setting range allows the user to choose distance DC and voltage restraint V or distance DC and voltage controlled C overcurrent elements Revised the firmware for Trip Logic such that RSTTRGT is processe...

Page 563: ...ue with validating the IPADDR SUBNETM DEFRTR and other IP address and port num ber settings of enabled protocols Revised the firmware to allow anonymous TCP connection from DNP masters when DNPIPx is set to 0 0 0 0 Resolved an issue with settings change STSET being reported as OFFLINE via DNP Resolved an issue with the DNP Binary Outputs so that they are no longer reported as OFFLINE when the Bina...

Page 564: ...ting AOx0yH 20111130 SEL 700G R104 V0 Z002002 D20111007 Added support for Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP to Ethernet port Port 1 including new settings Added new settings for time and date management includ ing daylight saving time under Global Settings Enhanced the firmware to make the serial number visible to the IEC 61850 protocol and revised the ICD file to add serial and part number inform...

Page 565: ...00GW and SEL 700GT models These equations were being processed instead of being disabled which affected the TRIP LED target Corrected the issue R102 only with inverse time overcur rent elements did not accumulate time correctly for FNOM 50 Hz nominal frequency times were about 20 faster Corrected the issue with TCU alarm function when set to OFF The relay was still processing and issuing an alarm ...

Page 566: ...together on the SEL 700G Product Literature CD SEL xxxRxxx EXE The file can also be downloaded from the SEL website at selinc com Table A 3 lists the compatibility among the EDS files and the various firmware versions of the relay Table A 2 DeviceNet Card Versions DeviceNet Card Software Version Revisions Release Date Major Rev 1 Minor Rev 5 Rev 1 005 Reads product code DeviceNet card parameter de...

Page 567: ...n of modifications and the instruction manual date code that corresponds to the versions The most recent version is listed first NOTE The Z number representation is implemented with ICD File Revision R202 Previous ICD File Revisions do not provide an informative Z number Table A 4 SEL 700G ICD Revision History Sheet 1 of 3 configVersion Summary of Revisions Relay Firmware Compatibility ClassFile V...

Page 568: ...PFRC2 RYPFRC3 RX1PFRC4 RX2PFRC5 RX3PFRC6 RX4PFRC7 RY1PFRC8 RY2PFRC9 RY3PFRC10 RY4PFRC11 BXRBRF1 and BYRBRF2 Logical Nodes and attributes to PRO LDevice Added new RMSXMMXU3 and RMSYMMXU4 Logical Nodes and attributes to MET LDevice Added new SYNGGIO24 GENGGIO25 and MISCGGIO26 Logical Nodes and attributes to ANN LDevice Added new BWXASCBR1 BWXBSCBR2 BWXCSCBR3 BWYASCBR1 BWYBSCBR2 and BWYCSCBR3 Logical...

Page 569: ...R103 003b 700G Standard 1 1 90 0 and higher 20100416 a ICD files with ClassFileVersion 004 require R104 or higher firmware and do not work with R100 R103 firmware b ICD files with ClassFileVersion 003 can also be used with R104 or higher firmware with IEC 61850 device library 004 Architect will convert the ICD file to ClassFileVersion 004 and send to the relay Table A 4 SEL 700G ICD Revision Histo...

Page 570: ...tion of Generator and Prime Mover and Field Ground Protection of Generator Section 3 Updated Text Files and Event Waveforms Section 4 Updated Figure 4 12 AO87P2 Logic Updated Distance Elements and Recommendations in System Backup Protection Updated Volts Per Hertz Elements Updated Figure 4 84 Direction Forward Reverse Logic for Neutral Ground Overcurrent Elements Added a note to Figure 4 87 Positi...

Page 571: ...ime Quality 20160224 Preface Updated the General Safety Marks and Other Safety Marks tables Updated Compliance Approvals Added Trademarks Updated Wire Sizes and Insulation Section 1 Updated Accessories Updated Compliance Updated AC Current Input AC Voltage Inputs Output Contacts and Communications Ports Updated Harmonics and Distance Element 21 Section 2 Updated Analog Input Card Voltage Current J...

Page 572: ...n Operators Added a note on fast hybrid contacts to Output Contacts Updated Table 4 75 Ethernet Port Settings Settings Sheets Updated SEL 700G Settings Sheets Section 7 Updated Failover Mode and NETPORT Selection Added a note for serial communications cable designations when using MIRRORED BITS communications to Port Connector and Communications Cables Updated COMMUNICATIONS Command Added a note f...

Page 573: ...nt and Figure 4 126 Trip Logic Updated Table 4 3 Differential Element Settings Table 4 8 Compensator Distance Protection Settings Table 4 9 Voltage Controlled Restraint Time OC Protection Settings Table 4 49 Autosynchronism Settings Table 4 57 SELOGIC Variable Settings and Table 4 61 General Global Settings Updated CTC 10 matrix in The Complete List of Compensation Matrices m 1 12 Section 5 Added ...

Page 574: ... fail safe option should not be used for fast hybrid output contacts in fail safe nonfail safe tripping Section 4 Updated Figure 4 14 REF Protection Output Extremely Inverse Time O C Figure 4 110 Simplified Block Diagram Frequency and Phase Matching and Figure 4 111 Simplified Block Diagram Voltage Matching Elements Added Figure 4 20 Phase to Phase Distance Element Operating Characteristics Revise...

Page 575: ...mation to the Specifications Added Synchrophasor Accuracy to the Specifications Added open state leakage current for Fast Hybrid contacts to the Specifications Section 2 Revised the Table 2 18 Jumper Functions and Default Positions footnote to clarify the impact of the jumper position on breaker control Section 4 Added a note for the CTCX setting under Example of Setting the SEL 700G Relay Unit Di...

Page 576: ...e list of protocols In Specifications revised the Low Voltage Supply range and the Control Inputs voltage ranges Section 2 Updated Figure 2 15 Voltage Connections to show connections for 3V0 input channel Added Figure 2 24 SEL 700G1 Relay AC Connection Example Multiple High Impedance Grounded Generators Connected Directly to a Common Bus With 67N and Other Protection and text for SEL 700G1 applica...

Page 577: ...description and connection diagram Updated Figure 2 22 SEL 700G1 Relay Typical AC Current and Four Wire Wye Voltage Connection With MOT SEL 0700G11A2XBA76850231 Section 4 Added Generator Differential Protection example Corrected graph in Figure 4 36 Volts Hertz Inverse Time Characteristic 24IC 2 Created separate logic diagram figures for Load Encroachment elements for X side and Y side Figure 4 81...

Page 578: ...This page intentionally left blank ...

Page 579: ...he relay via the front panel serial port via ACSELERATOR QuickSet SEL 5030 Software or terminal emulator as outlined in the following sections For relays with IEC 61850 option verify IEC 61850 protocol after the upgrade see Relays With IEC 61850 Option Required Equipment Gather the following equipment before starting this firmware upgrade Personal computer PC Terminal emulation software that suppo...

Page 580: ...vice Refer to Section 3 PC Software for setup and connection procedures for QuickSet NOTE The firmware loader is not supported on Ethernet port connections Firmware Loader will not start if The device is unsupported by QuickSet The device is not connected to the computer with a communications cable The device is disabled Step 1 Prepare the device a Select the firmware to be loaded using the browse...

Page 581: ... window shows the transfer progress of the settings file Clicking Cancel will stop the transfer After the device settings are downloaded select a file name and path to save the settings or accept the default as shown d Click Return to Firmware Loader if this product does not have any event reports If there are any event reports to be saved click the Get Selected Event button after selecting the ev...

Page 582: ...e Upgrade Instructions Upgrade Firmware Using ACSELERATOR QuickSet Step 2 Transfer Firmware Click Next to begin the firmware transfer Step 3 Load Firmware During this step the device is put in SELBOOT The transfer speed is maximized and the firmware transfer begins ...

Page 583: ...S command If the STATUS report shows option card FAIL and Relay Disabled and the message Confirm Hardware Config Accept Reboot Y N Enter Y This will save the relay calibration settings The relay will respond Config Accepted The relay will reboot and come up ENABLED Step 4 Verify Device Four verification options are provided and when enabled these options perform as follows Test Device Communicatio...

Page 584: ...ecord all the settings for possible re entry after the firmware upgrade c We recommend that you save all stored data in the relay including EVENTS before the upgrade Step 4 Start upgrading of firmware a Issue the L_D command to the relay b Type Y Enter at the following prompt Disable relay to receive firmware Y N c Type Y Enter at the following prompt Are you sure Y N The relay will send the promp...

Page 585: ...r Access Level 2 by issuing the 2AC command c Issue the R_S command to restore the factory default settings The relay will then reboot with the factory default settings d Enter Access Level 2 e Issue the STATUS command If the relay is ENABLED go to Step f If the STATUS report shows option card FAIL and Relay Disabled and the message Confirm Hardware Config Accept Reboot Y N Enter Y This will save ...

Page 586: ...to Step 3 if ERR TXT is empty If the ERR TXT file contains error messages relating to CID file parsing the relay has disabled the IEC 61850 protocol Use ACSELERATOR Architect SEL 5032 Software to convert the existing CID file and make it compatible again a Install the ACSELERATOR Architect software upgrade that supports your required CID file version b Run ACSELERATOR Architect and open the projec...

Page 587: ... Technical Assistance We appreciate your interest in SEL products and services If you have questions or comments please contact us at Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories Inc 2350 NE Hopkins Court Pullman WA 99163 5603 U S A Telephone 1 509 338 3838 Fax 1 509 332 7990 Internet selinc com Email info selinc com ...

Page 588: ...This page intentionally left blank ...

Page 589: ... all of the bytes that precede the checksum field in the message The program that uses the data can detect transmission errors in the message by summing the characters of the received message and comparing this sum to the received checksum Most commands are available only in SEL ASCII or Compressed ASCII format Selected commands have versions in both standard SEL ASCII and Compressed ASCII formats...

Page 590: ...using a single data stream and SEL Compressed ASCII and binary messages In subsequent operations the SEL communications processor uses the binary data stream for Fast Meter and Fast Operate messages to populate a local database and to perform SCADA operations At the same time you can use the binary data stream to connect transparently to the SEL 700G and use the ASCII data stream for commands and ...

Page 591: ...to databases for SCADA HMI and other data consumers Access to the IEDs for engineering functions including configuration report data retrieval and control through local serial remote dial in and Ethernet network connections Distribution of IRIG B time synchronization signal to IEDs based on external IRIG B input internal clock or protocol interface Simultaneous collection of SCADA data and enginee...

Page 592: ...han programming in C or another general purpose computer language SEL communications processors offer the protocol interfaces listed in Table C 3 Table C 3 SEL Communications Processors Protocol Interfaces Protocol Connect to DNP3 Level 2 Slave DNP3 masters Modbus RTU Protocol Modbus masters SEL ASCII Fast Message Slave SEL protocol masters SEL ASCII Fast Message Master SEL protocol slaves includi...

Page 593: ...tion data from a communications processor than for many conversations necessary to collect data directly from each individual IED You can further reduce data latency by connecting any SEL communications processor directly to the SCADA master and eliminating redundant communications processing in the RTU The SEL communications processor is responsible for the protocol interface so you can install t...

Page 594: ...uman Machine Interface Figure C 3 Enhancing Multidrop Networks With SEL Communications Processors In this example the SEL communications processor provides the following enhancements when compared to a system that employs only the multidrop network Ethernet access for IEDs with serial ports Backup engineering access through the dial in modem IRIG B time signal distribution to all station IEDs Inte...

Page 595: ...s processor Table C 4 SEL Communications Processor Port 1 Settings Setting Name Setting Description DEVICE S Connected device is an SEL device CONFIG Y Allow autoconfiguration for this device PORTID Relay 1 Name of connected relaya a Automatically collected by the SEL communications processor during autoconfiguration BAUD 19200 Channel speed of 19200 bits per seconda DATABIT 8 Eight data bitsa STO...

Page 596: ...nications Processor Port 1 Automatic Messaging Settings Setting Name Setting Description AUTOBUF Y Save unsolicited messages STARTUP ACC nOTTER n Automatically log in at Access Level 1 SEND_OPER Y Send Fast Operate messages for remote bit and breaker bit control REC_SER N Automatic sequential event recorder data collection disabled NOCONN NA No SELOGIC control equation entered to selectively block...

Page 597: ...ications Processor METER Region Map for GW Model Item Starting Address Type _YEAR 2000h int DAY_OF_YEAR 2001h int TIME ms 2002h int 2 MONTH 2004h char DATE 2005h char YEAR 2006h char HOUR 2007h char MIN 2008h char SECONDS 2009h char MSEC 200Ah int IAX 200Bh float IBX 200Dh float ICX 200Fh float IAY 2011h float IBY 2013h float ICY 2015h float FREQX 2017h float FREQY 2019h float Table C 9 Communicat...

Page 598: ...pe _YEAR 2000h int DAY_OF_YEAR 2001h int TIME ms 2002h int 2 MONTH 2004h char DATE 2005h char YEAR 2006h char HOUR 2007h char MIN 2008h char SECONDS 2009h char MSEC 200Ah int IAX 200Bh float IBX 200Dh float ICX 200Fh float VAX wye or VABX delta 2011h float VBX wye or VBCX delta 2013h float VCX wye or VCAX delta 2015h float VS 2017h float P3X 2019h float Q3X 201Bh float S3X 201Dh float FREQX 201Fh ...

Page 599: ...00Bh float IBX 200Dh float ICX 200Fh float IAY 2011h float IBY 2013h float ICY 2015h float VAX wye or VABX delta 2017h float VBX wye or VBCX delta 2019h float VCX wye or VCAX delta 201Bh float P3X 201Dh float Q3X 201Fh float S3X 2021h float FREQX 2023h float Table C 12 Communications Processor METER Region Map for G1 Model With Synchronism Sheet 1 of 2 Item Starting Address Type _YEAR 2000h int DA...

Page 600: ...sor METER Region Map for GT Model With Single Synchronism Item Starting Address Type _YEAR 2000h int DAY_OF_YEAR 2001h int TIME ms 2002h int 2 MONTH 2004h char DATE 2005h char YEAR 2006h char HOUR 2007h char MIN 2008h char SECONDS 2009h char MSEC 200Ah int IAY 200Bh float IBY 200Dh float ICY 200Fh float VAY wye or VABY delta 2011h float VBY wye or VBCY delta 2013h float VCY wye or VCAY delta 2015h...

Page 601: ...har HOUR 2007h char MIN 2008h char SECONDS 2009h char MSEC 200Ah int IAX 200Bh float IBX 200Dh float ICX 200Fh float IAY 2011h float IBY 2013h float ICY 2015h float VAX wye or VABX delta 2017h float VBX wye or VBCX delta 2019h float VCX wye or VCAX delta 201Bh float VAY wye or VABY delta 201Dh float VBY wye or VBCY delta 201Fh float VCY wye or VCAY delta 2021h float VS 2023h float P3X 2025h float ...

Page 602: ...ocessor it automatically sets RB01 in the SEL 700G Breaker bits BR1 and BR2 operate differently from remote bits There are two breaker bits in the SEL 700G For Circuit Breaker n when you set BRn the SEL communications processor sends a message to the SEL 700G that asserts the OCn bit for one processing interval If you clear BRn the SEL communications processor sends a message to the SEL 700G that ...

Page 603: ...oint number Table C 16 Communications Processor DEMAND Region Map Item Starting Address Type _YEAR 3000h int DAY_OF_YEAR 3001h int TIME ms 3002h int 2 MONTH 3004h char DATE 3005h char YEAR 3006h char HOUR 3007h char MIN 3008h char SECONDS 3009h char MSEC 300Ah int IAXD A a a If the model doesn t have X side current inputs then the starting address of Y side demand data items are shifted up to wher...

Page 604: ...This page intentionally left blank ...

Page 605: ...and Intelligent Electronic Devices IEDs in a Substation The DNP Users Group maintains and publishes DNP3 standards See the DNP Users Group website dnp org for more information on standards implementers and tools for working with DNP3 DNP3 Specifications DNP3 is a feature rich protocol with many ways to accomplish tasks defined in an eight volume series of specifications Volume 8 of the specificati...

Page 606: ...including collections of data time synchronization or even all data within the DNP3 device If there can be more than one instance of a type of object then each instance of the object includes an index that makes it unique For example each binary status point Object 1 has an index If there are 16 binary status points these points are Object 1 Index 0 through Object 1 Index 15 Each object also inclu...

Page 607: ...ice logs changes that exceed a dead band DNP3 outstation devices collect event data in a buffer that either the master can request or the device can send to the master without a request message Data sent from the outstation to the master without a polling request are called unsolicited data DNP3 data fit into one of four event classes 0 1 2 or 3 Class 0 is reserved for reading the present value da...

Page 608: ...testing while some contract with independent companies to perform conformance testing Conformance testing does not always guarantee that a master and outstation are fully interoperable that is work together properly for all implemented features Conformance testing does help to standardize the testing procedure and move the DNP3 implementers toward a higher level of interpretability DNP3 Serial Net...

Page 609: ...ause a data collision If your serial network allows for spontaneous data transmission including unsolicited event data transmissions you also must use application confirmation to provide a retry mechanism for messages lost because of data collisions DNP3 LAN WAN Overview The main process for carrying DNP3 over an Ethernet Network LAN WAN involves encapsulating the DNP3 data link layer data frames ...

Page 610: ...yte non mesh WAN for example Cellular Digital Packet Data CDPD X Low priority data for example data monitor or configuration information X Table D 5 DNP3 Access Methods Access Method Master Polling SEL 700G Settings Polled static Class 0 Set ECLASSBn ECLASSCn ECLASSAn to 0 UNSOLn to No Polled report by exception Class 0 occasionally Class 1 2 3 frequently Set ECLASSBn ECLASSCn ECLASSAn to the nece...

Page 611: ...EL 700G does not receive an Application Confirm in response to unsolicited data it waits for ETIMEOn seconds and then repeats the unsolicited message To prevent clogging of the network with unsolicited data retries the SEL 700G uses the URETRYn and UTIMEOn settings to increase retry time when the number of retries set in URETRYn is exceeded After URETRYn has been exceeded the SEL 700G pauses UTIME...

Page 612: ... with an event poll message With the event class settings ECLASSBn ECLASSCn and ECLASSAn you can set the event class for binary counter and analog inputs for session n You can use the classes as a simple priority system for collecting event data The SEL 700G does not treat data of different classes differently with respect to message scanning but it does allow the master to perform independent cla...

Page 613: ...st event in the master n buffer exceeds AGEEVEn The SEL 700G has the buffer capacities listed in Table D 6 Binary Controls The SEL 700G provides more than one way to control individual points The SEL 700G maps incoming control points either to remote bits or to internal command bits that cause circuit breaker operations Table D 12 lists control points and control methods available in the SEL 700G ...

Page 614: ...th of time from initiating the call to declaring it failed because of no connection and MDRET sets the time between dial out attempts NOTE RTS CTS hardware flow control is not available for a DNP3 modem connection You must use either X ON X OFF software flow control or set the port data speed slower than the effective data rate of the modem The settings PH_NUM1 and PH_NUM2 must conform to the AT m...

Page 615: ...t to 0 0 32767 100 ANADBM1 Analog reporting dead band for miscellaneous analogs hidden if ECLASSA and ECLASSC set to 0 0 32767 100 TIMERQ1 Time set request interval minutes M Disables time sync requests but still accepts and applies time syncs from Master I Ignores does not apply time syncs from Master I M 1 32767 I STIMEO1 Select operate time out seconds 0 0 30 0 1 0 DNPINA1a Send Data Link Heart...

Page 616: ...Maximum delay from DCD to TX seconds 0 00 1 00 0 10 PREDLYc Settle time from RTS on to TX Off disables PSTDLY OFF 0 00 30 00 0 00 PSTDLYc Settle time from TX to RTS off hidden if PREDLY set to Off 0 00 30 00 0 00 a Available only on Ethernet ports The DNP Master IP Address of each session DNPIP1 DNPIP2 etc must be unique Set DNPIPn 0 0 0 0 to accept connections from any DNP master b If DNPIPn is 0...

Page 617: ...s 1 0 129 0 17 0 227 Device Attributes Support for counter events 1 0 129 0 17 0 228 Device Attributes Max counter index 1 0 129 0 17 0 229 Device Attributes Number of counters 1 0 129 0 17 0 230 Device Attributes Support for frozen analog inputs 1 0 129 0 17 0 231 Device Attributes Support for analog input events 1 0 129 0 17 0 232 Device Attributes Max analog input index 1 0 129 0 17 0 233 Devic...

Page 618: ...3 Binary Input Change With Relative Time 1 6 7 8 129 17 28 10 0 Binary Output All Variations 1 0 1 6 7 8 10 1 Binary Output 10 2e Binary Output Status 1 0 1 6 7 8 129 0 1 12 0 Control Block All Variations 12 1 Control Relay Output Block 3 4 5 6 17 28 129 echo of request 12 2 Pattern Control Block 3 4 5 6 7 129 echo of request 12 3 Pattern Mask 3 4 5 6 0 1 129 echo of request 20 0 Binary Counter Al...

Page 619: ...e 1 6 7 8 129 17 28 22 7 32 Bit Delta Counter Change Event With Time 22 8 16 Bit Delta Counter Change Event With Time 23 0 Frozen Counter Event All Variations 23 1 32 Bit Frozen Counter Event Without Time 23 2 16 Bit Frozen Counter Event Without Time 23 3 32 Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event Without Time 23 4 16 Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event Without Time 23 5 32 Bit Frozen Counter Event With Time 23...

Page 620: ...9 17 28 32f 8 Long Floating Point Analog Change Event With Time 1 6 7 8 129 17 28 33 0 Frozen Analog Event All Variations 33 1 32 Bit Frozen Analog Event Without Time 33 2 16 Bit Frozen Analog Event Without Time 33 3 32 Bit Frozen Analog Event With Time 33 4 16 Bit Frozen Analog Event With Time 33 5 Short Floating Point Frozen Analog Event 33 6 Long Floating Point Frozen Analog Event 33 7 Short Fl...

Page 621: ...1 Time and Date CTO 51 2 Unsynchronized Time and Date CTO 129 07 quantity 1 52 0 Time Delay All Variations 52 1 Time Delay Coarse 52 2 Time Delay Fine 129 07 quantity 1 60 0 All Classes of Data 1 20 21 6 7 8 60 1 Class 0 Data 1 20 21 6 7 8 60 2 Class 1 Data 1 6 7 8 60 3 Class 2 Data 1 20 21 6 7 8 60 4 Class 3 Data 1 20 21 6 7 8 70 1 File Identifier 70 2 Authentication Object 70 3 File Command Obje...

Page 622: ...rtual Terminal Output Block 113 All Virtual Terminal Event Data N A No object required for the following function codes 13 cold start 14 warm start 23 delay measurement 13 14 23 a Supported in requests from master b May generate in response to master c Decimal d Hexadecimal e Default variation f Default variation specified by serial port setting DVARAI or DVARAIn for Ethernet session n n 1 2 or3 T...

Page 623: ... Open Circuit Breaker X command 10 12 CCX Pulse Close Circuit Breaker X command 10 12 OCX CCX Open Close pair for Circuit Breaker X 10 12 OCY Pulse Open Circuit Breaker Y command 10 12 CCY Pulse Close Circuit Breaker Y command 10 12 OCY CCY Open Close pair for Circuit Breaker Y Counters 20 22 SCxx SELOGIC Counter Values xx 01 32 GROUP Active Settings Group Analog Inputs 30 32 34 IAX_MAG SC32b c An...

Page 624: ... 3 4 and 5 If cards are present the SEL 700G adds each analog input point label AIx0y where x is the slot and y is the point number to the default map in numerical order to the DNP map Device Attributes Object 0 Table D 9 includes the supported Object 0 Device Attributes and variations In response to Object 0 requests the SEL 700G sends attributes that apply to that particular DNP3 session Because...

Page 625: ...uested bit Reads from control only binary output points respond with the on line bit set and a state of 0 The SEL 700G supports Control Relay Output Block objects Object 12 Variation 1 The control relays correspond to the remote bits and other functions as shown previously Each DNP Control message contains a Trip Close code TRIP CLOSE or NUL and an Operation type PULSE ON LATCH ON LATCH OFF or NUL...

Page 626: ...in Table D 12 Pulse operations provide a pulse with duration of one protection processing interval Analog Inputs Analog Inputs 30 and Analog Change Events 32 are supported as defined in Table D 9 The default variation for both static and event inputs is defined by the DVARAI1 DVARAIn for DNP3 LAN WAN session n setting Only the Read function code 1 is allowed with these objects Table D 12 SEL 700G ...

Page 627: ...nd check the corresponding magnitude changes beyond its own dead band Analog inputs are scanned at approximately a 1 second rate except for Fault analog inputs below All events generated during a scan use the time the scan was initiated Configurable Data Mapping One of the most powerful features of the SEL 700G implementation is the ability to remap DNP3 data and for analog values specify per poin...

Page 628: ...example of a MAP command that shows the same map as in Figure D 3 SHO DNP 1 Enter DNP Map 1 Settings Binary Input Map BI_00 ENABLED BI_01 TRIP BI_02 TRIPX BI_03 TRIPY BI_97 IN101 BI_98 IN102 BI_99 50PX1P Binary Output Map BO_00 RB01 BO_01 RB02 BO_02 RB03 BO_29 RB30 BO_30 RB31 BO_31 RB32 Analog Input Map AI_00 IAX_MAG AI_01 IBX_MAG AI_02 ICX_MAG AI_95 FREQX AI_96 P3X AI_97 Q3X AI_98 S3X AI_99 PF3X ...

Page 629: ...EL EVENT CLASSDEADBAND 0 SC01 0 1 1 SC02 0 1 2 SC03 0 1 29 SC30 0 1 30 SC31 0 1 31 SC32 0 1 Analog Inputs INDEX POINT LABEL EVENT CLASS SCALE FACTOR DEADBAND 0IAX_MAG 2 10 0000 1000 1 IBX_MAG 2 10 0000 1000 2 ICX_MAG 2 10 0000 1000 3 IAY_MAG 2 10 0000 1000 4 IBY_MAG 2 10 0000 1000 5 ICY_MAG 2 10 0000 1000 6 IGX_MAG 2 10 0000 1000 7 IGY_MAG 2 10 0000 1000 8 IN_MAG 2 10 0000 1000 9 IAVXMAG 2 10 0000...

Page 630: ... ANADBA ANADBV and ANADBM settings are applied to indices that do not have per point entries Unlike per point scaling described previously class level scaling is specified by an integer in the range 0 3 inclusive which indicates the number of decimal place shifts In other words you should select 0 to multiply by 1 1 for 10 2 for 100 or 3 for 1000 If it is important to maintain tight data coherency...

Page 631: ...to select the AI point as shown in Figure D 7 6 X Side AB Phase to Phase Voltage Angle VABX_ANG 1 15 7 X Side Frequency FREQX 01 1 SET DNP 1 AI_00 TERSE Enter Analog Input Map DNP Analog Input Label Name 25 characters AI_00 NA IAX_MAG Enter AI_01 NA IBX_MAG Enter AI_02 NA ICX_MAG Enter AI_03 NA IAY_MAG Enter AI_04 NA P3X 5 Enter AI_05 NA VAX_MAG Enter AI_06 NA VAX_ANG 1 15 Enter AI_07 NA FREQX 01 ...

Page 632: ...SE Enter to change the binary output map x as shown in Figure D 8 You can populate the custom BO map with any of the 32 remote bits RB01 RB32 You can define bit pairs in BO maps by including a colon between the bit labels SET DNP 1 BO_00 TERSE Enter Binary Output Map DNP Binary Output Label Name 23 characters BO_00 NA RB01 Enter DNP Binary Output Label Name 23 characters BO_01 NA RB02 Enter DNP Bi...

Page 633: ...nstruction Manual SEL 700G Relay DNP3 Communications DNP3 Documentation You can also use QuickSet to enter the BO map settings as shown in the screen capture in Figure D 9 Figure D 9 Binary Output Map Entry in QuickSet Software ...

Page 634: ...This page intentionally left blank ...

Page 635: ...itches the port to Modbus RTU protocol and deactivates the ASCII protocol Modbus RTU is a binary protocol that permits communication between a single master device and multiple slave devices The communication is half duplex only one device transmits at a time The master transmits a binary command that includes the address of the necessary slave device All of the slave devices receive the message b...

Page 636: ...the query command for any reason it sends an error response Otherwise the slave device response is formatted similarly to the query and includes the slave address function code data if applicable and a cyclical redundancy check value Supported Modbus Function Codes The SEL 700G supports the Modbus function codes shown in Table E 2 Table E 2 SEL 700G Modbus Function Codes Codes Description 01h Read...

Page 637: ...atus of as many as 2000 bits per query using the fields shown in Table E 4 Note that the SEL 700G coil addresses start at 0 for example Coil 1 is located at address zero The coil status is packed one coil per bit of the data field The Least Significant Bit LSB of the first data byte contains the starting coil address in the query The other coils follow towards the high order end of this byte and f...

Page 638: ... one input per bit of the data field The LSB of the first data byte contains the starting input address in the query The other inputs follow towards the high order end of this byte and from low order to high order in subsequent bytes A successful response from the slave will have the following format 1 byte Slave Address 1 byte Function Code 01h 1 byte Bytes of data n n bytes Data 2 bytes CRC 16 T...

Page 639: ... Status Row 1 16 23 2 Relay Element Status Row 2 24 31 2 Relay Element Status Row 3 32 39 2 Relay Element Status Row 4 40 47 2 Relay Element Status Row 5 48 55 2 Relay Element Status Row 6 56 63 2 Relay Element Status Row 7 64 71 2 Relay Element Status Row 8 72 79 2 Relay Element Status Row 9 80 87 2 Relay Element Status Row 10 88 95 2 Relay Element Status Row 11 96 103 2 Relay Element Status Row ...

Page 640: ...Row 52 424 431 2 Relay Element Status Row 53 432 439 2 Relay Element Status Row 54 440 447 2 Relay Element Status Row 55 448 455 2 Relay Element Status Row 56 456 463 2 Relay Element Status Row 57 464 471 2 Relay Element Status Row 58 472 479 2 Relay Element Status Row 59 480 487 2 Relay Element Status Row 60 488 495 2 Relay Element Status Row 61 496 503 2 Relay Element Status Row 62 504 511 2 Rel...

Page 641: ... 775 2 Relay Element Status Row 96 776 783 2 Relay Element Status Row 97 784 791 2 Relay Element Status Row 98 792 799 2 Relay Element Status Row 99 800 807 2 Relay Element Status Row 100 808 815 2 Relay Element Status Row 101 816 823 2 Relay Element Status Row 102 824 831 2 Relay Element Status Row 103 832 839 2 Relay Element Status Row 104 840 847 2 Relay Element Status Row 105 848 855 2 Relay E...

Page 642: ...lement Status Row 137 1104 1111 2 Relay Element Status Row 138 1112 1119 2 Relay Element Status Row 139 1120 1127 2 Relay Element Status Row 140 1128 1135 2 Relay Element Status Row 141 1136 1143 2 Relay Element Status Row 142 1144 1151 2 Relay Element Status Row 143 1152 1159 2 Relay Element Status Row 144 1160 1167 2 Relay Element Status Row 145 1168 1175 2 Relay Element Status Row 146 1176 1183...

Page 643: ...is function code for five digit addressing add 30001 to the standard database address Table E 8 Responses to 02h Read Input Query Errors Error Error Code Returned Communications Counter Increments Invalid bit to read Illegal Data Address 02h Invalid Address Invalid number of bits to read Illegal Data Value 03h Illegal Register Format error Illegal Data Value 03h Bad Packet Format Table E 9 03h Rea...

Page 644: ... A successful response from the slave will have the following format 1 byte Slave Address 1 byte Function Code 04h 1 byte Bytes of data n n bytes Data 2 250 2 bytes CRC 16 Table E 12 Responses to 04h Read Input Register Query Errors Error Error Code Returned Communications Counter Increments Illegal register to read Illegal Data Address 02h Invalid Address Illegal number of registers to read Illeg...

Page 645: ...e OUT406 1 second 17 01 05 Pulse OUT407 1 second 18 01 05 Pulse OUT408 1 second 19 01 05 Pulse OUT501 1 second 20 01 05 Pulse OUT502 1 second 21 01 05 Pulse OUT503 1 second 22 01 05 Pulse OUT504 1 second 23 01 05 Pulse OUT505 1 second 24 01 05 Pulse OUT506 1 second 25 01 05 Pulse OUT507 1 second 26 01 05 Pulse OUT508 1 second 27 01 05 RB01 28 01 05 RB02 29 01 05 RB03 30 01 05 RB04 31 01 05 RB05 32...

Page 646: ...3 01 05 Pulse RB05a 64 01 05 Pulse RB06a 65 01 05 Pulse RB07a 66 01 05 Pulse RB08a 67 01 05 Pulse RB09a 68 01 05 Pulse RB10a 69 01 05 Pulse RB11a 70 01 05 Pulse RB12a 71 01 05 Pulse RB13a 72 01 05 Pulse RB14a 73 01 05 Pulse RB15a 74 01 05 Pulse RB16a 75 01 05 Pulse RB17a 76 01 05 Pulse RB18a 77 01 05 Pulse RB19a 78 01 05 Pulse RB20a 79 01 05 Pulse RB21a 80 01 05 Pulse RB22a 81 01 05 Pulse RB23a 82...

Page 647: ... RB29a 88 01 05 Pulse RB30a 89 01 05 Pulse RB31a 90 01 05 Pulse RB32a a Pulsing a Set remote bit causes the remote bit to be cleared at the end of the pulse 1 SELOGIC Processing Interval Table E 15 Responses to 05h Force Single Coil Query Errors Error Error Code Returned Communications Counter Increments Invalid bit coil Illegal Data Address 02h Invalid Address Invalid bit state requested Illegal ...

Page 648: ...ve the following format 1 byte Slave Address 1 byte Function Code 08h 2 bytes Subfunction 0000h 2 bytes Data Field 2 bytes CRC 16 A successful response from the slave will have the following format 1 byte Slave Address 1 byte Function Code 08h 2 bytes Subfunction 0000h 2 bytes Data Field identical to data in Master request 2 bytes CRC 16 Table E 19 Responses to 08h Loopback Diagnostic Query Errors...

Page 649: ...e Incorrect number of bytes in query data region Illegal Data Value 03h Bad Packet Format Illegal Write Invalid register data value Illegal Data Value 03h Illegal Write Table E 20 10h Preset Multiple Registers Command Sheet 2 of 2 Bytes Field Table E 22 60h Read Parameter Information Command Bytes Field Queries from the master must have the following format 1 byte Slave Address 1 byte Function Cod...

Page 650: ...g change requires a power cycle or reset 6 0 Reserved 7 Extend Reserved to extend the descriptor table Table E 24 60h Read Parameter Conversion Field Definition Conversion Value Type Multiplier Divisor Offset Base 0 Boolean 1 1 0 1 1 Unsigned Integer 1 1 0 1 2 Unsigned Integer 1 10 0 1 3 Unsigned Integer 1 100 0 1 4 Unsigned Integer 1 1000 0 1 5 Hexadecimal 1 1 0 1 6 Integer 1 1 0 1 7 Integer 1 10...

Page 651: ... 1 byte Function Code 61h 2 bytes Parameter Number 2 bytes CRC 16 A successful response from the slave will have the following format 1 byte Slave Address 1 byte Function Code 61h 2 bytes Parameter Number 16 bytes Parameter Text setting name 4 bytes Parameter Units for example Amps 2 bytes CRC 16 Table E 27 61h Read Parameter Text Query Error Messages Error Error Code Returned Communications Count...

Page 652: ...Field Queries from the master must have the following format 1 byte Slave Address 1 byte Function Code 7Dh 2 bytes Control Command same as write to 2000h 1 byte Embedded Modbus Function n bytes Optional Data to Support Modbus Function 0 250 2 bytes CRC 16 A successful response from the slave will have the following format 1 byte Slave Address 1 byte Function Code 7Dh 2 bytes Status Information Reg...

Page 653: ... to reflect the state you want for each of the outputs User Defined Modbus Data Region and SET M Command The SEL 700G Modbus Register Map defines an area of 125 contiguous addresses whose contents are defined by 125 user settable addresses This feature allows you to take 125 discrete values from anywhere in the Modbus Register Map and place them in contiguous registers that you can then read in a ...

Page 654: ... 342 VGX_MAG 343 VGX_ANG 344 3V2X_MAG 345 V1X_MAG 346 PAXH 347 PAXL 348 PBXH 349 PBXL 350 PCXH 351 PCXL 352 P3XH 353 P3XL 354 QAXH 355 QAXL 356 QBXH 357 QBXL 358 QCXH Register Address Label 359 QCXL 360 Q3XH 361 Q3XL 362 SAXH 363 SAXL 364 SBXH 365 SBXL 366 SCXH 367 SCXL 368 S3XH 369 S3XL 370 PFAX 371 PFBX 372 PFCX 373 PF3X 374 FREQX 375 VHZX 376 RES_376 377 RES_377 378 RES_378 379 RES_379 380 RES_...

Page 655: ... 521 VBXRMS 522 VCXRMS 523 VABXRMS 524 VBCXRMS 525 VCAXRMS 526 VAYRMS 527 VBYRMS 528 VCYRMS 529 VABYRMS 530 VBCYRMS 531 VCAYRMS 532 INRMS 533 VSRMS 534 IAXMX Register Address Label 535 IAXMN 536 IBXMX 537 IBXMN 538 ICXMX 539 ICXMN 540 IGXMX 541 IGXMN 542 IAYMX 543 IAYMN 544 IBYMX 545 IBYMN 546 ICYMX 547 ICYMN 548 IGYMX 549 IGYMN 550 INMX 551 INMN 552 VABXMX 553 VABXMN 554 VBCXMX 555 VBCXMN 556 VCA...

Page 656: ...84 AI302H 685 AI302L 686 AI303H 687 AI303L 688 AI304H 689 AI304L 690 AI401H 691 AI401L 692 AI402H 693 AI402L 694 AI403H 695 AI403L 696 AI404H 697 AI404L 698 AI501H 699 AI501L 700 AI502H 701 AI502L 702 AI503H 703 AI503L 704 AI504H 705 AI504L 706 MV01H 707 MV01L 708 MV02H 709 MV02L 710 MV03H Register Address Label 711 MV03L 712 MV04H 713 MV04L 714 MV05H 715 MV05L 716 MV06H 717 MV06L 718 MV07H 719 MV...

Page 657: ...IBX 869 INTICX 870 EXTIAX 871 EXTIBX 872 EXTICX 873 WEARAX 874 WEARBX 875 WEARCX 876 BM_R_SX 877 BM_R_MNX 878 BM_R_HX 879 BM_R_DX 880 BM_R_MOX 881 BM_R_YX 882 INTTY 883 EXTTY 884 INTIAY 885 INTIBY 886 INTICY Register Address Label 887 EXTIAY 888 EXTIBY 889 EXTICY 890 WEARAY 891 WEARBY 892 WEARCY 893 BM_R_SY 894 BM_R_MNY 895 BM_R_HY 896 BM_R_DY 897 BM_R_MOY 898 BM_R_YY 899 RES_899 900 RES_900 901 T...

Page 658: ...ROW_67 1039 ROW_68 1040 ROW_69 1041 ROW_70 1042 ROW_71 1043 ROW_72 1044 ROW_73 1045 ROW_74 1046 ROW_75 1047 ROW_76 1048 ROW_77 1049 ROW_78 1050 ROW_79 1051 ROW_80 1052 ROW_81 1053 ROW_82 1054 ROW_83 1055 ROW_84 1056 ROW_85 1057 ROW_86 1058 ROW_87 1059 ROW_88 1060 ROW_89 1061 ROW_90 1062 ROW_91 Register Address Label 1063 ROW_92 1064 ROW_93 1065 ROW_94 1066 ROW_95 1067 ROW_96 1068 ROW_97 1069 ROW_9...

Page 659: ... write to the EVENT LOG SEL register the event data registers will stay frozen with that specific event history These registers will return to the free running latest event history data mode when a zero is written to the event selection register from a prior nonzero selection Modbus Register Map Instruction Manual Table E 34 lists the data available in the Modbus interface and a data description r...

Page 660: ... 275 R ROM STATUS 0 2 0 375 276 R CR_RAM STATUS 0 2 0 376 277 R NON_VOL STATUS 0 2 0 377 278 R CLOCK STATUS 0 2 0 378 279 R CID FILE STATUS 0 2 0 379 280 R RTD STATUS 0 2 0 380 281 R 3 3V STATUS 0 2 0 381 282 R 5 0V STATUS 0 2 0 382 283 R 2 5V STATUS 0 2 0 383 284 R 3 75V STATUS 0 2 0 384 285 R 1 25V STATUS 0 2 0 385 286 R 5 0V STATUS 0 2 0 386 287 R 0 9V STATUS 0 2 0 387 288 R 1 2V STATUS 0 2 0 3...

Page 661: ... 1 422 323 R IBX ANGLE deg 1800 1800 0 0 1 423 324 R ICX CURRENT A 0 65535 0 1 424 325 R ICX ANGLE deg 1800 1800 0 0 1 425 326 R IGX CURRENT A 0 65535 0 1 426 327 R IGX ANGLE deg 1800 1800 0 0 1 427 328 R 3I2X NSEQ CURR A 0 65535 0 1 428 329 R I1X PSEQ CURR A 0 65535 0 1 429 X Side Voltage Data 330 R VABX kV 0 65535 0 0 01 430 331 R VABX ANGLE deg 1800 1800 0 0 1 431 332 R VBCX kV 0 65535 0 0 01 4...

Page 662: ...Id kVA 32768 32767 0 1 462 363 R SAX APPRNT PWRLOd kVA 32768 32767 0 1 463 364 R SBX APPRNT PWRHId kVA 32768 32767 0 1 464 365 R SBX APPRNT PWRLOd kVA 32768 32767 0 1 465 366 R SCX APPRNT PWRHId kVA 32768 32767 0 1 466 367 R SCX APPRNT PWRLOd kVA 32768 32767 0 1 467 368 R S3X APPRNT PWRHId kVA 32768 32767 0 1 468 369 R S3X APPRNT PWRLOd kVA 32768 32767 0 1 469 370 R PFAX PWR FACTOR 100 100 0 0 01 ...

Page 663: ... ANGLE deg 1800 1800 0 0 1 510 411 R VN kV 0 65535 0 0 01 511 412 R VN ANGLE deg 1800 1800 0 0 1 512 413 R VN3 V 0 65535 0 1 513 414 R VPX3 V 0 65535 0 1 514 415 R FIELD GROUND RES kilohm 0 65535 0 1 515 FFFFh Comm Fail or E64F N 416 R BUS FREQUENCY Hz 0 65535 6000 0 01 516 417 422 R Reservedc 0 0 0 517 522 Energy Data 423 R MWHPX HId MWhr 0 65535 0 0 001 523 424 R MWHPX LOd MWhr 0 65535 0 0 001 5...

Page 664: ...0 65535 0 1 562 Peak Demand Data 463 R IAX PEAK DEMAND A 0 65535 0 1 563 464 R IBX PEAK DEMAND A 0 65535 0 1 564 465 R ICX PEAK DEMAND A 0 65535 0 1 565 466 R IGX PEAK DEMAND A 0 65535 0 1 566 467 R 3I2X PEAK DEMAND A 0 65535 0 1 567 468 R IAY PEAK DEMAND A 0 65535 0 1 568 469 R IBY PEAK DEMAND A 0 65535 0 1 569 470 R ICY PEAK DEMAND A 0 65535 0 1 570 471 R IGY PEAK DEMAND A 0 65535 0 1 571 472 R ...

Page 665: ... degC 32768 32767 0 1 599 500 R RTD12 degC 32768 32767 0 1 600 501 R GENERATOR TCU 0 100 0 1 601 502 R RTD TCU 0 100 0 1 602 503 R Reservedc 0 0 0 603 Reserved Area 2 504 513 R Reservedc 0 0 0 604 613 RMS Data 514 R IAX RMS A 0 65535 0 1 614 515 R IBX RMS A 0 65535 0 1 615 516 R ICX RMS A 0 65535 0 1 616 517 R IAY RMS A 0 65535 0 1 617 518 R IBY RMS A 0 65535 0 1 618 519 R ICY RMS A 0 65535 0 1 61...

Page 666: ... kV 0 65535 0 0 01 652 553 R VABX VAX MIN kV 0 65535 0 0 01 653 554 R VBCX VBX MAX kV 0 65535 0 0 01 654 555 R VBCX VBX MIN kV 0 65535 0 0 01 655 556 R VCAX VCX MAX kV 0 65535 0 0 01 656 557 R VCAX VCX MIN kV 0 65535 0 0 01 657 558 R VABY VAY MAX kV 0 65535 0 0 01 658 559 R VABY VAY MIN kV 0 65535 0 0 01 659 560 R VBCY VBY MAX kV 0 65535 0 0 01 660 561 R VBCY VBY MIN kV 0 65535 0 0 01 661 562 R VC...

Page 667: ... 594 R KVA3PY MIN HId kVA 32768 32767 0 1 694 595 R KVA3PY MIN LOd kVA 32768 32767 0 1 695 596 R FREQX MAX Hz 0 65535 0 0 01 696 597 R FREQX MIN Hz 0 65535 0 0 01 697 598 R FREQY MAX Hz 0 65535 0 0 01 698 599 R FREQY MIN Hz 0 65535 0 0 01 699 MAX MIN RTD Data 600 R RTD1 MAX degC 32768 32767 0 1 700 601 R RTD1 MIN degC 32768 32767 0 1 701 602 R RTD2 MAX degC 32768 32767 0 1 702 603 R RTD2 MIN degC ...

Page 668: ...0 0 001 738 639 R AI304 MN LOd EU 32768 32767 0 0 001 739 MAX MIN AI4 Datad 640 R AI401 MX HId EU 32768 32767 0 0 001 740 641 R AI401 MX LOd EU 32768 32767 0 0 001 741 642 R AI401 MN HId EU 32768 32767 0 0 001 742 643 R AI401 MN LOd EU 32768 32767 0 0 001 743 644 R AI402 MX HId EU 32768 32767 0 0 001 744 645 R AI402 MX LOd EU 32768 32767 0 0 001 745 646 R AI402 MN HId EU 32768 32767 0 0 001 746 64...

Page 669: ...0 001 782 683 R AI301 LOd EU 32768 32767 0 0 001 783 684 R AI302 HId EU 32768 32767 0 0 001 784 685 R AI302 LOd EU 32768 32767 0 0 001 785 686 R AI303 HId EU 32768 32767 0 0 001 786 687 R AI303 LOd EU 32768 32767 0 0 001 787 688 R AI304 HId EU 32768 32767 0 0 001 788 689 R AI304 LOd EU 32768 32767 0 0 001 789 690 R AI401 HId EU 32768 32767 0 0 001 790 691 R AI401 LOd EU 32768 32767 0 0 001 791 692...

Page 670: ... 0 0 01 825 726 R MV11 HId 32768 32767 0 0 01 826 727 R MV11 LOd 32768 32767 0 0 01 827 728 R MV12 HId 32768 32767 0 0 01 828 729 R MV12 LOd 32768 32767 0 0 01 829 730 R MV13 HId 32768 32767 0 0 01 830 731 R MV13 LOd 32768 32767 0 0 01 831 732 R MV14 HId 32768 32767 0 0 01 832 733 R MV14 LOd 32768 32767 0 0 01 833 734 R MV15 HId 32768 32767 0 0 01 834 735 R MV15 LOd 32768 32767 0 0 01 835 736 R MV...

Page 671: ...LOd 32768 32767 0 0 01 863 764 R MV30 HId 32768 32767 0 0 01 864 765 R MV30 LOd 32768 32767 0 0 01 865 766 R MV31 HId 32768 32767 0 0 01 866 767 R MV31 LOd 32768 32767 0 0 01 867 768 R MV32 HId 32768 32767 0 0 01 868 769 R MV32 LOd 32768 32767 0 0 01 869 Device Counters 770 801 R COUNTER SC01 COUNTER SC32 0 65000 0 1 870 901 Reserved Area3 802 817 R Reservedc 0 0 0 902 917 Historical Data 818 R NO...

Page 672: ...AX A 0 65535 0 1 928 829 R EVENT IBX A 0 65535 0 1 929 830 R EVENT ICX A 0 65535 0 1 930 831 R EVENT IGX A 0 65535 0 1 931 832 R EVENT IAY A 0 65535 0 1 932 833 R EVENT IBY A 0 65535 0 1 933 834 R EVENT ICY A 0 65535 0 1 934 835 R EVENT IGY A 0 65535 0 1 935 836 R EVENT IN A 0 65535 0 1 936 837 R EVENT VABX VAX kV 0 65535 0 0 01 937 838 R EVENT VBCX VBX kV 0 65535 0 0 01 938 839 R EVENT VCAX VCX k...

Page 673: ...0 0 01 976 877 R BKR X RST TIM mm 0 59 0 1 977 878 R BKR X RST TIM hh 0 23 0 1 978 879 R BKR X RST DAT dd 1 31 1 1 979 880 R BKR X RST DAT mm 1 12 1 1 980 881 R BKR X RST DAT yy 2000 9999 2000 1 981 882 R RELAY TRIPY CNT 0 65535 0 1 982 883 R EXTRN TRIPY CNT 0 65535 0 1 983 884 R RELAY TRIPY IA kA 0 65535 0 1 984 885 R RELAY TRIPY IB kA 0 65535 0 1 985 886 R RELAY TRIPY IC kA 0 65535 0 1 986 887 R...

Page 674: ...VED Bit 3 POWER ELEMENTS Bit 4 FREQUENCY 81 Bit 5 VOLTS HERTZ Bit 6 RESTRCTD EARTH Bit 7 RTD TRIP Bit 8 BREAKER FAIL Bit 9 REMOTE TRIP Bit 10 BACKUP Bit 11 40 FLD LOSS Bit 12 64G 64F GND Bit 13 INADVERTENT ENRG Bit 14 OUT OF STEP Bit 15 TRIP 903 R WARN STATUS LO 0 65535 0 1003 Bit 0 BREAKER MONITOR Bit 1 DEMAND ALARM Bit 2 RTD FAULT Bit 3 CONFIG FAULT Bit 4 COMM FAULT Bit 5 COMM IDLE Bit 6 COMM LO...

Page 675: ... PCY REAL PWR LOd kW 32768 32767 0 1 1031 932 R P3Y REAL PWR HId kW 32768 32767 0 1 1032 933 R P3Y REAL PWR LOd kW 32768 32767 0 1 1033 934 R QAY REACTV PWRHId kVAR 32768 32767 0 1 1034 935 R QAY REACTV PWRLOd kVAR 32768 32767 0 1 1035 936 R QBY REACTV PWRHId kVAR 32768 32767 0 1 1036 937 R QBY REACTV PWRLOd kVAR 32768 32767 0 1 1037 938 R QCY REACTV PWRHId kVAR 32768 32767 0 1 1038 939 R QCY REAC...

Page 676: ... 255 0 1072 Bit 0 50PY2T Bit 1 50PY2P Bit 2 50PY1T Bit 3 50PY1P Bit 4 50PX2T Bit 5 50PX2P Bit 6 50PX1T Bit 7 50PX1P 973 R ROW 2 0 255 0 1073 Bit 0 ORED50T Bit 1 Bit 2 50PX3CT Bit 3 50PX3CP Bit 4 50PX3BT Bit 5 50PX3BP Bit 6 50PX3AT Bit 7 50PX3AP 974 R ROW 3 0 255 0 1074 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 50PY3CT Bit 3 50PY3CP Bit 4 50PY3BT Bit 5 50PY3BP Bit 6 50PY3AT Bit 7 50PY3AP 975 R ROW 4 0 255 0 1075 Bit 0 50Q...

Page 677: ...QY2T Bit 1 67QY2P Bit 2 67QY1T Bit 3 67QY1P Bit 4 67PY2T Bit 5 67PY2P Bit 6 67PY1T Bit 7 67PY1P 979 R ROW 8 0 255 0 1079 Bit 0 46Q2T Bit 1 46Q2 Bit 2 46Q1T Bit 3 46Q1 Bit 4 50N2T Bit 5 50N2P Bit 6 50N1T Bit 7 50N1P 980 R ROW 9 0 255 0 1080 Bit 0 ORED51T Bit 1 Bit 2 51GXT Bit 3 51GXP Bit 4 51QXT Bit 5 51QXP Bit 6 51PXT Bit 7 51PXP 981 R ROW 10 0 255 0 1081 Bit 0 51NT Bit 1 51NP Bit 2 51GYT Bit 3 51...

Page 678: ...YP Bit 2 REF1P Bit 3 REF1R Bit 4 REF1F Bit 5 50GREF1 Bit 6 REF1EN Bit 7 50NREF1 985 R ROW 14 0 255 0 1085 Bit 0 51CT Bit 1 51C Bit 2 N64G Bit 3 T64G Bit 4 64G2T Bit 5 64G2 Bit 6 64G1T Bit 7 64G1 986 R ROW 15 0 255 0 1086 Bit 0 51VT Bit 1 51V Bit 2 Bit 3 64FFLT Bit 4 64F2T Bit 5 64F2 Bit 6 64F1T Bit 7 64F1 987 R ROW 16 0 255 0 1087 Bit 0 27PY2T Bit 1 27PY2 Bit 2 27PY1T Bit 3 27PY1 Bit 4 27PX2T Bit ...

Page 679: ... Bit 2 59GY1T Bit 3 59GY1 Bit 4 59QY2T Bit 5 59QY2 Bit 6 59QY1T Bit 7 59QY1 991 R ROW 20 0 255 0 1091 Bit 0 3PWRX4T Bit 1 3PWRX4P Bit 2 3PWRX3T Bit 3 3PWRX3P Bit 4 3PWRX2T Bit 5 3PWRX2P Bit 6 3PWRX1T Bit 7 3PWRX1P 992 R ROW 21 0 255 0 1092 Bit 0 3PWRY4T Bit 1 3PWRY4P Bit 2 3PWRY3T Bit 3 3PWRY3P Bit 4 3PWRY2T Bit 5 3PWRY2P Bit 6 3PWRY1T Bit 7 3PWRY1P 993 R ROW 22 0 255 0 1093 Bit 0 BNDT Bit 1 81RT ...

Page 680: ... ER Bit 4 COMMFLT Bit 5 COMMLOSS Bit 6 COMMIDLE Bit 7 REMTRIP 997 R ROW 26 0 255 0 1097 Bit 0 87HR Bit 1 87HR3 Bit 2 87HR2 Bit 3 87HR1 Bit 4 87HB Bit 5 87BL3 Bit 6 87BL2 Bit 7 87BL1 998 R ROW 27 0 255 0 1098 Bit 0 3P27Y Bit 1 3P27X Bit 2 3P59Y Bit 3 3P59X Bit 4 51VR Bit 5 51CR Bit 6 TH5T Bit 7 TH5 999 R ROW 28 0 255 0 1099 Bit 0 59S2T Bit 1 59S2 Bit 2 59S1T Bit 3 59S1 Bit 4 27S2T Bit 5 27S2 Bit 6 ...

Page 681: ...t 1 OUT407 Bit 2 OUT406 Bit 3 OUT405 Bit 4 OUT404 Bit 5 OUT403 Bit 6 OUT402 Bit 7 OUT401 1019 R ROW 48 0 255 0 1119 Bit 0 OUT508 Bit 1 OUT507 Bit 2 OUT506 Bit 3 OUT505 Bit 4 OUT504 Bit 5 OUT503 Bit 6 OUT502 Bit 7 OUT501 1020 R ROW 49 0 255 0 1120 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 IN102 Bit 7 IN10I 1021 R ROW 50 0 255 0 1121 Bit 0 IN308 Bit 1 IN307 Bit 2 IN306 Bit 3 IN305 Bit 4 IN304 Bit 5 ...

Page 682: ...eturn Status 0 1 Bit 4 DN Aux 1 Cmd Bit 5 DN Aux 2 Cmd Bit 6 DN Aux 3 Cmd Bit 7 DN Aux 4 Cmd Bit 8 DN Aux 5 Cmd Bit 9 DN Aux 6 Cmd Bit 10 DN Aux 7 Cmd Bit 11 DN Aux 8 Cmd Bit 12 DN Aux 9 Cmd Bit 13 DN Aux 10 Cmd Bit 14 DN Aux 11 Cmd Bit 15 BreakerY Open 2001H 6 RESET COMMAND 0 4095 0 na Bit 0 Trip Reset Bit 1 Reserved Bit 2 Reset Stat Data Bit 3 Reset Hist Data Bit 4 Reset Comm Cntr Bit 5 Reserved...

Page 683: ...eserved Bit 2 IN6 IN404 Status Bit 3 IN7 IN501 Status Bit 4 IN8 IN502 Status Bit 5 IN9 IN503 Status Bit 6 IN10 IN504 Status Bit 7 Reserved Bit 8 AUX7 OUT501 Status Bit 9 AUX8 OUT502 Status Bit 10 AUX9 OUT503 Status Bit 11 AUX10 OUT504 Status Bit 12 through Bit 15 Reserved 2102H R TRIP STATUS LOd na 2103H R TRIP STATUS HId na 2104H R WARN STATUS LOd na 2105H R WARN STATUS HId na 2106H R AVERAGE CUR...

Page 684: ...25 1 1 3002H R USER MAP REG VAL 126 250 126 1 3003H R RESERVED AREA1 251 260 251 1 3004H R RESET SETTINGS 261 262 261 1 3005H R DATE TIME SET 263 270 263 1 3006H R DEVICE STATUS 271 319 271 1 3007H R XSIDE CURRENT 320 329 320 1 3008H R XSIDE VOLTAGE 330 345 330 1 3009H R XSIDE POWER DATA 346 380 346 1 300AH R YSIDE CURRENT 381 390 381 1 300BH R YSIDE VOLTAGE 391 406 391 1 300CH R MISC MEASUREMENT ...

Page 685: ...OW 0 65535 na 4003H R W ASA NUMBER HIGH 0 65535 na 4004H R FIRMWARE REVISION 1 32639 na 4005H R NUM OF PAR 1 2000 1124 na 4006H R NUM OF PAR GROUP 1 100 35 na 4007H R W MAC ID 1 99 0 na 64 99 Swr Configurable 4008H R W DN BAUD RATE 0 9 0 na 0 125 kbps 1 250 kbps 2 500 kbps 3 AUTO Swr Configurable 4009H R W DN STATUS 0 31 0 na Bit 0 Explicit Cnxn Bit 1 I O Cnxn Bit 2 Explicit Fault Bit 3 I O Fault ...

Page 686: ...7H R ERROR ADDRESS 0 65535 0 na 4018H 401FH R Reservedc 0 0 0 na a All addresses in this table refer to the register addresses in the Modbus packet b Registers labeled R W are read write registers Registers labeled W are write only registers Registers Labeled R are read only registers c Reserved addresses return 0 d HI and LO are a pair of registers that represent the high word and the low word of...

Page 687: ... incoming GOOSE messages Configuration Use FTP client software or ACSELERATOR Architect SEL 5032 Software to transfer the Substation Configuration Language SCL Configured IED Description CID file to the relay NOTE The SEL 700G supports one CID file which should be transferred only if a change in the relay configuration is necessary If an invalid CID file is transferred the relay will no longer hav...

Page 688: ...client server and peer to peer communications substation design and configuration testing and project standards The IEC 61850 standard consists of the parts listed in Table F 1 Table F 1 IEC 61850 Document Set IEC 61850 Sections Definitions IEC 61850 1 Introduction and overview IEC 61850 2 Glossary IEC 61850 3 General requirements IEC 61850 4 System and project management IEC 61850 5 Communication...

Page 689: ... into specific categories such as status ST description DC and substituted value SV Functional constraints CDCs and CDC attributes are used as building blocks for defining Local Nodes UCA2 uses GOMSFE Generic Object Models for Substation and Feeder Equipment to present data from station IEDs as a series of objects called models or bricks The IEC working group has incorporated GOMSFE concepts into ...

Page 690: ...independent data exchange protocol for industrial networks in the 1980s and standardized as ISO 9506 In theory you can map IEC 61850 to any protocol However it can be unwieldy and quite complicated to map objects and services to a protocol that only provides access to simple data points via registers or index numbers MMS supports complex named objects and flexible services that enable mapping to I...

Page 691: ...ly those Virtual Bits that are assigned to an SER report are able to track bit transitions via reporting between LN data update scans File Services The Ethernet File System allows reading or writing data as files The File System supports FTP The File System provides A means for the devices to transfer data as files A hierarchical file structure for the device data root level only for SEL 700 serie...

Page 692: ...g ACSELERATOR Architect you can reallocate data within each report dataset to present different data attributes for each report beyond the predefined datasets For buffered reports connected clients can edit the report parameters shown in Table F 4 Table F 4 Buffered Report Control Block Client Access RCB Attribute User changeable Report Disabled User changeable Report Enabled Default Values RptId ...

Page 693: ...writable however the SEL 700G does not support reservations Writing any field of the URCB causes the client to obtain their own copy of the URCB in essence acquiring a reservation Reports are serviced at a 2 Hz rate The client can set the IntgPd to any value with a resolution of 1 ms However the integrity report is only sent when the period has been detected as having expired The report service ra...

Page 694: ... new datasets for outgoing GOOSE transmission Reports Twelve predefined datasets BRDSet01 to BRDSet06 and URDSet01 to URDSet06 correspond to the default six buffered and six unbuffered reports Note that you cannot change the number 12 or type of reports buffered or unbuffered within ACSELERATOR Architect However you can alter the data attributes that a dataset contains and so define what data an I...

Page 695: ...ms SER accurate time stamps for data change events To ensure that you get SER quality time stamps for changes to certain points you must include those points in the SER report All other FCDAs are scanned for data changes on a 1 2 second interval and have 1 2 second time stamp accuracy See the SET R command for information on programming the SER report The SEL 700G uses GOOSE quality attributes to ...

Page 696: ...ntil a trigger causes the transmission sequence to be repeated The time to live reported in each transmitted message is three times the current interval or two times the interval if the maximum time to live has been reached 30 ms 60 ms 120 ms 240 ms and 200 ms for the previous example see IEC 61850 8 1 sec 18 1 GOOSE transmission is squelched silenced after a permanent latching self test failure E...

Page 697: ... SEL IEDs Users can use ACSELERATOR Architect to do the following Organize and configure all SEL IEDs in a substation project Configure incoming and outgoing GOOSE messages Edit and create GOOSE datasets Read non SEL IED Capability Description ICD and Configured IED Description CID files and determine the available IEC 61850 messaging options Use or edit preconfigured datasets for reports Load IEC...

Page 698: ...to be changed during the CID file configuration Check and set the dead band values for your particular application when configuring the CID file for a device ACSELERATOR Architect has the capability to read other manufacturers ICD and CID files enabling the user to map the data seamlessly into SEL IED logic See the ACSELERATOR Architect online help for more information SEL ICD File Versions ACSELE...

Page 699: ...Thermal Monitoring Demand Metering Statistics MDST This LN will be used for calculation of demand currents in a three phase system This shall not be used for billing purposes Circuit Breaker Supervision SCBR Circuit breaker supervision abrasion and operation values Table F 8 Thermal Metering Data Logical Node Class Definition Sheet 1 of 2 Data Object Name Common Data Class Explanation Ta M O C Eb ...

Page 700: ... is momentary and must be logged or reported to provide evidence of their momentary state M O C Eb b M Mandatory O Optional C Conditional E Extension MDST Class LNName The name shall be composed of the class name LN Prefix and LN Instance ID according to IEC 61850 7 2 Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M Data Objects Measured Values D...

Page 701: ...AbrPrt MV Calculated or measured wear e g of main contact expressed in where 0 corresponds to new condition E Table F 11 Compatible Logical Nodes With Extensions Logical Node IEC 61850 Description or Comments Measurement MMXU This LN is used for power system measurement data Metering Statistics MSTA This LN is used for power system metering statistics Circuit Breaker XCBR This LN is used for circu...

Page 702: ...s of data objects with this designation is momentary and must be logged or reported to provide evidence of their momentary state M O C Eb b M Mandatory O Optional C Conditional E Extension MMXU Class LNName The name shall be composed of the class name LN Prefix and LN Instance ID according to IEC 61850 7 2 Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node...

Page 703: ...imum current O MaxVA MV Maximum apparent power O MinVA MV Minimum apparent power O MaxW MV Maximum real power O MinW MV Minimum real power O MaxVAr MV Maximum reactive power O MinVAr MV Minimum reactive power O MaxA WYE Maximum phase currents E MinA WYE Minimum phase currents E MaxPhV WYE Maximum phase to ground voltages E MinPhV WYE Minimum phase to ground voltages E MaxP2PV DEL Maximum phase to ...

Page 704: ...os Oper ctlVal CCXa Close Breaker X BYCSWI2 Pos Oper ctlVal CCYa Close Breaker Y Functional Constraint DC DevIDLPHD1 PhyNam model PARTNO Part number Functional Constraint STb A49PTTR1 Op general 49A Thermal alarm BXCSWI1 OpCls general CCX Close Breaker X BXCSWI1 OpOpn general OCX Open Breaker X BXCSWI1 Pos stVal 52AX 1 2c Breaker X position 52A false breaker opened 52A true breaker closed BXRBRF1 ...

Page 705: ...ection undefined C2PVPH2 Op general 24C2T Level 2 volts hertz composite element timed out C2PVPH2 Str general 24C2 Level 2 volts hertz composite element pickup C2PVPH2 Str dirGeneral unknown Direction undefined D1PVPH1 Op general 24D1T Level 1 volts hertz definite time element timed out D1PVPH1 Str general 24D1 Level 1 volts hertz instantaneous pickup D1PVPH1 Str dirGeneral unknown Direction undef...

Page 706: ...PTOF6 Str general 81X6T X Side Level 6 over and underfrequency element DXPTOF6 Str dirGeneral unknown Direction undefined DYPTOF10 Op general 81Y4T Y Side Level 4 over and underfrequency element DYPTOF10 Str general 81Y4T Y Side Level 4 over and underfrequency element DYPTOF10 Str dirGeneral unknown Direction undefined DYPTOF11 Op general 81Y5T Y Side Level 5 over and underfrequency element DYPTOF...

Page 707: ...GX1PTOC1 Str general 67GX1P X Side Level 1 residual ground directional overcurrent pickup GX1PTOC1 Str dirGeneral unknown Direction unknown due to settings GX1PTOV9 Op general 59GX1T X Side Level 1 residual ground overvoltage element trip GX1PTOV9 Str general 59GX1 X Side Level 1 residual ground overvoltage element pickup GX1PTOV9 Str dirGeneral unknown Direction undefined GX2PIOC14 Op general 50G...

Page 708: ...ed GYPTOC13 Op general 51GYT Y Side residual ground time overcurrent element tip GYPTOC13 Str general 51GYP Y Side residual ground time overcurrent element pickup GYPTOC13 Str dirGeneral unknown Direction unknown due to settings HB24PHAR1 Str phsA 2_4HB1 Second or fourth harmonic block asserted for Differential Element 1 HB24PHAR1 Str phsB 2_4HB2 Second or fourth harmonic block asserted for Differ...

Page 709: ...DOP3 Op general 3PWRX3T X Side Three Phase Power Element 3 trip P3XPDOP3 Str general 3PWRX3P X Side Three Phase Power Element 3 pickup P3XPDOP3 Str dirGeneral unknown Direction undefined P3XPDOP4 Op general 3PWRX4T X Side Three Phase Power Element 4 trip P3XPDOP4 Str general 3PWRX4P X Side Three Phase Power Element 4 pickup P3XPDOP4 Str dirGeneral unknown Direction undefined P3YPDOP5 Op general 3P...

Page 710: ...ide Level 2 phase undervoltage element trip PX2PTUV2 Str general 27PX2 X Side Level 2 phase undervoltage element pickup PX2PTUV2 Str dirGeneral unknown Direction undefined PXAPIOC3 Op general 50PX3AT X Side Level 3 Phase A instantaneous overcurrent element trip PXAPIOC3 Str general 50PX3AP X Side Level 3 Phase A instantaneous overcurrent element pickup PXAPIOC3 Str dirGeneral unknown Direction und...

Page 711: ...ned PYAPIOC8 Op general 50PY3AT Y Side Level 3 Phase A instantaneous overcurrent element trip PYAPIOC8 Str general 50PY3AP Y Side Level 3 Phase A instantaneous overcurrent element pickup PYAPIOC8 Str dirGeneral unknown Direction undefined PYBPIOC9 Op general 50PY3BT Y Side Level 3 Phase B instantaneous overcurrent element trip PYBPIOC9 Str general 50PY3BP Y Side Level 3 Phase B instantaneous overc...

Page 712: ...nce instantaneous overcurrent element pickup QY1PIOC19 Str dirGeneral unknown Direction undefined QY1PTOC7 Op general 67QY1T Y Side Level 1 phase negative sequence trip QY1PTOC7 Str general 67QY1P Y Side Level 1 phase negative sequence pickup QY1PTOC7 Str dirGeneral unknown Direction unknown due to settings QY1PTOV7 Op general 59QY1T Y Side Level 1 negative sequence overvoltage element trip QY1PTO...

Page 713: ...de Level 4 time delayed frequency rate of change element RX4PFRC7 Str general 81RX4T X Side Level 4 time delayed frequency rate of change element RX4PFRC7 Str dirGeneral unknown Direction undefined RXPFRC2 Op general 81RXT ORed X side frequency rate of change element RXPFRC2 Str general 81RXT ORed X side frequency rate of change element RXPFRC2 Str dirGeneral unknown Direction undefined RY1PFRC8 O...

Page 714: ...TRIPYPTRC2 Tr general TRIPY Y side breaker trip Z40PDUP1 Op general 40Z1T Zone 1 time delayed loss of field mho element Z40PDUP1 Str general 40Z1 Zone 1 instantaneous loss of field mho element Z40PDUP1 Str dirGeneral unknown Direction undefined Z40PDUP2 Op general 40Z2T Zone 2 time delayed loss of field mho element Z40PDUP2 Str general 40Z2 Zone 2 instantaneous loss of field mho element Z40PDUP2 S...

Page 715: ...agnitude METXMMXU1 A neut instCVal ang f IN_ANG Current neutral angle METXMMXU1 A neut instCVal mag f IN_MAG Current neutral magnitude METXMMXU1 Fs instMag f FREQS Synch frequency METXMMXU1 Hz instMag f FREQX X side frequency METXMMXU1 PhV phsA instCVal ang f VAX_ANG X side voltage A phase to neutral angle METXMMXU1 PhV phsA instCVal mag f VAX_MAG X side voltage A phase to neutral magnitude METXMM...

Page 716: ...1 MaxA phsB instCVal mag f IBXMX X side current B phase maximum magnitude METXMSTA1 MaxA phsC instCVal mag f ICXMX X side current C phase maximum magnitude METXMSTA1 MaxA res instCVal mag f IGXMX X side current residual maximum magnitude METXMSTA1 MaxAmps instMag f INMX Current neutral maximum magnitude METXMSTA1 MaxP2PV phsAB instCVal mag f VABXMX X side voltage A to B phase maximum magnitude MET...

Page 717: ...YPD Y Side Phase C current peak demand METYMDST2 PkDmdA res instCVal mag f IGYPD Y side residual current peak demand METYMDST2 PkDmdA nseq instCVal mag f 3I2YPD Y side negative sequence current peak demand METYMDST2 SupVArh instMag f MVARHPY Reactive energy 3 phase positive Y side METYMDST2 SupWh instMag f MWHPY Real energy 3 phase positive Y side METYMMXU2 A phsA instCVal ang f IAY_ANG Y side cur...

Page 718: ...ed residual angle METYMSQI2 SeqA c3 instCVal mag f IGY_MAG Y side current calculated residual magnitude METYMSQI2 SeqV c1 instCVal ang f V1Y_ANG Y side Voltage positive sequence angle METYMSQI2 SeqV c1 instCVal mag f V1Y_MAG Y side voltage positive sequence magnitude METYMSQI2 SeqV c2 instCVal ang f 3V2Y_ANG Y side voltage negative sequence angle METYMSQI2 SeqV c2 instCVal mag f 3V2Y_MAG Y side vo...

Page 719: ...agnitude RMSXMMXU3 A phsB instCVal mag f IBXRMS X side RMS current B phase magnitude RMSXMMXU3 A phsC instCVal mag f ICXRMS X side RMS current C phase magnitude RMSXMMXU3 A neut instCVal mag f INRMS Neutral RMS current magnitude RMSXMMXU3 PhV phsA instCVal mag f VAXRMS X side RMS voltage A phase to neutral magnitude RMSXMMXU3 PhV phsB instCVal mag f VBXRMS X side RMS voltage B phase to neutral mag...

Page 720: ...ribute Data Source Comment Table F 18 Logical Device CON Remote Control Logical Node Status Control Relay Word Bit Comment RBGGIO1 SPCSO01 stVal SPCSO08 stVal SPCSO01 Oper ctlVal SPCSO08 Oper ctlVal RB01 RB08 Remote Bits RB01 RB08 RBGGIO2 SPCSO09 stVal SPCSO16 stVal SPCSO09 Oper ctlVal SPCSO16 Oper ctlVal RB09 RB16 Remote Bits RB09 RB16 RBGGIO3 SPCSO17 stVal SPCSO24 stVal SPCSO17 Oper ctlVal SPCSO...

Page 721: ...s or currents tracking enabled when bit is asserted GENGGIO25 Ind10 stVal CFA Generator breaker close failure angle condition GENGGIO25 Ind11 stVal BKRCF Generator breaker close failed GENGGIO25 Ind12 stVal CFX Breaker X close condition failure on GENGGIO25 Ind13 stVal CFY Breaker Y close condition failure on GENGGIO25 Ind14 stVal BCWAX X side breaker A phase breaker contact wear has reached 100 p...

Page 722: ...OK Time synchronization OK MISCGGIO26 Ind09 stVal DST Daylight Savings Time active MISCGGIO26 Ind10 stVal LINKA Asserted when a valid link is detected on Port 1A MISCGGIO26 Ind11 stVal LINKB Asserted when a valid link is detected on Port 1B MISCGGIO26 Ind12 stVal LINKFAIL Asserted when a valid link is not detected on the active port s MISCGGIO26 Ind13 stVal PASEL Asserted when Port 1A is active MI...

Page 723: ...erator and system voltage difference within acceptable bounds SYNGGIO24 Ind14 stVal SFX Generator slip frequency is within acceptable bounds between 25SLO and 25SHI settings SYNGGIO24 Ind15 stVal 25AX1 Generator slip breaker time compensated phase angle less than 25ANG1X setting SYNGGIO24 Ind16 stVal 25AX2 Generator uncompensated phase angle less than 25ANG2X setting SYNGGIO24 Ind17 stVal GENVHI G...

Page 724: ...which are updated whenever the source updates and other attributes which are only updated when the source goes outside the data source s deadband mag and cVal Only the instantaneous values are shown in the table b Active data only if optional I O card is installed in the slot c Active data depends on the EMV setting d Active data depends on the ESC setting e Active data depends on the ELB setting ...

Page 725: ...MMS Service Supported CBB Client CR Supported Server CR Supported status Y getNameList Y identify Y rename read Y write Y getVariableAccessAttributes Y defineNamedVariable defineScatteredAccess getScatteredAccessAttributes deleteVariableAccess defineNamedVariableList getNamedVariableListAttributes Y deleteNamedVariableList defineNamedType getNamedTypeAttributes deleteNamedType input output takeCon...

Page 726: ...ntEnrollmentStatus getEventEnrollmentAttributes acknowledgeEventNotification getAlarmSummary getAlarmEnrollmentSummary readJournal writeJournal initializeJournal reportJournalStatus createJournal deleteJournal fileOpen fileRead fileClose fileRename fileDelete fileDirectory unsolicitedStatus informationReport Y eventNotification attachToEventCondition attachToSemaphore conclude Y cancel Y getDataEx...

Page 727: ...rt 8 1 for more information reportAccessControlledObjects deleteAccessControlList alterAccessControl ReconfigureProgramInvocation Table F 24 MMS Parameter CBB MMS Parameter CBB Client CR Supported Server CR Supported STR1 Y STR2 Y VNAM Y VADR Y VALT Y TPY Y VLIS Y CEI Table F 25 Alternate Access Selection Conformance Statement Alternate Access Selection Client CR Supported Server CR Supported acce...

Page 728: ...me Y address variableDescription scatteredAccessDescription invalidated Table F 28 Read Conformance Statement Read Client CR Supported Server CR Supported Request specificationWithResult variableAccessSpecification Response variableAccessSpecification Y listOfAccessResult Y Table F 29 GetVariableAccessAttributes Conformance Statement GetVariableAccessAttributes Client CR Supported Server CR Suppor...

Page 729: ... variableSpecification Y alternateAccess Y Table F 32 DeleteNamedVariableList DeleteNamedVariableList Client CR Supported Server CR Supported Request Scope listOfVariableListName domainName Response numberMatched numberDeleted DeleteNamedVariableList Error Table F 30 DefineNamedVariableList Conformance Statement Sheet 2 of 2 DefineVariableAccessAttributes Client CR Supported Server CR Supported Ta...

Page 730: ...2 used B24 SCSM other Generic Substation Event Model GSE B31 Publisher side Ob YES B32 Subscriber side Ob b O optional YES Transmission of Sampled Value Model SVC B41 Published side Ob B42 Subscriber side Ob Table F 35 ACSI Models Conformance Statement Sheet 1 of 2 Client Subscriber Server Publisher SEL 700G Support If Server Side B11 Supported M1 Logical device c2a c2a YES M2 Logical node c3b c3b...

Page 731: ...ast SVC Oe Oe M16 Time Mf Mf M17 File Transfer Oe Oe a c2 shall be M if support for LOGICAL NODE model has been declared b c3 shall be M if support for DATA model has been declared c c4 shall be M if support for DATA SET Substitution Report Log Control or Time model has been declared d c5 shall be M if support for Report GSE or SV models has been declared e O optional f M mandatory g M mandatory T...

Page 732: ...ory TP Ob Ob YES Substitution Clause 12 S17 SetDataValues TP Ma Ma Setting Group Control Clause 13 S18 SelectActiveSG TP Ob Ob S19 SelectEditSG TP Ob Ob S20 SetSGvalues TP Ob Ob S21 ConfirmEditSGVal TP Ob Ob S22 GetSGValues TP Ob Ob S23 GetSGCBValues TP Ob Ob S24 Report TP c6c c6c YES S24 1 data change dchg YES S24 2 qchg change qchg YES S24 3 data update dupd S25 GetBRCBValues TP c6c c6c YES S26 ...

Page 733: ...39 SetGoCBValues TP Ob Ob ONLY GSSE Control Block S40 SendGSSEMessage MC c8e c8e S41 GetReference TP Ob c9f S42 GetGSSEElement Number TP Ob c9f S43 GetGsCBValues TP Ob Ob S44 GetGsCBValues TP Ob Ob Transmission of Sample Value Model SVC Clause 16 Multicast SVC S45 SendMSVMessage MC c10g c10g S46 GetMSVCBValues TP Ob Ob S47 SetMSVCBValues TP Ob Ob Unicast SVC S48 SendUSVMessage MC c10g c10g S49 Get...

Page 734: ...YES for IRIG B T2 YES for IRIG B T3 YES for IRIG B T4 YES for IRIG B T3 Supported TimeStamp resolution nearest negative power of 2 in seconds 7 10 ms for SNTP 18 4 µs for IRIG B a M Mandatory b O Optional c c6 shall declare support for at least one BRCB or URCB d c7 shall declare support for at least one QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter e c8 shall declare support for at least one SendGOOSEMessage o...

Page 735: ...cy drives panel displays and operator interfaces The SEL DeviceNet Communications Card User s Guide contains more information on the installation and use of the DeviceNet card DeviceNet Card The DeviceNet Card is an optional accessory that enables connection of the SEL 700G to the DeviceNet automation network The card see Figure G 1 occupies the communications expansion Slot C in the relay Figure ...

Page 736: ...h as RSNetWorx for DeviceNet Status indicators report the status of the device bus and network communications They are visible from the back panel of the SEL 700G as installed You can do the following with the DeviceNet interface Retrieve metering data such as the following Currents Voltages Power Energy Max Min Analog Inputs Counters Read and set time Monitor device status trip warning status and...

Page 737: ...y updated without revision of the configuration software tool itself All the registers defined in the Modbus Register Map Table E 34 are available as parameters in a DeviceNet configuration Parameter names data ranges and scaling enumeration values and strings parameter groups and product information are the same as specified in the Modbus Register Map defined in Table E 34 The parameter numbers a...

Page 738: ...This page intentionally left blank ...

Page 739: ...EL 700G Global settings class contains the synchrophasor settings including the choice of transmitted synchrophasor data set The Port settings class selects which serial port s or Ethernet port you can use for synchrophasor protocol use See Settings for Synchrophasors on page H 4 The SEL 700G timekeeping function generates status Relay Word bits and time quality information that is important for s...

Page 740: ...elative to an absolute time reference which is represented by a cosine function in Figure H 1 The time of day is shown for the two time marks The reference is consistent with the phase reference defined in the C37 118 standard During steady state conditions the SEL 700G synchrophasor values can be directly compared to values from other phasor measurement units that conform to C37 118 Figure H 1 Ph...

Page 741: ...nce is based on the GPS clock IRIG B signal and not synchronized to the power system an examination of successive synchrophasor data sets almost always shows some angular change between samples of the same signal This is not a malfunction of the relay or the power system but is merely a result of viewing data from one system with an instrument with an independent time base In other words a power s...

Page 742: ... SEL 700G for C37 118 Protocol in Global Settings Sheet 1 of 2 Setting Description Default EPMU Enable Synchronized Phasor Measurement Y N Na MRATE Messages per Second 1 2 5 10 25 or 50 when NFREQ 50 1 2 4 5 10 12 15 20 30 or 60 when NFREQ 60 10 PMAPP PMU Application Fast Fast Response Narrow Narrow Bandwidth NARROW PHCOMP Frequency Based Phasor Compensation Y N Y PMSTN Station Name 16 characters ...

Page 743: ...and well suited for post disturbance analysis The Fast Response setting F represents filters with a higher cutoff frequency The response in frequency domain is wider and the response in the time domain is faster This method results in synchrophasor data that you can use in synchrophasor applications requiring more speed in tracking system parameters PHCOMP Enables or disables frequency based compe...

Page 744: ...sor and offline storage requirements when deciding how much data to transmit This setting is one of the seven settings that determine the minimum port SPEED necessary to support the synchrophasor data packet rate and size see Communications Bandwidth on page H 16 for detailed information PHDATAI IXCOMP and IYCOMP PHDATAI selects which current synchrophasors to include in the data packet Consider t...

Page 745: ...information Table H 2 Synchrophasor Order in Data Stream Voltages and Currents Synchrophasorsabc a Synchrophasors are included in the order shown for example voltages if selected always precede currents b Synchrophasors are transmitted as primary values Relay settings CTRX CTRY CTRN PTRX PTRY PTRS are used to scale the values c When PHDATAV ALL and DELTA_Y_X WYE phase voltages VAX VBX and VCX are ...

Page 746: ...in Table H 4 TREA1 TREA2 TREA3 TREA4 and PMTRIG Defines the programmable trigger bits as allowed by IEEE C37 118 Each of the four Trigger Reason settings TREA1 TREA4 and the PMU Trigger setting PMTRIG are SELOGIC control equations in the Global settings class The SEL 700G evaluates these equations and places the results in Relay Word bits with the same names TREA1 TREA4 and PMTRIG The trigger reas...

Page 747: ...ns and corrects synchrophasor time accordingly Serial Port Settings for IEEE C37 118 Synchrophasors IEEE C37 118 compliant synchrophasors are available via serial or Ethernet port The associated serial port settings are shown in Table H 5 The serial port settings for PROTO PMU shown in Table H 5 do not include the settings BITS and PARITY these two settings are internally fixed as BITS 8 PARITY N ...

Page 748: ...other settings and to enable IEEE C37 118 protocol synchrophasors on this port Setting EPMIP is not available when Global setting EPMU is set to N PMOTS1 PMU Output 1 Transport Scheme OFF TCP UDP_S UDP_T UDP_U OFF PMOIPA1 PMU Output 1 Client IP Remote Address www xxx yyy zzz c d c Setting hidden when PMOTS1 OFF d Port number must be unique 192 168 1 3 PMOTCP1 PMU Output 1 TCP IP Local Port Number ...

Page 749: ...are sent over the UDP connection as shown in Figure H 5 Figure H 5 UDP_T and UDP_U Connections C37 118 Synchrophasor Command Start Request Synchrophasor Command Stop Request Synchrophasor Command Configuration Request 1 Synchrophasor Command Configuration Request 2 Synchrophasor Command Header Frame Request Synchrophasor Command Extended Frame C37 118 Synchrophasor Measurement Synchrophasor Config...

Page 750: ...rophasor Relay Word Bits Table H 7 and Table H 8 list the SEL 700G Relay Word bits that are related to synchrophasor measurement The Synchrophasor Trigger Relay Word bits in Table H 7 follow the state of the SELOGIC control equations of the same name listed at the bottom of Table H 1 These Relay Word bits are included in the IEEE C37 118 synchrophasor data frame STAT field See Table H 4 for standa...

Page 751: ... 1 microsecond indicate that the relay is receiving high accuracy IRIG When IRIG signal is lost IRIGOK deasserts However TSOK remains asserted for a holdover period as long as 15 seconds If the IRIG signal is not restored within 15 seconds TSOK also deasserts Table H 8 Time Synchronization Relay Word Bits Name Description IRIGOK Asserts while relay time is based on IRIG B time source TSOK Time Syn...

Page 752: ...rify connections phase rotation and scaling As an analytical tool to capture synchrophasor data at an exact time to compare this information with similar data captured in other phasor measurement unit s at the same time As a method of periodically gathering synchrophasor data through a communications processor The MET PM command displays the same set of analog synchrophasor information regardless ...

Page 753: ...etting PROTO PMU This section does not cover the details of the protocol but highlights some of the important features and options that are available MET PM Enter SEL 700G Date 01 07 2010 Time 20 55 21 000 GENERATOR RELAY Time Source External Time Quality Maximum time synchronization error 0 000 ms TSOK 1 Synchrophasors Phase Voltages Pos Sequence Voltage VAX VBX VCX V1 MAG V 134 00 132 21 135 34 ...

Page 754: ...SEL 700G always includes the results of four synchrophasor trigger reason SELOGIC control equations TREA1 TREA2 TREA3 and TREA4 and the trigger SELOGIC control equation result PMTRIG in the synchrophasor message Communications Bandwidth A phasor measurement unit PMU that is configured to transmit a single synchrophasor positive sequence voltage for example at a message rate of once per second plac...

Page 755: ...te message could be sent at any message rate less than or equal to ten MRATE when SPEED 9600 Protocol Operation The SEL 700G only transmits synchrophasor messages over serial ports that have setting PROTO PMU The connected device is typically a synchrophasor processor such as the SEL 3306 The synchrophasor processor Table H 11 Size of a C37 118 Synchrophasor Message Item Possible Number of Quantit...

Page 756: ...lect data to monitor voltages and currents throughout the system The PMU data collection requirements call for the following data collected at 10 messages per second Frequency Positive sequence voltage from the generator Three phase positive sequence and neutral current for the generator Indication when the breaker is open Indication when the voltage or frequency information is unusable The utilit...

Page 757: ...ple Synchrophasor Global Settings Setting Description Value FNOM Nominal System Frequency 50 60 Hz 60 EPMU Enable Synchronized Phasor Measurement Y N Y MRATE Messages per Second 1 2 4 5 10 12 15 20 30 60 10 PMAPP PMU Application F Fast Response N Narrow Bandwidth FAST PHCOMP Frequency Based Phasor Compensation Y N Y PMSTN Station Name 16 characters SAMPLE1 PMID PMU Hardware ID 1 65534 14 PHDATAV P...

Page 758: ...even setting groups Make the Table H 16 settings for serial port 3 using the SET P 3 command Table H 15 Example Synchrophasor SELOGIC Settings Setting Value SV14 52AX SV15 LOPX SV16 FREQXOK Table H 16 Example Synchrophasor Port Settings Setting Description Value PROTO Protocol SEL MOD DNP EVMSG PMU MBA MBB MB8A MB8B MBTA MBTB PMU SPEED Data Speed 300 to 38400 19200 STOPBIT Stop Bits 1 2 bits 1 RTS...

Page 759: ...ion Because of different applications the SEL product range supports several variations of the MIRRORED BITS communications protocol Through port settings you can set the SEL 700G for compatible operation with SEL 300 series devices SEL 2505 Remote I O Modules and SEL 2100 Logic Processors When communicating with an SEL 400 series relay be sure to set the transmission mode setting in the SEL 400 s...

Page 760: ... pass all of the data checks described previously After ROKc is reasserted received data may be delayed while passing through the security counters described below While ROKc is deasserted the relay does not transfer new RMB data to the pickup dropout security counters described below Instead the relay sends one of the user definable default values to the security counter inputs For each RMBn use ...

Page 761: ...ower system information each 1 8 power system cycle but when transmitting at 19200 bps the SEL 700G processes MIRRORED BITS messages at 4 15 ms at 60 Hz 4 times per power system cycle at 60 Hz Although the SEL 321 processes power system information each 1 8 power system cycle the relay processes the MIRRORED BITS pickup dropout security counters as MIRRORED BITS messages are received Because the S...

Page 762: ...E Date when the channel returned to service if the channel is currently failed it is displayed and included in the calculations as if its recovery were to occur at the time the report was requested RECOVERY_TIME Time when the channel returned to service if the channel is currently failed it is displayed and included in the calculations as if its recovery were to occur at the time the report was re...

Page 763: ...cation Settings Set PROTO MBA or MB8A to enable the MIRRORED BITS protocol channel A on this port Set PROTO MBB or MB8B to enable the MIRRORED BITS protocol channel B on this port The standard MIRRORED BITS protocols MBA and MBB use a 6 data bit format for data encoding The MB8 protocols MB8A and MB8B use an 8 data bit format which allows MIRRORED BITS to operate on communications channels requiri...

Page 764: ...8 messages 1 RMB5PU RMB5 Pickup Debounce Messages 1 8 messages 1 RMB5DO RMB5 Dropout Debounce Messages 1 8 messages 1 RMB6PU RMB6 Pickup Debounce Messages 1 8 messages 1 RMB6DO RMB6 Dropout Debounce Messages 1 8 messages 1 RMB7PU RMB7 Pickup Debounce Messages 1 8 messages 1 RMB7DO RMB7 Dropout Debounce Messages 1 8 messages 1 RMB8PU RMB8 Pickup Debounce Messages 1 8 messages 1 RMB8DO RMB8 Dropout ...

Page 765: ... model although visible and settable are inactive and will not change their state The Relay Word bit row numbers correspond to the row numbers used in the TARGET Command Display Relay Word Bit Status on page 7 46 You can use any Relay Word bit except Row 0 in SELOGIC control equations see Section 4 Protection and Logic Functions and the Sequential Events Recorder SER trigger list settings see Sect...

Page 766: ...X5T 81X6T 81XT 81T 30 81Y1T 81Y2T 81Y3T 81Y4T 81Y5T 81Y6T 81YT a 31 81RX1T 81RX2T 81RX3T 81RX4T 81RY1T 81RY2T 81RY3T 81RY4T 32 BND1T BND2T BND3T BND4T BND5T BND6T BFIX BFIY 33 78R1 78R2 78Z1 SWING OOS OOST ZLOADX ZLOADY 34 59VPX 59VSX VDIFX SFX 25AX1 25AX2 25C GSRTRG 35 GENVHI GENVLO GENFHI GENFLO FRAISE FLOWER VRAISE VLOWER 36 59VPY 59VSY VDIFY SFY 25AY1 25AY2 CFA BKRCF 37 51PXR 51QXR 51GXR 51PYR...

Page 767: ... T04_LED T05_LED T06_LED 69 FREQTRKX FREQTRKY ZCFREQX ZCFREQY ZCFREQS FREQXOK FREQYOK FREQSOK 70 LB01 LB02 LB03 LB04 LB05 LB06 LB07 LB08 71 LB09 LB10 LB11 LB12 LB13 LB14 LB15 LB16 72 LB17 LB18 LB19 LB20 LB21 LB22 LB23 LB24 73 LB25 LB26 LB27 LB28 LB29 LB30 LB31 LB32 74 RB01 RB02 RB03 RB04 RB05 RB06 RB07 RB08 75 RB09 RB10 RB11 RB12 RB13 RB14 RB15 RB16 76 RB17 RB18 RB19 RB20 RB21 RB22 RB23 RB24 77 RB...

Page 768: ...63 VB064 111 VB065 VB066 VB067 VB068 VB069 VB070 VB071 VB072 112 VB073 VB074 VB075 VB076 VB077 VB078 VB079 VB080 113 VB081 VB082 VB083 VB084 VB085 VB086 VB087 VB088 114 VB089 VB090 VB091 VB092 VB093 VB094 VB095 VB096 115 VB097 VB098 VB099 VB100 VB101 VB102 VB103 VB104 116 VB105 VB106 VB107 VB108 VB109 VB110 VB111 VB112 117 VB113 VB114 VB115 VB116 VB117 VB118 VB119 VB120 118 VB121 VB122 VB123 VB124...

Page 769: ...9PPY1 59PPY1T 59PPY2 59PPY2T 144 27V1X1 27V1X1T 27V1X2 27V1X2T 27V1X3 27V1X3T 27V1X4 27V1X4T 145 59V1X1 59V1X1T 59V1X2 59V1X2T 59V1X3 59V1X3T 59V1X4 59V1X4T 146 27V1X5 27V1X5T 27V1X6 27V1X6T 59V1X5 59V1X5T 59V1X6 59V1X6T 147 67N1P 67N1T 67N2P 67N2T MATHERR LINK1 a DIRNEX 148 a a a a NX1DIR NX2DIR DIRNFX DIRNRX 149 DRDOPT1 DRDOPT2 DRDOPT3 DRDOPT RHSM HSM a a 150 IA12H IB12H IC12H IA22H IB22H IC22H ...

Page 770: ...N 50QX1T HIDDEN 50QX2P HIDDEN 50QX2T HIDDEN 5 50GY1P HIDDEN HIDDEN HIDDEN 50GY1T HIDDEN HIDDEN HIDDEN 50GY2P HIDDEN HIDDEN HIDDEN 50GY2T HIDDEN HIDDEN HIDDEN 50QY1P HIDDEN HIDDEN HIDDEN 50QY1T HIDDEN HIDDEN HIDDEN 50QY2P HIDDEN HIDDEN HIDDEN 50QY2T HIDDEN HIDDEN HIDDEN 6 67GX1P HIDDEN HIDDEN 67GX1T HIDDEN HIDDEN 67GX2P HIDDEN HIDDEN 67GX2T HIDDEN HIDDEN 67GY1P HIDDEN HIDDEN HIDDEN 67GY1T HIDDEN HI...

Page 771: ... are visible and settable in those models that are not marked HIDDEN b Reserved for future use Table J 2 Hidden Overcurrent Element Relay Word Bits Per the SEL 700G Modela Sheet 3 of 3 SEL 700G Model Row RWB SEL 700G0 G0 SEL 700G1 G1 SEL 700GT SEL 700GT SEL 700GW Table J 3 Relay Word Bit Definitions for the SEL 700G Sheet 1 of 22 Bit Definition Row 2_4HB1 Second or fourth harmonic block asserted f...

Page 772: ... pickup 142 27PPX2T X side Level 2 phase to phase undervoltage element trip 142 27PPY1 Y side Level 1 phase to phase undervoltage element pickup 142 27PPY1T Y side Level 1 phase to phase undervoltage element trip 142 27PPY2 Y side Level 2 phase to phase undervoltage element pickup 142 27PPY2T Y side Level 2 phase to phase undervoltage element trip 142 27PX1 X side Level 1 phase undervoltage elemen...

Page 773: ...7 3P27Y Y side three phase to phase undervoltage element pickup 27 3P59X X side three phase to phase overvoltage element pickup 27 3P59Y Y side three phase to phase overvoltage element pickup 27 3POX X breaker three pole open 39 3POY Y breaker three pole open 39 3PWRX1P X side three phase Power Element 1 pickup 20 3PWRX1T X side three phase Power Element 1 trip 20 3PWRX2P X side three phase Power ...

Page 774: ...round instantaneous overcurrent element pickup 4 50GX1T X side Level 1 residual ground instantaneous overcurrent element trip 4 50GX2P X side Level 2 residual ground instantaneous overcurrent element pickup 4 50GX2T X side Level 2 residual ground instantaneous overcurrent element trip 4 50GY1P Y side Level 1 residual ground instantaneous overcurrent element pickup 5 50GY1T Y side Level 1 residual ...

Page 775: ...p 3 50PY3BP Y side Level 3 Phase B instantaneous overcurrent element pickup 3 50PY3BT Y side Level 3 Phase B instantaneous overcurrent element trip 3 50PY3CP Y side Level 3 Phase C instantaneous overcurrent element pickup 3 50PY3CT Y side Level 3 Phase C instantaneous overcurrent element trip 3 50QFX X side forward direction negative sequence overcurrent threshold exceeded 135 50QFY Y side forward...

Page 776: ... time overcurrent element trip 10 51QXP X side negative sequence time overcurrent element pickup 9 51QXR X side negative sequence time overcurrent element reset 37 51QXT X side negative sequence time overcurrent element trip 9 51QYP Y side negative sequence time overcurrent element pickup 10 51QYR Y side negative sequence time overcurrent element reset 37 51QYT Y side negative sequence time overcu...

Page 777: ...ervoltage element trip 17 59PY2 Y side Level 2 phase overvoltage element pickup 17 59PY2T Y side Level 2 phase overvoltage element trip 17 59QX1 X side Level 1 negative sequence overvoltage element pickup 18 59QX1T X side Level 1 negative sequence overvoltage element trip 18 59QX2 X side Level 2 negative sequence overvoltage element pickup 18 59QX2T X side Level 2 negative sequence overvoltage ele...

Page 778: ...2 OR 5HB3 38 64F1 Level 1 field ground protection element instantaneous pickup 15 64F1C Instantaneous Level 1 field ground protection element timed out 61 64F1T Level 1 field ground protection element timed out 15 64F2 Level 2 field ground protection element instantaneous pickup 15 64F2C Instantaneous Level 2 field ground protection element timed out 62 64F2T Level 2 field ground protection elemen...

Page 779: ...element 33 81RT ORed X side and Y side frequency rate of change elements 22 81RX1T X side Level 1 time delayed frequency rate of change element 31 81RX2T X side Level 2 time delayed frequency rate of change element 31 81RX3T X side Level 3 time delayed frequency rate of change element 31 81RX4T X side Level 4 time delayed frequency rate of change element 31 81RXT ORed X side frequency rate of chan...

Page 780: ... 26 87HR3 Harmonic Restrained Element 3 26 87HSC1 Harmonic Restrained High Security Differential Element 1 152 87HSC2 Harmonic Restrained High Security Differential Element 2 152 87HSC3 Harmonic Restrained High Security Differential Element 3 152 87HSN1 Harmonic Restrained Sensitive Differential Element 1 151 87HSN2 Harmonic Restrained Sensitive Differential Element 2 151 87HSN3 Harmonic Restraine...

Page 781: ... high alarm limit if any AIxxxHAL 1 then AIHAL 1 119 AIHW1 Analog inputs high warning Level 1 if any AIxxxHW1 1 then AIHW1 1 119 AIHW2 Analog inputs high warning Level 2 if any AIxxxHW2 1 then AIHW2 1 119 AILAL Analog inputs low alarm limit if any AIxxxLAL 1 then AILAL 1 119 AILW1 Analog inputs low warning Level 1 if any AIxxxLW1 1 then AILW1 1 119 AILW2 Analog inputs low warning Level 2 if any AI...

Page 782: ...ng time in band 5 exceeds TBND5 setting 32 BND6A Abnormal Frequency Band 6 alarm measured frequency between LBND5 and LBND6 settings 60 BND6T Abnormal Frequency Band 6 trip accumulated off frequency operating time in band 6 exceeds TBND6 setting 32 BNDA BNDA BND1A OR BND2A OR BND3A OR BND4A OR BND5A OR BND6A 60 BNDT BNDT BND1T OR BND2T OR BND3T OR BND4T OR BND5T OR BND6T 22 BRGALRM Bearing Tempera...

Page 783: ...ement 136 DIRNEX X side internal enable for 3V0 polarized and IN operating directional element 147 DIRNFX X side forward directional routed to neutral overcurrent elements 148 DIRNRX X side reverse directional routed to neutral overcurrent elements 148 DIRPFY Y side forward directional control routed to phase overcurrent elements 139 DIRPRY Y side reverse directional control routed to phase overcu...

Page 784: ...ro sequence voltage polarized directional element 137 FDIRVY Y side forward zero sequence voltage polarized directional element 138 FDRIRQY Y side forward negative sequence voltage polarized directional element 138 FLOWER Lower frequency for autosynchronism 35 FRAISE Raise frequency for autosynchronism 35 FREQFZ Synchrophasor Bit that asserts if the measured frequency 20 Hz from nominal 141 FREQSO...

Page 785: ...ent second harmonic content detected in ICX 150 IC22H Differential element second harmonic content detected in ICY 150 IN102 Contact Input IN102 49 IN10I Contact Input IN101 49 IN301 IN304 Contact inputs IN301 IN304 available only with optional I O module 50 IN305 IN308 Contact inputs IN305 IN308 available only with optional I O module 50 IN401 IN404 Contact inputs IN401 IN404 available only with ...

Page 786: ... pickup 24 MATHERR SELOGIC math error bit asserted for divide by zero etc in SELOGIC math functions 147 MPP1P Zone 1 phase to phase compensator distance element pickup 24 MPP2P Zone 2 phase to phase compensator distance element pickup 24 N64G 64G2T pickup for Ground Near Neutral 14 NX1DIR Directional control for element 50N1 67N1 and 51N 148 NX2DIR Directional control for element 50N2 67N2 148 OCX...

Page 787: ...essed 66 PB03_PUL Front panel pushbutton 3 pulse bit asserted for one processing interval when PB03 is pressed 66 PB04 Front panel pushbutton 4 bit asserted when PB04 is pressed 66 PB04_PUL Front panel pushbutton 4 pulse bit asserted for one processing interval when PB04 is pressed 66 PB1A_LED SELOGIC control equation drives LED PB1A 67 PB1B_LED SELOGIC control equation drives LED PB1B 67 PB2A_LED...

Page 788: ...sequence voltage polarized directional element 137 RDIRVY Y side reverse zero sequence voltage polarized directional element 138 REF1BYP Restricted earth fault bypass logic 13 REF1EN Internal enable for the REF element 13 REF1F REF element forward internal fault declaration 13 REF1P Restricted earth fault inverse time O C element timed out 13 REF1R REF element reverse external fault declaration 13...

Page 789: ...ter preset value 92 SC17QD SC24QD SELOGIC Counters 17 through 24 asserted when counter 0 95 SC17QU SC24QU SELOGIC Counters 17 through 24 assert when counter preset value 94 SC25QD SC32QD SELOGIC Counters 25 through 32 assert when counter 0 97 SC25QU SC32QU SELOGIC Counters 25 through 32 assert when counter preset value 96 SFX Generator slip frequency is within acceptable bounds between 25SLO and 2...

Page 790: ...el B transmit mirror bits TMB1B through TMB8B 101 TQUAL1 Time quality bit add 1 when asserted 133 TQUAL2 Time quality bit add 2 when asserted 133 TQUAL4 Time quality bit add 4 when asserted 133 TQUAL8 Time quality bit add 8 when asserted 133 TR1 Trip 1 SELOGIC control equation 41 TR2 Trip 2 SELOGIC control equation 41 TR3 Trip 3 SELOGIC control equation 41 TREA1 Trigger Reason Bit 1 for synchropha...

Page 791: ...its used for incoming GOOSE messages xxx 1 128 103 VB009 VB016 Virtual bits used for incoming GOOSE messages xxx 1 128 104 VB017 VB024 Virtual bits used for incoming GOOSE messages xxx 1 128 105 VB025 VB032 Virtual bits used for incoming GOOSE messages xxx 1 128 106 VB033 VB040 Virtual bits used for incoming GOOSE messages xxx 1 128 107 VB041 VB048 Virtual bits used for incoming GOOSE messages xxx...

Page 792: ...D temperature exceeds its alarm setpoint or biased alarm setpoint 44 WDGTRIP Winding Temperature trip WDGTRIP asserts when one or two when EWDGV Y healthy winding RTD temperatures exceed their trip or biased trip when RTDBIAS Y setpoints 44 ZCFREQS Zero crossing frequency measurement function detects a valid signal on the VS channel 69 ZCFREQX Zero crossing frequency measurement function detects a...

Page 793: ...tering and Monitoring DNP see Appendix D DNP3 Communications Fast Meter see Appendix C SEL Communications Processors For a list of analog quantities available for Modbus communications see Appendix E Modbus RTU Communications For a list of analog quantities available for IEC61850 communications refer to the logical nodes information in Appendix F IEC 61850 Communications NOTE Quantities that conta...

Page 794: ... VBX_ANG Angle of the B phase to neutral voltage degrees x x x x VCX_MAG C phase to neutral voltage V primary x x x x x VCX_ANG Angle of the C phase to neutral voltage degrees x x x x VABX_MAG A to B phase voltage V primary x x x x x VABX_ANG Angle of the A to B phase voltage degrees x x x x VBCX_MAG B to C phase voltage V primary x x x x x VBCX_ANG Angle of the B to C phase voltage degrees x x x ...

Page 795: ...d harmonic V primary x x x x VPX3_MAG Calculated zero sequence voltage 3rd harmonic V primary x x x x PAX A phase real power kW primary x x x x PBX B phase real power kW primary x x x x PCX C phase real power kW primary x x x x P3X 3 phase real power kW primary x x x x x QAX A phase reactive power kVAR primary x x x x QBX B phase reactive power kVAR primary x x x x QCX C phase reactive power kVAR ...

Page 796: ...maximum RTD temperature C x x x x RTD1 RTD12b RTD1 temperature to RTD12 temperature C x x x x TCUGEN Generator Thermal Capacity Used x x x x TCURTD RTD Thermal Capacity Used x x x x Analog Input Metering AI301 to AI304 Analog inputs for an analog card in Slot Cc EU x x x x AI401 to AI404 Analog inputs for an analog card in Slot Dc EU x x x x AI501 to AI504 Analog inputs for an analog card in Slot ...

Page 797: ...urrent A primary x x x ICYMN C phase minimum current A primary x x x IGYMN Calculated residual minimum current A primary x x x INMN Neutral minimum current A primary x x x VABXMX A to B phase maximum voltage V primary x x x VBCXMX B to C phase maximum voltage V primary x x x VCAXMX C to A phase maximum voltage V primary x x x VAXMX A phase maximum voltage V primary x x x VBXMX B phase maximum volt...

Page 798: ...3 phase maximum apparent power kVA primary x x x KW3YMX 3 phase maximum real power kW primary x x x KVAR3YMX 3 phase maximum reactive power kVAR primary x x x KVA3YMN 3 phase minimum apparent power kVA primary x x x KW3YMN 3 phase minimum real power kW primary x x x KVAR3YMN 3 phase minimum reactive power kVAR primary x x x FREQXMX Maximum frequency Hz x x x FREQXMN Minimum frequency Hz x x x FREQ...

Page 799: ...ms voltage V primary x x x x VCAYRMS C to A phase rms voltage V primary x x x x VSRMS Vsync rms voltage V primary x x x x Demand Metering IAXD A phase current demand A primary x x x IBXD B phase current demand A primary x x x ICXD C phase current demand A primary x x x IGXD Residual current demand A primary x x x 3I2XD Negative sequence current demand A primary x x x IAYD A phase current demand A ...

Page 800: ...TTX Internal trips counter x x x EXTTX External trips counter x x x INTIAX A phase accumulated current internal trips kA primary x x x INTIBX B phase accumulated current internal trips kA primary x x x INTICX C phase accumulated current internal trips kA primary x x x EXTIAX A phase accumulated current external trips kA primary x x x EXTIBX B phase accumulated current external trips kA primary x x...

Page 801: ...ariable 32 x x x x SELOGIC Counters SC01 SC32 SELOGIC counter 01 to SELOGIC counter 32 x x x xf Serial Number SER_NUM Serial number of the relay x a When E64F N or 64FFLT 1 FLDRES will be forced to 20M and DNP and IEC 61850 will report FFFFh b RTD open is equivalent to 32767 and RTD short is equivalent to 32768 when Rtds are monitored via LDP c See the engineering unit settings for example AI301EU...

Page 802: ...This page intentionally left blank ...

Page 803: ...ce Element 24 Volts Hz Element overexcitation 25 Synchronism Check Element 27 Undervoltage Element 32 Directional Power Element 40 Loss of Field Element 46 Current Unbalance Element 49 Thermal Element 50 Instantaneous Overcurrent Element 51 Inverse Time Overcurrent Element 52 AC Circuit Breaker 59 Overvoltage Element 60 Loss of Potential Element 64F Field Ground Element 64G Stator Ground Element 6...

Page 804: ...eric identifier of the firmware in the relay Calculated by the result of a mathematic sum of the relay code CID Abbreviation for Checksum Identifier The checksum of the specific firmware installed in the relay Contiguous Items in sequence the second immediately following the first CR_RAM Abbreviation for Critical RAM Refers to the area of relay Random Access Memory RAM where the relay stores missi...

Page 805: ...es from the relay make relay data collection by a communications processor faster and more efficient than transfer of the same data through use of formatted ASCII text commands and responses FID Relay firmware identification string Lists the relay model firmware version and date code and other information that uniquely identifies the firmware installed in a particular relay Firmware The nonvolatil...

Page 806: ...element that measures the difference current between two CTs located on the two ends of a winding generator or on two windings trans former to detect internal faults Phase Rotation The sequence of voltage or current phasors in a multi phase electrical system In an ABC phase rotation system the B phase voltage lags the A phase volt age by 120 degrees and the C phase voltage lags B phase voltage by ...

Page 807: ...stricted Earth Fault REF element provides sensitive protection against ground faults in wye connected generator winding The element is restricted in the sense that protection is restricted to ground faults within a zone defined by neutral and terminal CT placement RMS Abbreviation for Root Mean Square Refers to the effective value of the sinu soidal current and voltage measured by the relay accoun...

Page 808: ...Terminal Emulation Software Personal computer PC software that you can use to send and receive ASCII text messages via the PC serial port Underfrequency Element A protection element that causes the relay to trip when the measured electrical system frequency is less than a settable frequency VA VB VC Measured A B and C phase to neutral voltages VAB VBC VCA Measured or calculated phase to phase volt...

Page 809: ...SCII Protocol Automatic Messages 7 15 See also SEL Binary Protocols events 9 1 9 4 front panel 8 2 Autosynchronism 4 173 B Base Unit communications ports 2 4 Battery Clock 2 37 Breaker Failure Logic 4 211 Breaker Monitor 5 15 C Card Terminal Numbers 1 ACI card 2 9 10 RTD card 2 11 2 AVI card 2 8 3 ACI 2 AVI card number 2 7 3 ACI 4 AVI card 2 6 3 ACIE card 2 7 3 ACIZ card 2 9 3 DI 4 DO 1 AO card 2 ...

Page 810: ...ontrol 7 3 IEC 61850 F 1 F 48 MIRRORED BITS I 1 I 6 Modbus RTU protocol E 1 port power rear 7 7 rear panel 4 221 set relay 6 4 Synchrophasors C37 118 protocol H 1 H 20 Communications Ports See Communications Compressed ASCII 9 2 C 1 Configurable Label Kit 1 6 8 13 Configuration AI AO card 2 16 part number 2 15 3 7 Connections example rear panel 2 19 example side panel 2 19 Contact Outputs 2 23 4 2...

Page 811: ...eving event data 9 7 stator ground event report 9 24 summary section 9 3 9 5 synchronism check report 9 30 trigger 9 3 trigger settings 4 236 unfiltered 9 7 Event Summary 9 3 9 5 contents 9 3 currents voltages RTD temperatures 9 5 event type 9 4 SUMMARY command 7 46 F Factory Default LEDs 8 12 passwords 7 37 settings 4 1 Fail Safe 2 23 4 205 See also Contact Outputs TRIP output 4 205 Fast Binary M...

Page 812: ...so Commissioning Tests Instruction Manual Versions A 10 Intertie and Feeder Protection 4 87 IRIG B Time Synchronization 7 5 7 33 input specifications 1 13 IRI command 7 33 via communications processor C 3 J Jumpers 2 16 analog card V or I 2 16 analog card configuration 2 16 breaker control 2 18 Password 2 18 SELBOOT 2 18 L Labels configurable 1 7 8 13 Latch Bits 4 194 equation settings 4 195 nonvo...

Page 813: ...vel 7 19 change 7 37 factory default 7 37 front panel 8 3 jumper 2 18 Port Settings SET P command 4 219 4 223 Power Supply fuse ratings 2 37 Power Power Factor functional test 10 10 meter 5 4 power factor measurement convention 5 2 Protection Element 100 stator ground 4 38 autosynchronism 4 173 compensator distance 4 47 current unbalance 4 61 directional 4 101 directional control negative sequence...

Page 814: ...ng 1 8 SELBOOT 2 18 Self Tests 10 13 SELOGIC Control Equations 4 196 circuit breaker auxiliary 4 191 contact output 4 205 counters 4 203 event trigger 9 2 operators 4 196 4 200 PMU trigger H 8 Relay Word bits J 1 timers 4 200 trip logic 4 186 Sequential Events Recorder SER 7 39 9 29 automatic deletion and reinsertion 4 234 clearing 9 29 example report 9 30 retrieving reports 9 29 trigger settings ...

Page 815: ...R 10 12 with targets LEDs 10 12 with terminal 10 12 Time Code See IRIG B Time Synchronization Trip Contact See also Contact Outputs fail safe operation 2 23 4 205 wiring diagram 2 23 2 24 Trip Reset front panel function 8 13 Trip Voting See Resistance Temperature Device Trip Close Logic 4 186 breaker status 52A 4 191 trip equation TR 4 187 trip unlatch ULTRIP 4 191 Troubleshooting 10 16 setting er...

Page 816: ...This page intentionally left blank ...

Page 817: ...ds If both MIRRORED BITS channels are enabled omitting the channel specifier A or B clears both channels COM C A Clears all communications records for Channel A COM C B Clears all communications records for Channel B COM L Appends a long report to the summary report of the last 255 records in the MIRRORED BITS communications buffer COM L A Appends a long report to the summary report of the last 25...

Page 818: ...n primary amperes Enter k to scroll metering k times on screen MET DIF k Displays differential metering data Enter k to scroll metering k times on the screen MET E Displays energy metering data MET H Displays harmonic report for all differential phase currents showing fundamental through fifth harmonic levels and total harmonic distortion THD MET M Displays minimum and maximum metering data MET MV...

Page 819: ... of this row for repeat count k TAR R Resets any latched targets and the most recently viewed target row TIM Views time TIM hh mm ss Sets time by entering TIM followed by hours minutes and seconds as shown 24 hour clock TRI Triggers an event report data capture Access Level 2 Commands AST Auto Start starts generator automatic synchronizing control ASP Auto Stop stops generator automatic synchroniz...

Page 820: ...ntering the setting name for example 50P1P SET F Modifies front panel settings SET G Modifies global settings SET L n Modifies SELOGIC variable and timer settings for group n n 1 2 or 3 If n is not specified default is the active settings group SET M Modifies Modbus User Map settings SET P n Modifies port n settings n 1 2 3 4 or F if not specified the default is the active port SET R Modifies repo...

Page 821: ...ds If both MIRRORED BITS channels are enabled omitting the channel specifier A or B clears both channels COM C A Clears all communications records for Channel A COM C B Clears all communications records for Channel B COM L Appends a long report to the summary report of the last 255 records in the MIRRORED BITS communications buffer COM L A Appends a long report to the summary report of the last 25...

Page 822: ...n primary amperes Enter k to scroll metering k times on screen MET DIF k Displays differential metering data Enter k to scroll metering k times on the screen MET E Displays energy metering data MET H Displays harmonic report for all differential phase currents showing fundamental through fifth harmonic levels and total harmonic distortion THD MET M Displays minimum and maximum metering data MET MV...

Page 823: ... of this row for repeat count k TAR R Resets any latched targets and the most recently viewed target row TIM Views time TIM hh mm ss Sets time by entering TIM followed by hours minutes and seconds as shown 24 hour clock TRI Triggers an event report data capture Access Level 2 Commands AST Auto Start starts generator automatic synchronizing control ASP Auto Stop stops generator automatic synchroniz...

Page 824: ...ntering the setting name for example 50P1P SET F Modifies front panel settings SET G Modifies global settings SET L n Modifies SELOGIC variable and timer settings for group n n 1 2 or 3 If n is not specified default is the active settings group SET M Modifies Modbus User Map settings SET P n Modifies port n settings n 1 2 3 4 or F if not specified the default is the active port SET R Modifies repo...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for SEL-700G Series

Ormazabal ekor.rps General Instructions Manual preview
ekor.rps
Brand: Ormazabal Pages: 144
CD Automation REVO SSR User Manual preview
REVO SSR
Brand: CD Automation Pages: 15
CD Automation REVO SX Series User Manual preview
REVO SX Series
Brand: CD Automation Pages: 23
CD Automation Revo S User Manual preview
Revo S
Brand: CD Automation Pages: 31
CD Automation REVO S 3Ph 300 User Manual preview
REVO S 3Ph 300
Brand: CD Automation Pages: 34
ABB TA 75 DU V1000 Operating Instructions Manual preview
TA 75 DU V1000
Brand: ABB Pages: 36
Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories SEL-251-1 Instruction Manual preview
SEL-251-1
Brand: Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories Pages: 204
Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories SEL-251 Instruction Manual preview
SEL-251
Brand: Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories Pages: 208
ABB SGR-51 Manual preview
SGR-51
Brand: ABB Pages: 11
Riello HYDROLINE RCM NX Quick Start Manual preview
HYDROLINE RCM NX
Brand: Riello Pages: 4
ABB TA200DU Operating Instruction preview
TA200DU
Brand: ABB Pages: 26
ABB SPAS 348 C User Manual And Technical Description preview
SPAS 348 C
Brand: ABB Pages: 28
Vimar 03991 Quick Start Manual preview
03991
Brand: Vimar Pages: 2
Vimar Elvox 170A/101 Instruction Sheet preview
Elvox 170A/101
Brand: Vimar Pages: 2
Vimar SMART AUTOMATION BY-ME PLUS Quick Start Manual preview
SMART AUTOMATION BY-ME PLUS
Brand: Vimar Pages: 6
Solvimus MBUS-RELA4 User Manual preview
MBUS-RELA4
Brand: Solvimus Pages: 21
SLV SLV CONTROL 470806 Quick Installation Manual preview
SLV CONTROL 470806
Brand: SLV Pages: 34
FIBARO FGS-221 Manual preview
FGS-221
Brand: FIBARO Pages: 12

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands